Ault The Chess Tutor.pdf

"MASTERFUL . .Ault has selected situations that . perfectly illustrate techniques and tactics.... An extremely valuable book." -Atlantic City Sunday Press "Well illustrated ...the conscientious student will benefit greatly.A useful contribution to chess teaching." -Library Journal "An excellent do-it-yourself manual ... almost ideal for both beginner and intermediate player." -Massachusetts Patriot Ledger "This book can sharpen many parts of almost any player's game." -Indiana News-Sentinel "AN EXCELLENT WORK ... READS LIKE AN EASY-FLOWING NOVEL ...no phase of the game is left out.This is a book that can be referred to again and again over a lifetime." -Minnesota News Tribune LESLIE H. AULT is chairman of the behavioral sciences department at Hostos Community College (City University of New York). With a doctorate in psychology, he spent five years with Basic Systems/Xerox, working on instructional programs and directing various educational research projects. Dr. Ault was editor of the revised edition of Bobby Fischer Teaches Chess and was coauthor of a twenty-hour instructional program called "Bridgeveryone." A former member of Columbia University's winning 1960 chess team, Ault won the U.S. Intercollegiate Individual Championship in 1959. THE CHESS TUTOR: Elements of Combinations WALTER KORN, General Editor THE CHESS TUTOR: Elements of Combinations Leslie H. Ault ® A PLUME BOOK NEW AMERICAN LIBRARY TIMES MIRROR NEW YORK AND SCARBOROUGH, ONTARIO NAL BOOKS ARE ALSO AVAILABLE AT DISCOUNTS IN BULK QUANTITY FOR INDUSTRIAL OR SALES-PROMOTIONAL USE. FOR DETAILS, WRITE TO PREMIUM MARKETING DIVISION, NEW AMERICAN LIBRARY, INC., 1301 AVENUE OF THE AMERICAS, NEW YORK, NEW YORK 10019. . Copyright© Mason/Charter Publishers, Inc. 1975 All rights reserved. No part of this work covered by the copyrights hereon may be reproduced or used in any form or by any means-graphic, electronic, or mechanical, including photocopying, recording, or taping, or information storage and retrieval systems-without written permission of the publisher. For information address Mason/Charter Publishers, Inc., 641 Lexing(on Avenue, New York, New York 10022 T!iis is an authorized reprint of a hardcover edition published by Mason/Charter Publishers, Inc. The hardcover edition was published simultaneously in the United Kingdom by Mason/Charter Publishers, Inc., London, England ® PLUME TRADEMARK REG • .U.S. PAT. �FF. AND FOREIGN COUNTRIES REGISTERED TRADEMARK-MARCA REGJSTRADA HECHO EN FORGE VILLAGE, MASS, U.S.A. SIGNET, SIGNET CLASSICS, MENTOR, PLUME and MERIDIAN BOOKS are published in the United States by The New American Library, Inc., 1301 Avenue of the Americas, New York, New York 10019, in Canada by The New American Library of Canada Limited, 81 Mack Avenue, Scarborough, Ontario MlL 1M8 First Plume Printing, October, 1976 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 PRINTED IN THE UNITED STATES OF AMERICA CONTENTS .. Acknowledgments ix How to Use This Book xi How to Read Chess Notation xv CHAPTER1 Material Advantage CHAPTER2 Relative· Values 17 CHAPTER3 Double Attacks 33 CHAPTER4 Skewers and Pins 57 CHAPTER S Pin Exploitations 76 CHAPTER6 Discoveries 97 1 Guard Riddance 121 CHAPTER8 Cornering 146 CHAPTER9 Sett ing Up Combinations 170 ·cHAPTER7 CHAPTER·10 CHAPTER11 CHAPTER12 CHAPTER13 CHAPTER14 CHAPTER15 . Exchange Series 197 Queening Combinations Mate-Based Combinations .Review of Basic Elements Combined Operations I Combined Operations!! A Final Word ' 219 239 271 293 312 329 A CKNOWLED GMENTS • An important, but often neglected, step in preparing an instructional book is to have the draft tested out on several people typical of those for whom the book is written. Their comment� and sources of difficulty can be valuable guidelines for revision. In this effort, I was aided by five chess enthusiasts of varying abilities, whom I would like to thank: Dr. Walter Blanco, Stephen Hoyt, John Turney, Peter Ault, and Dr. Sergio Tan. I would also like to thank my editors at Pitman, Walter Korn and James Citranglo, the former for his sustained faith in the project, the latter for his judicious but never intrusive copy editing. Finally, I would like to record my appreciation for the various and sundry help of my children Peter, Jocelyn, and Maiia, and especially for the advice, support, and continued encouragement of my wife Patricia. Leslie H. Ault HOW TO USE THIS BOOK .. The purpose of this book is to teach you to play_better chess. I say teach because it is designed to maximize your learning. The concepts are pre­ sented in logical order so that you can master them by selecting moves throughout. You go through this book by actively responding-not by passively reading. Since my organization of this book and your responses to it will help to determine how much you learn, let's consider some important questions: I. What are you supposed to know about chess? I assume that you know the rules and moves of chess and are interested in the game. As long as you play, you might as well win as often as you can (unless you want to encourage your opponent). That's probably the main reason why you are reading this book. You may already know chess notation, which is fine. Then again, you may not, in which case you can learn it easily enough by reading the section following, "How to Read Chess Notation." If you are a beginner, the first two chapters will move you smoothly into the re­ maining material. If you are more experienced, you may find these chapters elementary, so skim quickly through them (stopping if you need to) and dig into Chapter 2. 3. What are you supposed to do? As you proceed, you will be asked questions about chess positions. Most of the time you will be asked to find moves for each side. When you have chosen your moves, read the top of the next page. Compare your moves with those given, and consider any differences carefrilly. Then continue with the next position, which normally appears on the bottom of the same page. 3. Should you use a chessboard? That all depends. The large diagrams are provided to make it easier for you to decide your moves without setting up a board. Using only the diagrams saves you the time needed for setting up the pieces and allows you to work with the book wherever you are. But if you have trouble in thinking out your moves or in understand­ ing or following the moves given as answers, then you should set up a board and use it. 4. Should you write down your answers? You may want to write down Or you your answers before checking them in the book, which is fine. may prefer simply to think out your answers, which is fine, too, as long How to Use This Book / xi as you make definite answers. But don't settle for some vague answer in your head and then, when you see the right answer in the book, per­ suade yourself that you had known it all along. 5. Should you expect to get all the answers right? More of your answers should be right than wrong, but the number you miss will depend on your chess skill and experience and the time you spend thinking. If you miss the right moves, read the comments in the given answer carefully and make sure you understand what is correct and why. If you find yourself missing several in a row, something is wrong; slow down, back up, think more carefully. 6. Why are you asked to decide for each side to move? In most positions, you are asked to find a move or moves for White to play and for Black to play. This is quite unusual, but I have two purposes. One is to accustom you not only to find sequences of moves that will beat your opponent but also to avoid such sequences so that your opponent will not beat you. The other is to make it harder for you to find the right move through rote elimination; rather, you should rely on looking for certain kinds of patterns to guide you to specific moves. (Good chess players are skillful in doing the latter, whereas computers rely primarily on the former, which is why humans can beat computers at chess-at least so far!) 7. Why does the book concentrate on tactical combinations? There are various aspects of the game (openings, positional play, attacking play, mating combinations, endings), but I consider tactical combinations the most important part. Learn these well and you will be a formidable player. Then you can improve your technique in the other aspects. This view­ point is discussed further in Chapter 8. 1. Why bother with combinations t o win a pawn? I t takes a certain level of skill, which may be beyond you now, to tum an extra pawn into victory in the endgame. Even so, it's better to be a pawn ahead than a pawn behind. Besides, the process of winning a pawn through some kind of combination is the same as the process of winning any other piece. It is the process that is important, and you are learning the process and how to apply it. 9. How is the book organized? As you will see as you proceed, most chapters deal with an element of combinations, starting with the most basic. Three of them (Chapters 9, 14 and 1 5) specifically require you to integrate these elements. Within each chapter, the element in question is explained and illustrated, after which you have to work out simple exxii I How to Use This Book amples. Further refinements are then added, and soon you will find your­ self handling positions of some complexity. 10. Why are most of the positions taken from grandmaster games? You may have the impression that the world's best players (Fischer, Spassky, Karpov, et. al. ) are wizards who plot moves beyond the comprehension of mere mortals. Their best games suggest this. However, they make use of the saipe basic elements of combinations that you will learn. Their games provide realistic examples suitable for this book. Furthermore, even the grandmasters overlook winning moves, make mistakes, and sometimes blunder. In the following pages, you'll have many chances to find moves that were missed by even the greatest players. As already discussed in item 1 of this section, your chess experience to date will dictate your starting point in the book. Proceed now to one of the following points: (a) The next section, "How to Read Chess Notation," (b) Chapter 1 , page 1 , or maybe even (c) Chapter 3, page 33. H ow to Use This Book / xiii HOW TO READ CHESS NOTATION • The recording and replaying of chess moves are done through various systems of chess· notation. The one in this book is called Descriptive Notation and is used for most chess books in English. A typical move tells what moves where. For example, P-K4 means that a pawn moves to a square identified as K4. As you can see, letters represent pieces, and letters and numbers represent squares. The pieces are identified by the first letter of their names, except that "knight" is written as N to be easily distinguished from K for "king." That is: fp \t> King � YiJ Queen = K = a .§. .l .Q._ E Rook = R Bishop = B • � t .ft Knight = N Pawn = P The symbols shown are those used to identify pieces in the diagrams. Each square is identified by a letter or letters representing the piece that originally stands on the file (up and down the board) and by a number from 1 to 8 showing the rank (across the board) . In the sample move P-K4, K4 stands for the fourth square up the board, counted from where the king is placed to begin the game. In recording moves in Descriptive Notation, the ranks are counted from 1 (closest to each player) to 8 (furthest from each player) . Thus each square has two names, one from White's point of view and one from Black's. This is shown in the two· diagrams that follow: White's Point of View Black's Point of View Black Black White White How tci Read Chess Notation I xv Note that White's point of view is from the bottom of the diagram upward, and Black's point of view is from the top downward. This is true of all diagrams in this book. White's pawns always move up the page, and Black's pawns always move down the page. Also note that since each side starts with two rooks, knights, and bishops, it is necessary to make a further distinction. This, as you can see, is done by reference to their location on the king's side of the board (KR, KN, KB) or on the queen's side (QR, QN, QB). The additional letter is used for squares and somethimes for pieces, whenever necessary. It is omitted whenever it would be superfluous. For example: N-KB3 Knight moves to the third square up/ down from where the king's bishop stood. This implies that N-QB3 is also pos­ sible; if not, N-B3 would be sufficient, and it's up to you to figure out which B3 ( KB3 or QB3) . QN-Q2 Queen-side knight moves to the second square in front of where the queen stood. This implies that the KN (king-side knight) could also move to Q2; if not, N-Q2 would be sufficient. R(l ) -N2 Rook on the first ran� moves to N2. You must figure out which N2 is meant, which shouldn't be difficult. This form is used whenever either rook could move to N2 and the use of KR or QR might not be clear. Between the piece and the square, a symbol is used to show what the piece does. So far, you have seen only the dash (-) to represent "moves to." For captures, a times sign (x) is used, and the last part of the move shows what is captured. For example, P x 'P shows that a pawn captures a pawn, and you must discover where on the board such a move is pos­ sible. If there is more than one such move, then further clarification is used, such as QP x P, less commonly P x KP, and rarely (as needed) P:x:P(5 ) . Castling is written as 0-0 to represent "castles king side" and as 0--0-0 to represent "castles queen side." For en passant captures, e.p. is written after the move ( P x P e.p.) . Checks are shown by ch after the move (R x N ch) . Moves are usually numbered in sequence, as follows: the move num­ ber, White's move, then Black's move, and so on. Thus, 1 P-K4 indicates White's move, and 1 . . . , P-K4 indicates Black's move. When a pawn reaches the eighth rank, it is promoted to a piece of the · xvi I How to Read Chess Notation player's choice, usually a queen. This is shown by an equal sign lowed by the piece chosen; for example, P-K8 = ( = ) fol­ Q. Sometimes, commentators choose to indicate their opinion of a move by one or more exclamation marks (!) or question marks (?) . A good strong move may merit an exclamation mark, whereas a really excellent move rates two. A bad move rates a question mark, and a really bad blunder rates two. In special cases, three or more marks may be used. The two symbols are also used in tandem, with sibly unsound move, and ?! !? indicating a strong but pos­ indicating a tricky but probably unsound move. Let us summarize: Piece Action K =King O=Oueen R =Rook B =Bishop N=Knight P =Pawn X captures -moves to (Kl R (Kl N (Kl B K a (Q) B (0) N (Ql R Castling: 0-0 0-0-0 Add-On Square 1 2 3 4 5 .6 7 8 check ch e.p. en passant good move ! !! excellent move bad move ? ?? blunder !? strong but maybe unsound ?! tricky but probably unsound castles king side castles queen side Promotion: (equal sign and piece chosen; e.g., P-R8=Ol For practice, you can play through this game from an exhibition by Alekhin (White), one of the game's greatest players. 1 P-K4, P-QB3 ; 2 P-Q4, P-Q4 ; 3 N-QB3, P x P ; 4 N x P , N-Q2; 5 Q-K2, KN-B3?? ; 6 N-Q6 mate. You should now have the position illustrated at the top of page xvi. How to Read Chess Notation / xvii White's knight is giving check and cannot be captured by Black's king­ pawn because such a move would expose Black's king to c apture by White's queen. Since Black has no way to save his king, it is checkmate, and White wins. xviii I How to· Read Chess Notation THE CHESS TUTOR: Elements of Combinations CHAPTER Material Advan tage <1 LI When the game of chess starts, both players have the same number and kinds of pieces . To win the game, one player must maneuver his op­ ponent's king to the point of unavoidable capture or "checkmate." Some.:. times, a game will be decided in the middle game (when each side still has many pieces on the board) by a series of moves leading to checkmate. For example, the position at the left below occurred in the game G. Thomas-Keres, Margate 1 937 . White to move threatens 24 Q x P mate, so Black has no time for 23 . . . , Q x N. Black could play 23 . . . , " R x P, stopping the mate and retaining a very strong position. But Keres, the Estonian grandmaster long recognized as one of the world's top players, saw his own mate and played : 23 . . . , B x P ch; 24 K x B, Q x N ch; 25 K-R l , Q-B6 mate. Note that White's final two moves were forced. More commonly, games are won by a player who gains superiority in material and uses this advantage to force eventual checkmate unless the loser resigns first. In the position at the right above, Black has a big advantage in material and threatens mate in several ways : . . . Q-R7, . . Q-N7, . . . Q-B6, . . . Q-K6, . . . Q-RS, or . . . N-BS. Obviously, the outcome of the game was settled much earlier when Black first gained the lead in material. White could have resigned some time ago but perhaps has been playing on, hoping for a stalemate. One way or the other, we can say that Black's advantage in material has produced his victory. , Material Advantage / 1 In general terms, material advantage usually leads to victory. I say "usually" because the ultimate victory depends on the skill of the players, the amount of the material advantage, and on considerations-both short-range and long-range-involving the position of the pieces. Among skilled players, the advantage of an extra pawn is often sufficient to win, and the loss of a bishop or knight justifies resigning in most positions. However, the position of the various pieces may compensate for or override material inferiority. You can be far behind in material but still catch your opponent's king in a mating net. Occasionally, positional factors other than an unsafe king are more important than material alone. And never forget, if you are behind in material, you may be able to wi!l it back, especially against a careless opponent. During the course of a game, you will have many opportunities to win material and thus move toward your ultimate goal. So will your opponent. If you make use of your opportunities and avoid the loss of material to your opponent, you will be a formidable player. This book has been written to teach you how to use series of moves to gain material and to defend yourself against losing material. Bas i c Ru l e 1 : Capture your opponent's unguarded p i ec e s, and d o n 't leave your own p i eces unguarded . The simplest way to gain material is to capture a loose piece ( one that your opponent leaves unguarded ) . Naturally, a good player almost never makes such a mistake, and you can't expect to win many games by waiting for your opponent to leave his pieces standing around loose. But capturing an unguarded piece is an opportunity that you must see and take advantage of when it occurs, for it represents a basic starting , point in learning about winning combinations. Likewise, you must not leave pieces unguarded that your opponent may capture. You will now be given some positions illustrating the first basic rule. In each one, you are asked to consider the situation from both sides: (a ) For White, what move captures an unguarded piece? (b ) For Black, how can the loss of the unguarded piece be avoided? (One way is to move the piece to a square where it is safe ; you can also guard or protect the loose piece, put another piece in its way so as to block off the attack, or even capture the op­ ponent's attacking piece-depending on the position. ) After you have decided on your moves for White and for Black, tum the page and compare your moves with those given in the answer at the top of the next page. Then try the next position, which is ordinarily found below the answer you have just consulted. In the position below: (a) White to move should play: (b) Black to move should· play: If you need help, look below the diagram. • B , ,. • Hint: Check the possible moves of each white piece; one of them is a free capture. Material Advantage I 3 Answer (a) Wh ite should take the u n g uarded k n i ght at h i s OB6, by 1 N x N. ( b ) B l ac k to move shou l d do s ometh i n g about th i s l oose k n i ght. One of B l ack's opti ons is to take off the attacker, by 1 . , N x N, which resu lts i n a trade of k n i g hts s i nce W h i te recaptures with 2 B x N. He can al s o move th e kn i g ht away, by 1 . , N-R2 o r 1 .. , N-N 1 o r 1 ., N-01. Or, B l ac k can protect the k n i g ht so that he may recapture ; e.g . , 1 , O R-B1 ; 2 N x N, Rx N, and mater i a l is sti l l eve n . Other feas i b l e ways of p rotecti ng the k n i ght are 1 . ., KR-B1 o r 1 ..., 0-02 or 1 , O-B 2 , but not 1 , O-N2 , which a l l ows 2 N x 0. Also bad wou l d be 1 . . . , N-K4; 2 P x N, as exp l a i ned i n C hapter 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . I n this position: (a) What should White to move play? (b) What should Black to move play? Hint: Again, examine the possible moves for each white piece. . . . Answer (a) White should take the unguarded kn ight at KB6 with his bishop: 1 B x N. (b) B l ack should protect h i s knight by 1 . , B-N2 . There are other ways of avo i d i n g the immediate threat. but they are· much less satis­ factory. Fo r example, if 1 . ., N-N 5 ; Q-B3 threatens mate and rips apart B lack's pos ition (2 . . ., P-B3; 3 N x N, Q x N; 4 Q x P, etc . ) . . . . . (a) White t o move should play: (b) Black to move should play: Hints Look for all possible captures, and make sure that you get something for nothing. Answer (a) Wh ite should p l ay 1 N x 0 . There are other captu res poss ible, but this one wins a queen for free . (b) B lack should not let h i s queen be taken , so he should move it away to a safe square (not 1 , O-K2, which wou l d sti l l a l low 2 N x 0) or capture the kn i g ht by 1 . , B x N or 1 . . . , N x N. . . . . . (a) White to move should play: (b) Black to move should play: Answer (a) White shou l d p l ay 1 K x R. Also, 1 R x R c h , B x R ; 2 K x R has the same effect. (b) The proper move for B l ack is to protect his rook, preferably by 1 . , K-03 , o r e l s e by 1 . . , N-82. N ote that the rook on 083 can­ not move to K3 to protect his col l eague because such a move wou l d expose the k i n g t o attack a n d captu re. The rook a t K 4 c a n escape by retreating but s h o u l d not, s i nce this move wou l d then l eave the k n i g ht unprotected ( 1 . . , R-K2 ? ; 2 K x N ) . Take specia l c red it if you saw thi s . Also, you probably saw that 1 . . , R-84 c h is a good move except for 2 P x R in reply. . . . . . Optional Play: The reason for preferring the king move is that after 1 2 Bx B, N-K3 ch; 3 K-N3, P x B, Black stays a pawn ahead. But after 1 2 Bx B, P x B; 3 N-Q4, White wins the QNP. Q , K-1\3; ., N-B2; . . . . . A special but simple application of Basic Rule 1 (taking your opponent's unguarded pieces ) occurs when one ·of your guarded pieces is captured. I have known beginners to think for minutes in such situations and then blunder, when what to do should have been obvious. For example, in the position below, Black has iust captured White's bishop at KN2. What move should White make now? Material Advantage / 7 Answer White shou l d recapture the bishop, 1 K x B, and restore materia l equality. Otherwise, he wil l remain a p i ece beh i n d . Thus far you have been looking only for pieces that are completely unguarded. As you may have noticed, an unguarded piece can sometimes be protected, so that the piece that captures it can in turn be captured. The attacker may threaten to capture with an additional piece instead, so that two pieces attack and only one defends. We will call this situa­ tion insufficient protection. The attacker can exploit this situation simply by capturing twice on the square in question. Try a simple example in the position below. Decide what to do for White to move and for Black to move. Answer White to move cannot win anything, because B l ack's rook is sufficiently guarded. After 1 R x R, Q x R ; 2 Q x Q, B lack p l ays . , N x Q and material is even. Because of what Black can do, however, White should make these trades. B l ack to move wins the insufficiently guarded rook by 1 , R x R . If then 2 Q x R, Q x Q, and B l ack is a queen ahead . S o, 2 O-QB 1 is not quite as bad-White l oses only a rook. . . . . . In the position below, is White's knight guarded sufficiently? Based on your answer, decide what White to move and Black to move should play. Answer The knight at KS is not g uarded sufficiently (the knight at 02 presents no problem). So White s h o u l d either p rotect it aga i n (1 ON-B3, 1 P-04, or even 1 P-84) o r move it away (1 N x N o r 1 KN-8 3 , o r even 1 N-N4). B l ack to p l ay w i ns the kn ight by captu r i n g twice : 1 . . . , N x N; 2 B x N, B x B. Now examine the position below and decide what you would do as White to move, and also as Black to move. Answer Wh ite to m ove shou l d p l ay R x R, which w i l l win a rook that is attacked twice but defended o n l y once . Th i s pos ition occu rred i n the game between San g u i netti and Fisc h e r , wo r l d c h a m p i o n 1 972 - 7 5 , a t Santiago in 1 959 , w i t h Black to move . Fischer natu ral l y avo ided the danger and chose 28 . . . , R-N 3 . On this square ( B l ack's KN3) the rook is protected twice , by the king and the pawn, s o i f 29 R x R c h , P x R; 30 R x P c h ? ? , K x R. Black m i ght a lso have moved his th reatened rook away ( e . g ., 28 . . . , R-R 1 ), but then White's rooks wou l d be very stro n g , being doubled on the open KN fi l e . I n the position below, from the game Fischer (White ) -Pilnick ( Black ) , Santiago 1 959, Black has just played 22 . . . , B x B. What move should White m ake? Material Advantage / 1 1 Answer S i n ce B l ack has just taken W h ite 's b i shop, Wh ite should g ive prime con­ s i de ration to recaptu r i n g . There a re two ways to recapture here, one r i g ht and one wron g . The wrong way is to use the queen (23 Q x B ) , because th i s m ove leaves the rook at 03 u n p rotected (23 ., Q x R). Fischer chose the r i g ht way, 23 R x B. Mate r i a l eq u a l ity was restored , and Fischer won in a n other ten moves o n the strength of h i s strong attack o n the k i n g s i d e . . . The next two positions involve insufficiently protected pieces. Decide what to do for White to move and for Black to move. Answer This position occurred in the game Reshevs ky-F l o h r , N ott i n g ham 1 93 6 . Reshevsky w a s America's l e a d i n g p layer for m a n y years-u nti l t h e advent of Fischer. H e re he was on move and p l ayed 22 O R-B 1 , add i ng a second defender to his k n i g ht at OB3. W h i te shou l d do so meth i n g about his i n­ suffici ently p rotected k n i g ht, a n d Reshevsky's move not o n l y guarded it but also prepared to contest the open QB fi l e . The alternative 22 N-K2 saves the k n i g ht but a l l ows B l ack to ach i eve a strong ga.me with 22 , O-B7. If W h i te p l ays 22 N x P, P x N ; 23 Q x N P , he w i n s o n l y two pawns for his k n i ght, w h i c h i s a bad barga i n , as wi l l be expl a i ned in Chapter 2. B l ack to move wou l d be happy to p l ay 22 . , Q x N; 23 Q x Q , R x Q, w i n n i ng a k n i g ht . . . . . . Now look at the position below and decide what to do for White to move and for Black to move. Consider carefully; look beyond the obvious. Material Advantage / 13 Answer -----------· ---- Wh ite to move can take B lack's loose k n i g ht ( N x N ) . B l ack t o move o bv i o u s l y s h o u l d d o someth i n g about his k n i g h t . H e m i g ht play . . ., N x N and trade k n i g hts , but he has a bette r c h o i c e. Notice that B l ack has three p i eces attack i n g White's O R P (0 + N + N ) , whereas White has o n l y two defenders (R + B ). This s i tuation a.r: ose in the t h i rteenth game of the World Champions h i p M atch 1 972 between Spassky and Fischer. F i s c h e r was on move as B lack and p l ayed 1 3 . . ., N (3) x P ; 1 4 B x N , N x B . If you saw th i s far a hea d , you d i d we l l . A s i t happened , Spassky cou l d have rega i ned h i s pawn by 1 5 O-B4 (th reate n i n g the k n i g ht) . B-0 2 ; 1 6 0 x O B P , O- B 1 ; 1 7 0 x 0, KR x 0, but W h i te wou l d have had to fi ght to d raw the endgame . Spassky chose i nstead to attack by 1 5 R-K1 ! ?, N-N 3 ; 1 6 B-02 (threate n i n g the O R P with B + R agai nst o n l y a rook defend i n g ) , P-R5 (the pawn cou l d not be defended again where it was , so it was m oved fo rwa rd ) . F i scher was now a c l e a r pawn ahead and won the game i n 74 moves . N ote that 1 3 . . . , N (3 ) x P protects the threatened k n i ght, so that i f 1 4 N x N, N x N. The a lternativ e 1 3 . . . , N (4) x P l eaves the k n i ght awkward ly p l aced at O R 5 . Notice a l s o that B l ack sends i n h i s k n i g hts first a n d l eaves h i s queen unti l last, and that Wh ite free l y trades his b i shop for B l ack 's k n i g ht but does not trade his rook fo r a k n i g ht. The reasons for these c ho i ces are d i scussed i n Chapter 2. Material Advantage I 1 4 Sometimes it is possible to win material merely by creating a superiority of attacking forces over defending forces centered around the intended victim. For example, in the position below, White has just played 39 R ( Kl)-K7. White was Karpov, the young Russian star who became world champion in 1975, playing against Kuzmin in the Leningrad Inter­ zonal 1973. His opponent resigned, figuring that further resistance was useless. Your question is, Why? Material Advantage I 15 Answer B lack's problem is h i s KBP. At the moment, it is attacked twice ( by both White rooks) and defended twice (by B lack's rook and king) . Wh ite p l ans to p l ay 40 N-KS , thereby engag i n g a th i rd attacker agai nst the hapless pawn. B lack has no way to defend h i mself. For example, 39 . . . , R-04 ; 40 N-KS, R x P; 4 1 N x BP, R- ON 1 ; 4 2 N-KS c h , K-B 1 ; 43 N x P ch, K-N 1 ; 44 R-N 7 mate . B l ack can always prolong the agony by giving up a rook for White 's k n i g ht, but Wh ite can s i mp l y capture B l ack's queen-side pawns and push down his own pawns wh i l e B l ack marks time. By the way, it is much more i mportant for Wh ite to attack the KBP than to go after B l ack's queen-s ide pawns right away. For one th i n g , as you can see from the sequence g iven above , B l ack's pos ition cru m b l es once the KBP is captured . In addition, B l ack can g rab Wh ite's pawns at the same time; for examp l e , 39 . . . , P-N 3 ; 40 R x RP (40 N�KS!) , R x P ; 4 1 R ( R 7)-N 7, N B 4 ; 42 R x NP, RxP. - Material Advantage I 1 6 CHAPTER Relative Values Once you begin to play chess, you learn that different pieces have different powers of movement. It therefore follows that some pieces are more valuable than others. In game situations, you should not only take off your opponent's unprotected pieces (Basic Rule 1 , page 2 ) , but observe also what we will call Basic Rule 2 : Bas i c R u l e 2 : Trade o r exchange you r less va l u a b l e p i eces for the more va l u a b l e p i eces of your opponent; conversely, do not trade your own p i eces for less va l u a b l e ones . In order to apply this rule, you have to know the relative values of the pieces. Let's first take a closer look at their different powers of movement, as illustrated in the diagrams below and on pages 1 8-1 9. In each diagram, the dots indicate those squares that the piece can move to. Queen in middle of board Reach of 27 squares Queen in corner Reach of 21 squares Relative Values / 1 7 Rook in middle of board Rook in corner Reach of 14 squares Bishop in middle of board Bishop in corner Reach of 13 squares Reach of 7 squares Knight in middle of board Knight in corner Reach of 8 squares Reach of 2 squares Relative Values I 18 Pawn in middle of board x Reach of 3 squares (• =simple move, =capture capability) Pawn at edge of board Reach of 2 or 3 squares ( • = simple move, x =capture capability). See note below Note: From its starting position on the second rank, the pawn can move ( 1) diag­ onally forward to capture, (2) one square forward, or ( 3) two squares forward. The values of the pieces correspond roughly to their movement potentials as illustrated in the foregoing diagrams, but there are other factors involved as well : • • • • • • Supported by a king, a queen or a rook can force checkmate against a lone king, but a bishop or a knight cannot. Two bishops with a king, or a bishop and knight with a king, can force checkmate, but two knights cannot. The bishop, which can usually reach more squares in one move than the knight, is limited to squares of one color and can never reach half the squares on the board. Since the knight moves back and forth between the light and the dark squares, it can eventually reach every square on the board (as can the queen and rook ) . The knight also has the unique ability to jump over other pieces. In crowded positions, the knight can often hop around freely, whereas other pieces find their movements greatly restricted by blocking pieces. The pawn can move only forward, never backward, so it can easily be blocked. However, once it reaches the last rank, it turns into a queen ( or rook, bishop, or knight if preferred ) ; therefore an ad­ vanced pawn can be very valuable. These considerations and the power of movement can be summarized by the approximate numerical values shown on page 20. Relative Values / 19 Piece Queen Rook Bishop Knight Pawn King Approximate Value 9 5 3+ 3 1 (invaluable) You should know these relative values and use them when you are considering trades of different pieces . Once you have figured out who gets what through a series of moves, you .can use these values to decide who will come out on . top. The king is listed as invaluable, since to lose the king is to lose the game, and you can't consider trading your king for any number of other pieces . The bishop and knight are considered of practically equal value ; good players prefer . the bishop very slightly, but their relative values depend greatly on position. At this stage you should not worry about trading one piece for the other. Here are some relationships based on the table of values, shown above : B (or N) B (or N) R R B +N B +N a R + R a B+N+N is better than equals is better than equals is better than about equals is much better than is better than is better than about equals p P+P+P B (or N) N+P+P R R+P R 0 R+B 0 3 3 5 5 6+ 6 +. 9 10 9 9+ to to to to to to to to to to 1 3 3 5 5 6 s 9 a+ 9 Relative Values I 20 Now let's see how you can use these relative values in some game situa­ tions. In the position below, Black has just played 4 , P-QR3. Comment on the following possible moves for White: . (a) (b ) (c ) (d ) 5 5 5 5 . . P-B3 N-B3 B x N ch B-R4 Relative Values / 21 Answer (a) 5 P-B3 is no good , because B lack takes the bishop for noth i n g by 5 . . . , P x B. (b) 5 N-B3 is a l so bad , s i nce afte r . . . , P x B; 6 N x N P , Wh ite has only a pawn i n exchange for his more val uable b i shop-a bad trade. (c) 5 B x N ch is all right, s i nce the b ishop and kn i ght are approximate ly equa l in val ue ( B l ack recaptu res with 5 , P x B) . (d) 5 B-H4 is a l l right, too ; Wt,iite chooses not to trade h i s b i shop for the kn ight, but rather withdraws h i s bishop from the pawn 's attack. . . . In the position below : (a) Should White to move play 1 R x Q? (b ) Should Black to move play 1 . , Q x R? . . Relative Values / 22 Answer (a) Yes , White shou ld p l ay 1 R x Q, s i nce the queen is worth much more than the rook. (b) For the same reason, B lack shou l d not trade h i s queen for only a rook by 1 , Q x R ; 2 R x Q. ( I nstead, B lack shou l d save h i s queen , for which he has various choices . B l ack's best choice is 1 . , 0-RS so as to capture White's QBP if Wh ite dec l i nes to trade queens. S i nce B l ack i s a b i shop ahead , he shou l d play to trade off his pieces so that h i s advantage wil l be strengthened .) . . . . . Optional Play: You might have noticed the sequence I . . . , Rx N; 2 Rx Q, Rx R ch; 3 K-N2, Rx R, and Black is further ahead. The trouble is that White answers 1 . . . , R x N with 2 Q x R, and Black has . given up the exchange for no purpose. Now decide whether White can make a favorable exchange in the posi­ tion below, and if so, how? Also, if Black moves, what should he do? Relative Values I 23 Answer White s h o u l d p l ay 1 N x R, thereby g a i n i n g a rook for his k n i g ht (after B lack recaptu res ) . The advantage of a rook agai nst a b ishop or k n i g ht i s ca l l ed the exchange. T h u s , White h e r e w i n s t h e exchange. B l ack to move s h o u l d save h i s rook , as by 1 . . , Q R-K 1 . . Here again, decide whether White can make a favorable exchange. If so, how? And what should Black to move do? Relative Values / 24 Answer White has no favorable exchange. B l ack's rook at B l ack's 02 is attacked twice but a lso defended twice. So 1 R x R, 0 x H; 2 0 x 0, R x 0 leads to noth i n g ; afte r 3 R-0 1 , Rx R ; 4 B x R, a draw cou l d be agreed on. B l ac k has noth ing immediate to worry about and has no favorable exchange either, s i nce White 's rook at White's 01 is more than adequately defended . Here is a position that arose in the fourth game of Fischer-Cardoso, Match 1 957. What would you do for White to move and for Black to move? Relative Values I 25 Answer White to move shou l d take B l ack's unprotected rook: Q x R ch. I n the game c ited , it was B l ack to move , and Cardoso p l ayed 1 7 . . . , R-OB 1 , removing h i s rook from danger and add ing a second attacker to White's OBP. ( B lack can hard l y take the pawn right away , because of h i s roo k: 1 7 . . , Q x P ? ? ; 1 8 Q x R c h . ) Fischer then protected his pawn by 1 8 P-B3 , where it is defended by the O N P . . See what you can find in this position for White to move and for Black to move. Look carefully and, if you need to, refer to the table of relative values, page 20. _ Relative Values / 26 A n swer This position i s from the game Santas i e re-Fischer, West Orange 1 957, with W hite to p lay. F i rst of a l l , B l ac k i s th reate n i n g Wh ite's q u een, so if Black m oves 24 . . . , R x Q ; 25 R x R (captu ring a rook fo r the q u een , at l east) , Q x KBP c h , and it's a l l over for White : 26 K-R 1 , R x P; 27 R x Q B , Q-N8 mate . Wh ite to move must natura l ly do something about this th reat . Retreating the queen (24 Q-K2) i s poss i b l e , but Wh ite has h i s own favorab l e ex­ chang e, based on B lack's l oose Q R . If i m mediate ly 24 R x R, R x Q, Wh ite comes out beh i n d . The r i g ht move i s 24 Q x R ch, as pl ayed by Santas iere. D i d you see it? Black i s i n check, so he has littl e choice but to p l ay 24 . . . , K x Q , l eaving White free to take the other rook : 25 R x R . White has obta i ned two rooks ( 1 0 poi nts ) for h i s queen (9 poi nts). a good ex­ chang e . The game contin ued 25 . . . , B-R3 (th reate n i ng . . . , B x R ) ; 2 6 R ( 1 )-Q 1 , B- K3 ( remov i n g the Q B from danger and a l so threate n i n g Wh ite's QBP) ; 27 N x P , and White won . Now decide what t o do for White t o move and for Black t o move i n the position bdow. Relative Values / 27 Answer Th i s position occurred in the game Fischer-Petros i a n (world c hamp i o n at the t i m e ) , Santa M o n ica 1 966. Wh ite 's r o o k on OB6 i s l oose , and so i s h i s b i shop o n 04. B l a c k t o move c o u l d sta rt w i t h 22 . . , K x R , w i n n i n g eas i ly . Actu a l l y , Fischer was o n move . It m a y s e e m that W h i te i s i n troub l e , since i f h e moves h i s rook away, h e l oses h i s b i s hop ( e .g . , 22 R- K6 , R x B ) . But there i s a s i m p l e s o l ut i o n , p layed b y Fischer: 2 2 R x N . I f now . . , B x R ; 2 3 B x B , a n d White h a s w o n a b i s hop a n d k n i ght fo r h i s rook . I nstead , Petro s i a n p l ayed 23 . , R x B , keep i n g mate r i a l equal ity and l e a d i ng to a d raw. . . . . What about this position, for White and for Black to move? Relative Values / 28 Answer You s h o u l d notice that B l ack's OP is u n p rotected and a l s o that Wh ite's k n i ght at OB3 i s defended twi c e ( by P and R ) but attacked three t i m es ( by N , B , and 0). Wh ite to move can take care of both of these featu res by 1 3 N x OP, w i n n i n g a pawn and removi ng h i s k n i ght from danger. I n the game Bazan-F i s c h e r , Mar d e l P l ata 1 96 0 , it was B l ack's move , a n d F i s c h e r won a pawn b y 1 2 . , B x N ; 1 3 P x B , N x O B P . N ote that B l a c k captures with the b i shop fi rst, so that when the k n i g ht recaptu res , there w i l l be no trou b l e i n getti n g the k n i ght out aga i n ; th e game con­ t i n ue d 14 O-K 1 , N x B c h ; 15 O x N , P-B S . In contrast, i f 1 2 , N x N; 1 3 P x N , B x P, the b i shop is awkward l y p l aced . . . . . . Now analyze the position below for White to move and for Black to move. Relative Values / 29 Answer This position is from Fischer-Seidman, Rosenwald Tournament, New York 1956, and is very similar to the one shown on page 13, Chapter 1. Based on his two-to-one superiority, Black threatens to win a piece by 21 Bx N; 22 Bx B, ... , 0 x B (naturally not 21 . . . , 0 x N ? ?; 22 Bx 0 , Bx B, with only a bishop and knight for the queen). In the game, it was Fischer's move, and he exploited his own three-to­ one superiority against Black's ORP: 21 N(3)x RP, Nx N; 22 Nx N, Bx B; 23 Rx B, with a pawn to the good. Note that if 21 ..., Bx N, White can safely reply with 22 Nx B or 22 Bx B. You have seen several positions in which one side exploits a superior concentration of forces (two-to-one, three-to-two, etc. ) , but care must be taken for the relative values that may be exchanged. You have been doing this already in several positions by first exchanging with lesser­ value pieces and making the last capture with the most valuable piece. To confirm your understanding, consider this position which happens to be from one of my games. Black has just played 3 . . . , B-R3 . What should White do? Relative Values ( 30 Answer Wh ite has a two-to-one superiority agai nst B l ack's bishop, but here q u a l ity i s m o re i mportant than quantity: 4 Q x B ? ? , N x O; 5 B x N, and Wh ite has gai ned two p i eces (B + N ) , but at the cost of h i s queen . I f Wh ite cou ld captu re fi rst with h i s bishop and then with h i s q u ee n , he wou l d w i n a piece, but that is i mposs i b l e here. So, Wh ite must do somet h i n g about the attac k on his queen, such as 4 P-03. I n the actual game, Wh ite never had a chance to move because I was p layi ng B l ac k and I res i g ned ! This was back i n my high school days i n a team match agai nst an important riva l , and I was keyed u p . Afte r I made m y th i rd move , i t sudde n l y occu rred to me that my enterp r i s i n g bishop was i n s uffici ently p rotected (true) and that I was about to lose a p i ece (not tru e ) . Rather than g ive my opponent the sati sfaction of actu a l l y w i n n i n g my p i ece, I i mpetuously res igned. A l e rted by h i s surprise, I realized my m i stake with i n a few seconds, but it was too late . Don't let th i s happen to you . Some Exceptions and Refinements o n Relative Values Throughout this book, you will learn how to win material, on the assumption that winning material helps to win the game. This assump­ tion is usually, but not always, true. Four exceptions follow. Take a look at them without answering any questions. We'll learn more about winning material in Chapter 3 . I n the top left position on page 3 2 , from Fischer-Najdorf, Fifteenth Olympiad 1 962, Black has a rook and a pawn for a knight, a consider­ able material advantage. White cannot make up this deficiency im­ mediately, but his pieces work well together, whereas Black's king is unsafe. Such positions occur with some frequency when one player deliberately sacrifices material to gain attack chances. The game con­ tinued 1 5 . . , B-B4; 1 6 N-N7 ch (to prevent Black from castling) , and Black gave up eight moves later. . Relative Values / 31 The position at the right above arose in the game Capablanca­ Alekhin, Nottingham 1 936. White has two bishops, a knight, and a pawn against two rooks-a nearly even match . But the three minor pieces have all the play. Capablanca continued 3 1 N-Q2. The game was adjourned at move 3 8 , and Alekhin resigned. The position at the left below is from Fischer-Sanguinetti, Mar del Plata 1 959. The pawns are even, and Black has a rook for a bishop. But White's bishop is strong in conjunction with his QRP, and Fischer to move avoided B x R just yet. Instead, he continued 55 R-QB l , R-R l ; 56 R x P , R-QB l ; 5 7 K-Q2 and soon won. Such positions, i n which a minor piece works better than a rook, occur now and then; of course, a rook is usually better. In the previous position, the bishop was helped by an advanced pawn, which · can be very powerful. At the right below, from Hort-Keres, Oberhausen 1 96 1 , Black's two advanced pawns more than overcome his tremendous material deficiency. Keres played 42 . . . , R-Q7 with the strong threat of . . . , P-B7. White tried 43 R x P, P x R; 44 Q-N3, R-Q l but could not save the game, because of Black's impending . . . , R-QR l and . . . , R-R8. Relative Values / 32 CHAPTER D o uble A t tacks • Important as the two basic rules are (taking unguarded pieces and exchanging lesser-value for higher-value pieces, pages 2 and 1 7 ) , to play a decent game of chess you should do more than simply wait for chances to apply them. True, some weak opponents will leave their pieces un­ guarded for you to take, or will allow you to make favorable trades. If they do, take your profit thankfully! You can even help yourself by creating opportunities for an opponent to go wrong. For instance, you can move so as to threaten an opponent's piece ; if he remains unaware, then you can take it off next move. But many players won't fall for such obvious tricks. Having been tricked before, they will look carefully at each move to see what it threatens. In order to beat such players, you will have to be subtler. You will have to learn to hit them with combinations that go further than direct one-move threats. Does this mean that you should look several moves ahead? Yes and no. Yes, because when playing carefully you'll want to check out some variations-"! go there, he goes there, I go here, etc." But this process is much simpler than it seems if you know what to look for and how to recognize basic patterns. The answer is also no, because when you know what to look for and can recognize basic patterns , you can play combinations without even thinking about them. This is why good players can play quality chess even when they have to move every few seconds. Here's an illustration of knowing what to look for. Something like the position below was set up for me by one of my students. "Let me see if you can solve this one," he said, "White to play." Double Attacks I 33 In less time than it takes to describe, I looked at the board, saw that White was ·hopelessly behind in material and about to get mated in a couple of different ways, and played 1 Q-B4 ch with mate coming up . To be sure I understood the solution, my student had me demonstrate 1 . . . , K-R l ; 2 N-B7 ch, K-N l ; 3 N-R6 ch, K-R l ; 4 Q-N8 ch, R x Q ; 5 N-B7 mate. He was amazed. "Nobody a t my club could find it in less than ten or fifteen minutes. How did you do it so fast?" "Simple," I replied, "the position is obviously hopeless unless White can do some­ thing with his queen and knight, and this is a standard smothered mate pattern. " I went on explaining, but he still regarded my quick solution as somehow superhuman . . But it really is simple, as you will see. The first basic pattern you will learn is the double attack. The double attack is the most important combinational element. It involves attacking two of your opponent's pieces at the same time. When he saves one, you take the other. Take a look at these samples : On the left, the bishop threatens both rooks . Next move, it can take one of them. On the right, the situation is reversed : the rook threatens both bishops and can take one on the next move. Double Attacks / 34 Note the difference if one of the pieces is protected. On the left above, Black can move his unprotected rook at QR6. White then takes the other rook, and Black recaptures : B x R, K x B. So White wins the exchange-a rook for his bishop . On the right, Black saves his unpro­ tected bishop ( e.g., 1 . . , B-QB 3 ) , and White has nothing to gain (2 R x B ch, K x R, and White is down the exchange ) . . The queen can exploit patterns in the same manner as either the rook or bishop ( whose moves it combines ) . But except for the enemy king, the queen has no possibility of attacking higher-value pieces. On the left above, the double attack is made with check. Black must save his king, and White then plays Q x R. On the right, the double attack against both rooks will be ineffective if either is already protected. The attack also fails if Black moves either rook to squares x or y, where they will protect each other. Double Attacks / 35 • � • � • � • • B ,,. .,_ • � • D -- � B � � B' • • • • • • • • • • m � • • • • � • • • Despite their limited mobility, the pawn and the king sometimes get their chance to make a double attack. On the left, the pawn is · forking the rook and knight. After 1 . . . , R Q4 ; 2 P x N , R x P, White gains a knight for his pawn. On the right, the king is attacking both the rook and the knight. When. Black saves the rook, White will play K x N. - The knight is a good piece for making double attacks. Because of its tricky move, beginners often . have trouble spotting knight forks . You must learn to look for possible connections involved in the knight's crooked move as well as those that apply to the straight lines and diagonals. On the left above, the knight is forking the queen and rook. White wins the exchange after 1 . . , Q-B2; 2 N x R, Q x N. On the right, the knight is giving check and menacing the rook. The king must move, and White takes the rook. Now turn to page 37 and try to figure out on your own the double­ attack position shown there. . Double Attacks I 36 Because of the queen's wide range, double-attack possibilities using the queen occur frequently, and you should always be on the lookout for them . In the position below, one of the world's best players wasn't careful enough . See what you can find for both sides . Hint: What pieces are unprotected and subject to attack? How can the queen attack two of them at once ? Double Attacks / 37 Answer Black has a d o u b l e attac k o n Wh ite 's k i n g and roo k . T his position oc­ cu rred in the fifth game of Ta imanov-Fischer, Candi dates M atch 1 97 1 . Ta imanov had j u st b l u nd e red by grabbing a pawn at KB6 with h i s rook . Fischer p l ayed 46 . , 0-05 c h , a n d W h i te res i g n ed . After 4 7 K-R 2 , 0 x R ; . . B l ack wo u l d h ave been a rook fo r pawn ahead . I f 47 R-8 2 , R-8 8 c h w i n s t h e roo k (48 K-R2, Q x R) . Wh ite ruined h i s chances by moving i nto th i s positi o n . If Wh ite had been on move, h e cou l d have avo i d ed the damage i n various ways , such as by the aggressive R-87 o r by the s i m p l ify i n g 0-84 c h . c h ases t h e k i n g away a n d sti l l This time, see i f you can find a double attack that uses a rook. Hint: Look for two vulnerable pieces on a straight line. Double Attacks / 38 A n swer The v u l nera b l e p i eces are White's k i n g and bishop, and B l a c k can p l ay 23 . , R-B7 ch, w i n n i n g the bishop. N ote that 24 R-02 in defense does not help because of . . . , N x R . When this position occurred i n the fi rst game of Spass ky-Fischer, World Championsh i p M atch 1 972 , Spassky (Wh ite) was on move and saw the threat. His move was 23 H-O B 1 , trad i ng off the rooks. Because of the symmetrical pawn structu re, the resu lting endgame shou l d hav e been a s i m p l e d raw, but Fischer l ost through i mpetuous p l ay . . . In the position below, see what can be done with a bishop. Keep in mind what you have learned about relative values . Hint: Look for two vulnerable pieces along a diagonal. Double Attacks / 39 Answer White to move can s i m p l y take B l a c k 's l oose rook : R x R , and B l ac k is done fo r. That l eaves us with what to do for B l ac k on move , the s i tu ation that faced Fischer in the third game of his Candi dates M atch 1 97 1 against Taimanov . B l ac k cou l d avoid material l oss by 30 . . . , R x R ; 31 0 x R, K-N 1 { protecting the bis hop) . but not by moving the rook { e . g . , 30 . . . , R-03 ; 3 1 R x B ch ) . But B l a c k has a much bette r move , based on the diagonal connection between White 's queen and rook . The right move is 30 . . , B-B3, which Fischer p l ayed . If White n o w moves h i s q u e e n away, B l ack takes White 's rook for free . If 3 1 R x R, B x O; 32 R x B c h , K-N 2 , and B l a c k has a queen fo r a rook and knig ht. Tai manov chose another way : 3 1 0 x B , 0 x O ; 32 R x R , 0-B3 , and again B l ac k has 0 fo r R + N . With this edge B l a c k won the game. . Although the mobility of pawns is very limited, they are often involved in combinations . There are many of them, and they tend to be up on the front lines of the action. See what you can do with a pawn in the position below. Hint: Look for two pieces on the same rank and one square apart, where they can be forked by a pawn. Then see if you can find a pawn to move to that square. Double Attacks / 40 Answer B lack's b i s hop and kn i g ht a re conve n i ently l ocated fo r a pawn fork, w h i c h W h i te can exp l o i t by 1 3 P-KS . T h i s move w i n s a p i ece f o r a pawn , a n d B l ac k can choose between 1 3 . . . , B-K2 ; 1 4 P x N , B x P , o r 1 3 . . . , B x P ; 1 4 P x B . N ote that W h ite 's p a w n a t K B 4 p rovides a necessary p rotection for the pawn mov i n g to KS ( oth e rw i s e , B l ac k cou l d capture the i ntru d i n g pawn w i t h i m p u n ity) . When t h i s pos ition occurred in the game Poschel-Fischer, Weste rn Open 1 963, it was B l ack's m ove . Fischer avo ided the pawn fork by p l a y i n g 1 2 . , P-K4 , b l o c k i n g t h e advance of W h ite 's ki ng-paw n . If t h e n 1 3 P x P , B x P. Paw n forks are re l ative l y e a s y t o s p o t , s o m o s t of the t i m e , a lthough they are th reatened, they are avo ided i n the actu a l p l ay . . . On the other hand, knight forks are relatively hard to see, and even the world's best players overlook them . For example, a former world cham­ pion fell into this one. You should have no trouble finding it if you look. Double Attacks I 41 Answer In the World Champi ons h i p Tou rnament 1 948, Euwe (world c hamp i o n , 1 935-1 937) as B l a c k h a d j u st p l ayed h i s q u e e n from 0 2 t o K 2 . H i s op­ ponent, Kere s , long one of the wor l d 's best p layers , saw the fork and p layed 34 N..'.. B 6. Euwe res igned at this point, because W hite not o n l y w i n s t h e exchange t o sta rt w i t h ( 3 4 . . . , O-N 2 ; 35 N x R , 0 x N ) b u t a l s o then demo l ishes B l ack's position with 36 P-K6. I only expected you to find the knight fork-not to fo resee the effects of 36 P-K6-but they are worth tak i n g a look at. Wh ite th reatens mate i n two b y 3 7 R-B8 c h and 3 8 R ( o r 0)-K R 8 . Another threat i s 37 P x P c h , K x P ; 3 8 R-B 7 c h ( o r 37 . . . , 0 x P ; 3 8 R-B8 c h ) , w i n n i n g the queen . B l a c k has no defense worth p l ayi n g : if 36 . . . , P-B3 ; 37 R-B8 c h , K-N 2 ; 3 8 R-B7 c h w i n s B l ac k 's q u e e n . B l ac k t o move i n the o r i g i n a l pos ition s h o u l d b r e a k u p the k n i g ht-fork pattern . 34 . . . , O-R5 wou l d be a good way of doing so with the cou nter­ threats of . . . , 0 x BP ch or . . ., O-B 7 . Here is another chance for you to find a knight fork. Decide what to do for White to move and for Black to move. Double Attacks / 42 Answer Wh ite has the kn i g ht fork at KB6. T h i s position is from Fischer-J anosev i c , g a m e 1 , M atch 1 958. F i s c h e r (Wh ite) p l ayed 32 N-86 c h , K-82 ; 33 N x R , R x N , and restored mate r i a l e q u a l ity . W i n n i n g back the exchange i s much more i mportant than defe n d i n g the OAP, and, i n fact, W h i te sti l l had t i me t o defend the p a w n afte r w i n n i n g the exchange. B l ac k to p l ay shou l d defend agai nst the fork by moves such as 32 . . . . R-KB 1 or 32 . . ., K-N 2 . N otice that after 32 . . ., K-N 2 ; 33 8-04 c h ? ( attacking t h e k n i g ht a n d t h e k i n g ) i s m et b y 3 3 . . . , R x B . T h e a lternative 32 . . ., K-82 g ets sticky after 33 N-N5 ch, K-N 1 ! ( not 33 . . ., K-N 2 ; 3 4 N x B c h , R x N ; 3 5 8-04 c h , R x B ; 3 6 R x R ) ; but B l ac k can stay on top : 34 8-8 1 , 8-85 c h ; or 34 N x B , R x B; 35 B-N 3 , N-85. Each of the next several positions contains opportunity for double attack by various pieces . Since you won't know in advance which piece can make the double attack, you will have to look carefully along the ranks , files, and diagonals, as well for possible knight forks. Try this one first. Double Attacks I 43 Answer Th i s pos ition is from Fischer-B i s g u i e r , U .S . C h a m p i o ns h i p 1 957-1 95B , w i th White on move. Fischer p l ayed 40 0-BB c h , K-0 2 ; 41 0 x R , and B l ack res i g ned . B l ack to move cou l d avo i d t h i s dou b l e attac k by mov i n g h i s rook but can do much better than merely save a roo k . Take s peci a l c redit i f you saw that B l ack to move mates by 40 . . . , A-RB ch ; 4 1 K-N 2 , 0-KBB mate . White can stop the i m m e d i ate mate by g iv i n g up h i s queen by 41 0-0 1 ; but B l ack sti l l mates by 4 1 . . . , R x 0 c h ; 42 K-N 2 , P-N 5 ; 43 P-R3 , 0-KBB ch ; 4 4 K-R 2 , 0-N B ( o r R B ) mate . Now see what you can find here for White to move and for Black to move. Double Attacks / 44 Answer Th i s position is from the game Fischer-B i s g u i e r i n the fo l l ow i n g year's U .S . Champions h i p 1 958-1 959. There are a few poss i b i l ities, but I hope you saw the crus h e r : 33 . . . , N-B5 c h by B l ack, fo rking the king and queen. Fischer was o n move and saw it, so h e p l ayed 33 P x P . Now, of cou rs e , 33 . . . , N-B5 c h is m et by 3 4 P x N . Natu ra i l y , Wh ite i n the o rig i n a l posi­ tion shou l d n ot take the u n p rotected b i shop by 33 N x B , because 33 . . . . N-BS ch sti l l fo l l ows, this time with B l ack w i n n i ng the queen for two m i no r p i eces . Notice a l s o that 33 B-B3 ch can be met with . . . , B-B 3 . T h e actu a l g a m e conti nued ( after 33 P x Pl . . . , B-BS ; 3 4 B-K 1 ( not 34 P x B ? ? , N x BP c h ) . h o l d i n g o n to the K N P . Fischer thus remained a pawn ahead and eventu a l l y won the game ( i n 86 move s ) . a res u l t that a l most a lways happened when B i s g u i e r p l ayed Fischer. Again, see what you can find for White to move and for Black to move in the position below. Double Attacks I 45 Answer B l ack to move w i l l g l a d l y p l ay . . . N x R . When t h i s position occu rred i n the game M a r i e-Fischer, Skopje 1 967, Wh ite p l ayed 13 B x N. At fi rst glance, th i s seems to win the k n i g ht fo r noth i n g , but d i d you see how Fischer rega i ned h i s p i ece ? H e p l ayed 1 3 . . . , O-N 3 c h ; 14 K-R 1 , Q x B-a d o u b l e attack o n k i n g and b i s h o p . Here is a situation in which a great former world champion lost his way. See if you can do better. Double Attacks / 46 Answer This pos ition came u p when the g reat A l e kh i n was p l ayin g B l ac k agai nst Buerger. A l e kh i n had just moved his queen to BS, eager to destroy Wh ite with 1 . . . , B x K B P c h ; 2 K-B 1 , B x N c h . Note that B l ac k, in captu r i n g the k n i g ht with his b i s h o p , discovers c h e c k with h i s q u e e n , so Wh ite c a n n ot recapture (3 P x B) b u t must save h i s k i n g . You w i l l l earn about such d i scovered attacks i n Chapter 6 . Black wou l d not only be a p i ece u p , but wou l d also m ate Wh ite after 3 K-N 1 , B-B7 ch ; 4 K-B 1 , B-K6 c h ; 5 K-K 1 , 0-B B m ate . H owever , it was Wh ite to move . As it happened , both p l aye rs were i n t i m e pressu re (forced t o move q u i c k l y o r g o over the i r t i m e l i m it) . and Buerger g rabbed with 1 N x B. T h i s move won a p i ece and added anoth e r defender t o the th reatened K B P , and Wh ite w a s a b l e eventu a l l y t o w i n t h e gam e on t h e strength of h i s k n i g ht agai nst two pawn s . B u t he fa i l ed to see the crunching 1 N-R S c h , forking k i n g and queen . What about you ? Now see what you can find for White and for Black below. Double Attacks / 47 Answer Th i s position i s from one of Botv i n n i k 's outstanding games , as White, agai nst Tartakover, Nott i ngham 1 93 6 . H ere Botv i n n i k th reatens a pawn fork by 18 P-06 , w i n n i n g a b i shop for two pawns after 18 . . . , B x O P ; 19 P x B, O x P. B l a c k defended agai nst this th reat by playing 1 7 , P x P, to which Botv i n n i k rep l i ed 18 N x P , with a strong game . . . . A few moves later in the same game (Botvinnik-Tartakover) , this position was reached. What does White threaten, and how can Black defend himself? Double Attacks / 48 Answer Wh ite wants to p l ay R-06 c h , also attacki n g B l ac k ' s q u e e n . Ate r 27 R-06 c h , O x R; 28 P x 0 , W h ite wou l d be c o mfo rtably ahead a n d sti l l h ave an attack. I n the game , Tarta kover tried to defend h i mself by playing 26 . . . , O R-0 1 . Botv i n n i k c o u l d then have p layed 27 R x R , R x R ; 28 0-NS c h , K- K3 ; 29 0 x R , w i n n i n g a rook by a skewer attack ( Chapter 4) . H e chose i n stead 2 7 0-N S c h and won i n another way (27 . . ; , K- K3 ; 28 R x R, P-B3 ; 29 R x R , N-B S ; 30 O-N7 , res i g n s ) . B l a c k in the o r i g i n a l position has no other way of defend i ng h i mself. The k i n g has no p l ace to move except for 26 . . . , K- K3 , wh i c h sti l l a l l ows 27 R-0 6 c h , and if 26 . . . , 0-N4 ; 27 R-06 c h , or 27 B-N5 c h , o r 27 O-N5 ch leads to m ate on t h e n ext m ove. I f 26 . . . , KR-01 ; 27 B-N5 ch ( o r 27 0 -N5 c h } , K- K3 ; 28 N-N 7 mate. S o 26 . . . , Q R-01 is probably t h e best try, b u t i t does n o t s ave B l a c k for very l o n g . A good answer to " H ow c a n B l a c k d efe n d h i mself?" i s , " H a rd l y at a l l . " Now let's see i f I can trip you u p with the position below. Be careful! In the game Fischer-Robatsch, Vinkovci 1 968, White had just ,played 1 6 Q x Q. Naturally, Black recaptured, but how? Double Attacks / 49 Answer There are three ways for B l ac k to recapture the queen , but o n l y one way is correct. If either rook recaptu res , Wh ite wi l l p l ay 1 7 B-B7 with a dou b l e attac k on rook and kn i g ht Best f o r Black then wou l d be t o save h i s knig ht and g ive up the exchange ( B x R ) . The correct recaptu re , p l ayed by Robatsch , is 1 6 . . . , B x 0 , p rotecti n g B lack's OB2 as we l l as the knight. The game cont i n ued 17 B-06 (a double attack on rook and pawn) , R-K 1 ; 1 8 B x OBP, N ( N3 )-02 ; 1 9 B-04 , N x P, rega i n i n g the pawn. I f you made th i s answer, you are show i n g good antic i pation i n spotti ng and avo i d i n g double attacks. You proba b l y find it more fun to attac k you r opponent, but not letting h i m attack you i s a b i g part o f w i n n i n g chess games. Before you take a crack at another position, l et's look backwa rd and forward tor a moment. Recapitulation and Some Principles of Defense You have seen several examples of double attacks, in which an attacking piece simultaneously threatens two opposing pieces. For the double attack to be effective, the threat of capturing both opposing pieces must be real. That is : 1 . Both attacked pieces are unprotected, or 2. One attacked piece is unprotected, whereas the other is protected but of higher value than the attacking piece, or 3. Both attacked pieces are protected but of higher value than the attacking piece. Defense against a double attack with two real threats starts by avoiding the attack before it can be made, as you have been doing in the previous positions. Once a double attack is made, even under one of the condi­ tions listed above, it may still be possible to escape, in ways such as : 1 . Capturing the attacker. 2. Defending both attacked pieces (a ) Moving away one attacked the other piece and is safe (b ) Moving a third piece to attacked pieces. with one move, as follows : piece to a s4uare wh�re it defends itself. a square where it defends both Double Attacks / 50 3. Moving one of the attacked pieces to capture or to create a threat that must be answered ( after which the other attacked piece can be saved) . 4. Creating a countercombination that either gains as much as or more than the original attack, or disrupts the original attack in some way. These escape possibilities are important for the defender. They are also important for the · attacker deciding on his attack, for they are conditions under which a double attack will fail against an alert de­ fender and perhaps should not be attempted at all. Now let's see how you can apply these defensive maneuvers. In this position, White has a very promising knight fork with N-B6, but it doesn't work. Can you see why? Double Attacks / 51 Answer If White tries 24 N-B6 , B l a c k merely takes the k n i g ht off with h i s b i s hop ( . . . , B x N). This does n 't w i n a piece, fo r Wh ite can recapture (25 B x B ) , b u t B l ac k c a n then chase the b i s hop away by 2 5 . , 0-03 a n d have l ittl e to worry about. You saw it, d i d n 't you ? ( F l o h r did agai nst Capab lanca, Notti ngham 1 93 6 , and p l ayed 24 Q-B3.) You may a l so have noticed that if Wh ite p l ays 24 B-86, Black repl i es . . . , O-B 1 and does not o b l ige Wh ite by p laying . . . , B x B ? ; 25 N x B, and now the fork works . By the way, B lack to p l ay a l so has h i s own attempted knight fork by . . . , N-06, but th i s move l oses a p iece to either B x N o r R x N . . . Now how about this position? Black to move has a knight fork a t his K4, forking rook and pawn. Does it work? Answer I hope you weren 't fooled , fo r th i s time the fo rk works . True , Wh ite can play B x N, but then Black recaptu res with the other kni ght, and the for k is b a ck . I n t h e game Bogoljubow-Reshevsky, Notting ham 1 936, Reshev­ s ky played 38 . . , KN- K4 . White preferred to reta i n h i s b ishop and played 39 R-N8 directly (instead of after 39 B x N, N x B ) . Black naturally con­ tinued 39 . . . , N x P and eventually won the game with his e xtra pawn . . The position below is from Rossolimo-Fischer, U.S. Championship 1 966-1 967. White has just moved 33 Q R6 ( from Q2 ) , attacking not two but--count them-three pieces : rook, bishop, and knight. Is Black done for, or can he escape? - Double Attacks / 53 Answer S u re e n o u g h , Fisc h e r esc aped . The magic m ove is 33 . . ., N-N 2 . The k n i g h t retreats from danger to a s q u a re w h ere i t defends the bishop and also screens the rook from itself to be p rotected , attack. a f u n ction It is also i s another way to p rotect a l l th ree pi eces : 33 for the knight by B l ac k ' s ki n g . There . . . , Q-K1 . Q x R 34 N-B7, w i n n i n g m ateri a l , fo r if 34 . . . , R-B 3 ; 35 N i m po rtant here performed B ut W h i t e then p l ays ch, N x Q; 36 N x Q, x N. This time Black is in trouble because White has just moved 30 R-N4, attacking both queen and bishop. This position is a little tricky, so think carefully. Double Attacks / 54 Answer B l ac k was Fischer (vs. Owens, U .S . Open 1 956) , and he escaped. D i d you ? If y o u were care less, y o u m a y have thought that 30 . . , Q x P ( o r 30 . . . , O- R 3 ) wou l d do, si nce the queen runs away t o a square where it protects the b ishop . Unfortunately, White is attacking the bishop with two pieces , h is rook and a lso h is bishop (at KB 1 ) and can answer 30 . . , Q x P with 3 1 B x B (or R x B ) , w i n n i ng a p iece . The right move is a capture-counterattack: 30 . . . , B x B . If now 3 1 Q x B, Q x P ch , and B l ack is two pawns ahead. I n the game, White p layed 31 R x Q , but after 31 . . . , B x Q ; 32 K x B , B lack has made an even trade (Q + B for Q + B) and is sti l l a pawn to the good . . . Here is one last position for you to consider. White has a double attack. Can you see it? Does it work? Double Attacks / 55 Answer White's doub l e attac k is 20 R-07, w h i c h Bogolju bow p l ayed agai nst Botv i n n i k , Nottingham 1 93 6 . But it does n 't work, and Wh ite wou l d have done better by s i m p l y recaptu r i n g his pawn (20 N x P, R-R 1 ; 21 N-N5) . Neverthe l es s , B l a c k sti l l wou l d have a very strong g a m e . I n reply to 20 R-07, Botv i n n i k p l ayed . . . , B-N4, remov in g o n e of t h e attacked b i s hops with a counterattac k on Wh ite's othe r roo k . If now 21 R x B , B x R, w i n n i n g the exchange and kee p i n g it even afte r the c l ever 22 N-03 ! , O-R 8 ! ( not 22 . . . , P x N ? ? ; 23 0 x 0). The game conti nued 21 O R-0 1 (sav i n g the rook) , B-O B3 (s av i n g the b i shop) ; 22 R x O R P , O R-0 1 ; and Wh ite's g a m e col l a psed . If y o u a r e i ntereste d , t h e rem a i n i ng moves were 23 P-KR 4 , R x R ; 24 0 x R , R-0 1 ; 25 O-B 2 , B-0 7 ; and White res igned. Double Attacks I 56 CHAPTER Skewers and Pins In the basic double-attack theme you have been learning, one piece directly attacks two others at the same time. The positions below illus­ trate a slightly different pattern : On the left, White's rook is attacking Black's king directly. Black's rook is on the same line as the king, which is unfortunate for Black. When the king moves out of check, White takes the rook ( 1 . , K-K2 ; 2 R x R) . On the right, White's bishop is giving check, and on the same line behind the king is Black's unfortunate queen. There follows 1 . , K-B l ; 2 B x Q, K x B . In this pattern, there is a direct attack on one piece, as well as an indirect attack on another piece on the same line and in back of .the first one; when the first piece moves, the second one is lost. This is known as a skewer or X-ray attack. As shown above, rooks or bishops can make skewer attacks, and so can queens. But knights, pawns, and kings cannot ( because of their limited moves ) . . . . . Skewers and Pins I 57 The four positions below show vari9us situations in which Black is skewered but is able to escape by ( 1 ) capturing the attacker, ( 2 ) moving the attacked piece so as to defend the one behind it, ( 3) moving the attacked piece so as to attack something else in tum, or ( 4) blocking the attack by putting another piece in the way. See if you can find the proper defensive move for Black in each position. (a) (b) (c) (d) Skewers and Pins / 58 A n swer (a) B l ac k captures the attacking roo k : 1 . , B x R . (b) With 1 . , K-02 , B l ack's k i n g moves out o f check and to a square where it defends the queen, so that if 2 0 x 0 ch, K x 0 . If the attacking p i ece were a rook i n stead , the sequence would be to Wh ite's advantage (1 . . , K-0 2 ; 2 R x 0 , R x R ) ; compare with the r i ght-hand d i ag ra m on page 57. (c) B l ack c a n 't save his k n i g ht, but by 1 , K-B4 h e sets u p a counter­ threat; if then 2 B x N, K x B, and B l a c k gets W h ite 's othe r bishop i n exchange for his kn i g ht. I f th i s b i s hop were on O R 4 i n stead of ONS, B l ac k wou l d have no cou nterthreat and wou l d lose his k n i g ht for noth i n g . (d) B l a c k i nterposes h i s b i s h o p , 1 . . , B-0 1 , s hutti ng off t h e attack. The blocking p i ece must itself be p rotected . H e re the k i n g p rotects it, so if 2 R x B c h , K x R . . . . . . . . . . Here is a position from an actual game, Kalme-Fischer, Milwaukee 1 9 5 7 . See if you can find the skewer and also how to avoid it. Skewers and Pins / 59 Answer Whi te p layed 44 A-BS c h , K- K2 ; 45 A x B, and Fischer res ig ned . B l ac k cannot rep l y 44 . . , K-N2 because White 's K A P covers t his square ; he must abandon his bishop. If Black were to conti n u e the game, Wh ite next wins the KAP and then swarms in with h i s pawn s . I f B l ac k were on move , he cou l d s ave h i s b i shop by 4 4 , A-N 1 ( best) or by 44 , K- K2 or 44 . . . , B-A8 . If 44 . . , B-N7 , White wou l d p l ay 45 A-N4 and tie down B l ack's rook and bishop (a maneuver that wi l l be d iscussed at length in this chapter and the next) . If B l ac k then tries 45 . . , A-KA8, we h ave the position shown b e l ow . . . . . . . . . . As noted above, this position would arise from the diagram on page 59 after ( Black moving first) 44 . . . , B-N7 ; 45 R-N4, R-KR8. Your question is, What should White do? Skewers and Pins / 60 Answer The move W h ite s h o u l d not make is 46 R x B ? ? , because then he i s s kewered by 46 . , R-R 7 c h ; 47 K-B 3 , R x R , and B l ack w i n s . This trap was the most i mportant th i n g for you to see and avo i d . ( D i d you ? ) On the positive side, a good move for W h i te i s 46 K-N 2 , which both attacks the rook and makes 47 R x B a va l i d threat. B l ac k must either g ive u p h i s b i s hop o r retu rn t o h i s paralyzed state by 46 . , R-O N S . . . . . So far, the skewers you have seen involve a check against the enemy king. The skewer also works against other pieces, depending on the relative values involved. In the two positions below, decide whether the skewer works or not. (a) (b) Skewers and Pins / 61 Answer (a) The skewer works here, because Wh ite i s happy to exchange h i s bishop f o r either one o f t h e rooks . F o r example, 1 . . ., R ( 1 )-0 1 ; 2 B x R, R x B. ( b ) B l ack can 't s i mply move h i s rook away from K 3 a n d leave the other rook i n the l u rch (e.g., 1 , R-R 3 ; 2 Q x R). But he is safe as long as he moves e ither rook to e ither K2 or KB3, where they wi l l protect one another. . . . Now take a look at the positions below. At the left, the bishop is giving check and will capture the rook after the king moves-a typical skewer. On the right, the positions of the black king and rook have been reversed. Black cannot allow his king to be exposed to the bishop's attack, so the rook cannot move ; it is pinned. Black can try 1 . . . , K-N2 (breaking the pin ) , but White merely takes the rook (2 B x R) before it can get away. As you can see, the skewer and the pin both depend on finding two enemy pieces on the same line and then lining up on them with one of your long-range pieces ( queen, rook, or bishop) . Skewers and Pins / 62 For White to move in the position below, you should have no trouble finding a nice pin. Skewers and Pins I 63 Answer The l i neup of B lack's king and kni ght along White's seventh rank should a l ert you to the poss i b i l ity of a p i n or a skewer. The n , the pinning move to win the kn ight shou l d be easy to fi nd : . . . , R-R7 . Fischer found this i n h i s game against Rosetto , Buenos A i res 1 960. The game conti nued : 34 R-B7 ch ; 35 K-N6, R x P; 36 R x N ch, and White was able to win the end i n g . The position below occurred i n the game Fischer-Geller, Bled 1 96 1 , with Black to move. On the surface, it looks as if White has left his knight at KS loose and that Black can snatch it. Instead, Geller played 13 . , B-Q3 , with good reason. Can you see why he did not play 13 . . . , Q x N? . . Skewers and Pins / 64 Answer In the position shown on page 64, B l ack's king and Wh ite's knight are on the same l i ne-the otherwise open king fi l e . With 13 . , Q x N?, B l ack wou ld substitute h i s queen for the kn i ght on the open king fi l e . White wou l d then play 1 4 R-K1 , p i n n i n g the q ueen to the k i n g . The queen can­ not move away and l eave the king exposed , so B l ack's best move wou l d t h e n be 1 4 , Q x R c h ; 1 5 Q x Q ch, and White h a s w o n a q u e e n for a rook and kn ight. Notice that B l ack cannot save h i mself by trying to b l ock off the attack by 14 . . , B-K5 , s i nce the bi shop is not adequately defended ( 1 5 R x B and the p i n is sti l l i n effect) . I n the game, after 13 . . , B-03, Fischer conti nued 1 4 N x B , Q x N ; 1 5 R-K1 ch, K-B 1 and won i n 2 2 moves . A s an a lternative , 1 4 N x Q B P wou ld i nvolve White i n lots of trouble after 14 . . . , P-KR4, and B l ack cou ld deve lop a strong attack agai nst White 's king position . . . . . . . . The rest of the positions in this chapter have simple skewers and pins for either White or Black, and some of them don't work. See how well you can figure them out. What should White play below? What should Black to move play? Skewers and Pins I 65 Answer White to move should play B-R6 ch, w i n n i n g a rook for h i s b ishop after B lack's king moves . B lack cannot respond . . . , K x B because White's queen protects the bishop. I n the game Fischer-Berl i ner, U .S . Championsh i p 1 960-1 96 1 , it was B l ack's move , and he played 23 . . . , R-B2, avo i d i n g the skewer. Decide what to do for White to move and for Black to move in the position below. Skewers and Pins / 66 Answer Th is pos ition arose in the game Tylor-Em. Las ker, Notti ngham 1 936, with B lack to move . B l ack has a p i n , but it does not work. Lasker, world champion for 2 7 years, nevertheless p layed 2 1 . . . , B-N 3 ; 22 P-04, B-QB2. White 's rep ly safe ly blocked off the pinning bishop, although it made his KFI a l ittle weaker. White to move has no immediate threat to worry about but could wel l play K-R 1 s o h e w i l l not have to move h i s O P (th is i s a subtle poi nt) . If 22 N-BS ch, P x N . Now choose your move for White t o play and for Black t o play here. Skewers and Pins I 67 Answer White to move a l ready has a s kewer set up on B l ack's b i s hops , so he wins a p i ece by 34 R x B. B lack to move has to save his b i shops . Actu a l l y , there are two ways to do th i s : a good , s i m p l e i nterpos ition , and a compl icated , weak counter­ attack. In the game Tro ianescu-Fischer, Natanya 1 968, Fischer chose the former: 33 . . . , R-B3, and after 34 R x R , N x R won the endgame. The other way i s 33 . . . , B-B7 , attacking White's knight. White can s i mply reply 34 R x B, B x N ; 35 R-06 , with a defens i b l e position-suffi­ cient for B l ack to prefer Fischer's choice. In add ition , Wh ite can i ntroduce murky comp l i cations with 34 N-03, and then 34 . . . , R x B (forced) ; 3 5 R x B (the ending after 3 5 K x R , B x N ch ; 3 6 R x B , N x R ; 3 7 K x N , K-K4 favors B lack) , R-K7 (aga i n forced) ; 38 N ( N3)-B 1 , R-07 (forced once aga i n ) ; 39 N x P. What can you find for White and for Black in this position? Skewers and Pins / 68 Answer In the game Fischer-Garcia, Buenos Ai res 1 970, Black had just played 1 9 . . .. P(OB4) x P(ON5) . The obvious move for White is to recaptu re , 20 P x P, but d i d you see the skewer ? Fischer's move was 20 B-N6, fol­ l owed by . . 0-02 ; 2 1 B x R, 0 x B ( i nstead, the i n-between move . P x P ; 22 0 x P, R x B wou l d have saved a pawn) ; 22 P x P, and White is ahead by the exchange . B l ack �o move can play . , P x P ; 2 1 0 x P and then move his queen or rook out of the way, as by 2 1 . . , R-B 1 , with a pawn ahead . . . . . . . . . What should White to play and Black to play do here? Skewers and Pi�:; / 69 Answer In exa m i n i n g the pos ition, you should notice that B l ack's queen and king are on the same l i ne-the KN fi l e . You should then look for poss i b i l ities of exploiting this placement. I s there a rook that can be moved onto the KN fi l e ? Sure enough : 37 R-N4, w i n n i n g the queen for a rook (the i nter­ position 37 . . , R-KN4 does not work because Wh ite's queen controls thi s square too and backs up the reply 38 R x R ) . When this position a rose i n the game Fischer-Pachman, M a r d e l Plata 1 959, it was B l ack to move . Pachman avoided the p i n by playing 36 . . , R-KN4 ; 37 R-N4, R x R ; 38 R P x R , and Black went on to w i n on the strength of his material advantage ( b ishop for two pawns) . . . See what you can find for White and for Black in this position : Skewers and Pins / 70 Answer Thi s i s from the game Fischer-Donner, H avana 1 965. (Donner and the rest of the players were in Havana ; Fischer, who was in N ew York, played a l l his games by rad io because he was not a l l owed by the U .S . Government t o travel t o Cuba.) There is noth ing very special here, but you should have noted that B lack has a skewer attempt, based on the l ocation of White 's queen and rook on a d iagona l . R i g ht now, 23 . . . , B-R2 fai ls to 24 0 x B , s ince the b ishop is not protected. Having noted th is poss i b i l ity, you should then be on the l ookout for conditions under which the skewer wi l l work. For example : (a) If B lack's rook were on 02 instead of 0 1 , then it wou l d protect the bishop at OR2. (b) If the b ishop were on OB2 instead of ON 1 , then . . . , B-N3, supported by B lack's queen. I n the game, White was on move and played 23 P-N3. This next position requires a little more visualization. What should White to move do, and what should Black to move do? Skewers and Pins / 71 Answer Th i s pos ition came up in R edo lfi-Fischer, Mar del Pl ata 1 959 , with White to move . White has a double attack with 28 B-N 6 . (That th i s chapter i s m a i n l y concerned with s kewers a n d p i n s does not mean that y o u can not a l s o fi nd a d o u b l e attack.) Afte r 28 . . . , Q.,.. N 5 ; 29 B x R, R x B, White was the exchange ahead, a lthough he l ate r b l undered and lost the g ame. If B l ack p l ays ( after 28 B-N 6) . . . , R x R, Wh ite does not p l ay 29 B x Q ? , R x R ch ; 30 K-R 2 , R ( 2 )-02 with two rooks for the queen . I n stead , he p l ays 29 R x R and not o n l y i s the d o u b l e attack sti l l in effect, but now B l ack l oses a who l e rook, s i nce his queen i s unable to move to a safe square where it can sti l l defend the rook. Black to move should break u p th i s patte rn by mov i n g his queen o r r o o k away, as by 28 . . . , O-N 5 . Now try this one. See what you can find for White and for Black. Skewers and Pins / 72 Answer This position is from a variatio n , which m i g ht have arisen , of the famous game D . Byrne-Fischer, Rosenwa l d Tou rnament, New York 1 956. B l ack to play can capture Wh ite 's rook ( . . . , N x R ) with a pawn ahead and a strong position . White to p l ay cannot safe ly take the i ntrud ing knight because of a p i n : 1 Q x N , B-N 5, w i n n i n g the queen. Wh ite cou ld p l ay 1 Q x Q , P x O ; 2 R-R 1 , but after . . . , B x N ; 3 P x B , B-R 6 , B lack has a good game desp ite h i s temporary material i nferi ority (knight a n d pawn f o r a rook, a n d the i mpend i n g . . . , B-N 7 wi l l a l l ow him to col lect the OA P) . Check this one out for White and for Black. Skewers and Pins / 73 Answer Th is position occu rred i n Fischer-Ke res , Candidates Tournament 1 962 , with White to move . Fi scher cou l d have p i n ned B l ack's rook to the queen by the unusual move 33 B-B8, and B l ack's position wou ld have col l apsed immediate ly. If then 33 . . . , B-04 ? ; 34 B x R, B x O; 35 B x 0 with a rook up. Fischer m issed th i s , and p l ayed i nstead 33 B-N 5 , which was sti l l good enough to w i n i n another eight moves. B l ack to p l ay can avoid the p i n by moves such as 33 . . . , R-K 1 or 33 . . . , K-N 1 . He has h i s own crush i n g move , which uses a type of combi nation that wi l l be covered i n Chapter 6. If you saw it, you 're either l ucky or good . The move is 33 . . . , B x O A P ! , which d i scovers a skewer attack on Wh ite's queen and rook by B lack's rook, or 33 . . . , B-B4 with the same effect. For such a skewer to work, the rook i n back of the queen must be unprotected and unab le to b e protected when the queen moves away, which is the case here . Wh ite's ON1 wou l d be a poss i b l e protecting square , but the bishop, i n movi n g , covers that square . If then 34 B-B8 , R x O ; 35 B x 0 , R x R ch. Here is one last position. It's not hard, but think it out fully for White and for Bl ack. I Skewers and Pins I 74 Answer In the game Portisch-Bobotsov, Twentieth O lympiad 1 972, Wh ite played 25 B-05, and B l ack res igned. Good for you if you saw this s kewer pattern , but were you also a l ert to Wh ite's fol l ow-up ? After B l ack's queen gets out of the way ( e . g . , 25 . . . , O-B 1 ) , Wh ite doesn't s i mply w i n the exchange with 26 B x R. His next move is 26 O-K4 c h , w i n n i n g a who l e rook by what we m i ght cal l an indirect double attack. The queen g ives check in one d i rection and backs up the bishop to create a two-to-one assau lt on B l ack's rook. Portisch i s cu rrently one of the wor l d 's best p l ayers, and his opponent gave up sooner i nstead of later. B l ack to p l ay should avoi d the s kewer by moving his O R so that it wi l l no longer be i n back of the queen ; 25 . . . , R-O B 1 wou ld be a good choice. A big m i stake wou l d be 25 . . . , O-B2 ? ? because of 26 O-K4 ch. Skewers and Pins / 75 CHAPTER Pin Exploitations In the examples of pins that you have seen so far, the pin resulted in immediate gain of material by the capture of the pinned piece. Even when the attacker cannot safely capture the pinned piece right away, he may be able to exploit the pinned piece's inability to move (when pinned to the king) or unwillingness to move ( when pinned to some other valuable piece ) . One way of doing this is to attack the pinned piece again and again. This will result in gain of material if it can be ( 1 ) at­ tacked more times than it can be defended or ( 2 ) attacked by a piece of lower value. In other situations, the pinned piece provides illusory protection for another piece, which can be safely captured. These possi­ bilities are illustrated in the position below. Black's bishop . is pinned to Black's queen. Although the bishop is safe from direct capture, Black would not want to move it away until he unpins himself (by moving his queen away ) . Can White attack the bishop again while it is stuck there? Yes, by either 1 Q-Q2 or 1 P-QB4. The first move doesn't threaten anything yet, but the pawn move is to the point ( an attack with a lower-value piece ) . If the bishop flees, White plays 2 R x Q, so it is not quite as bad for Black to submit to 2 P x B (losing the bishop for a pawn ) . White also has a move based on the pin of Black's knight to his king. The knight absolutely cannot move, so it only seems to protect tbe KRP, and White can safely play 1 Q x RP, winning the pawn. Since the alternative 1 P-QB4 wins more, it is the better move. Pin Exploitations / 76 There is one other move worth examining : 1 Q x KP, which attempts to exploit the pin on the bishop by taking the pawn it defends. The trouble is that, whereas the pin on the knight is absolute ( it cannot legally move) , the pin on the bishop is relative (it can move at a price) . Here the price is reasonable, for it moves to take a queen : 1 . , B x Q; 2 R x Q, Q R x R , and Black i s a rook up. . . See what can be done to gang up on a pinned piece and win it in the position below. Pin Exploitations / 77 Answer Th is position arose in the game Fischer-Suttles, U .S . Championsh i p 1 965-1 966 . There i s a p i n al ready-White's queen on B l ack's rook and king-but the king protects the rook.. Once you notice the p i n , you should l ook for ways to exploit the p i nned piece. Can it be attacked, or can somethi n g it protects be captured ? Here it can be attacked, which Fischer did by 37 R-N7. With no way to protect the rook, B l ack res i gned . A continuation m i g ht have been . . , P x P; 38 Q x R ch , K-N4 ; 39 O-KN7 ch , K-RS ; 40 O-K7 ch, N-N 4 ; 4 1 B-B2 mate . Once the rook is l ost, B l ack i s helpless t o defend h i s k i n g . . The position below is a little different, but the basic idea of pin exploita­ tion is still present. See what you can find. Pin Exploitations / 78 Answer There is no p i n in the p resent situatio n , but White can set one up by p l aying 1 R-'-N 7. The n , the b i s hop is attacked twice, defended only once . Because of the p i n , it cannot move away, and the black rook is unable to h e l p by add i n g its protection . So the bi shop i s lost, and White wins eas i ly. With B l ack to move , 1 . . . , B-B3 wou ld avoid the pin and position the b i s hop strongly. This position wou ld have arisen in the tenth game of Fischer-Spassky, World Championsh i p M atch 1 972, if Spassky had p layed 42 . . . , B ( 03)-K2 in an attempt to p l ace his bishop in front of the pawns. I nstead . . . . . . this position arose a few moves later. How could Fischer ( White) exploit a pinned piece? Pin Exploitations / 79 Answer White's rook at ON5 pins B l ack's pawn on B l ack's QB4 to B l ack's rook . Th is pawn protects B l ack's ONP, so White p layed 47 R (4) x P, w i n n i n g a very i mportant pawn . If now . . . , P x R ; 48 R x R . Spassky chose i nstead to p l ay 47 . . . , B-05, and Fischer conti nued 48 R-N6 ch, K-K4 ; 49 K-B3, th reatening R-K6 mate . Spassky avo ided this but soon res i g ned . In the original pos ition, B lack to move cou l d avo id this combi nation by . . . , B-B6 , but then White cou ld p l ay 48 R-K6 c h , K-B2 ; 49 R-N 7 ch, K-B 1 ; 50 R-OB6, etc. Th is ending is a good i l l ustration of the superiority of a rook over a bishop. In the next three positions, look for ways to exploit pins. To start, what can you find below? Pin Exploitations / 80 Answer This position arose in the game Fischer-Tai (Ta l 's world championship had shortly before been won back by Botvi n n i k) at B l ed 1 96 1 . The b i s hop is p i n ned, and Fischer p layed 31 R-B7 , attacking it agai n . If now . . . , O-OB3 to protect the b i shop aga i n , 32 R ( 1 ) x B ch, 0 x R ; 33 R x 0 c h , K x R , and Wh ite wins eas i ly. Ta i pl ayed 3 1 , 0 x P, b u t after 32 R ( 1 ) x B ch, White had two rooks and two pawns fo r the queen­ enough to w i n . B l ack t o p l ay shou l d sidestep the p i n b y 3 1 . . . , K-B 1 or cove r h i s KB2 by 31 . . . , O-N3. If 31 . . . , K-B2 ; 32 R-B7 creates a new p i n , winning the bishop. . . . What should White to play and Black to play do in this position? Pin Exploitations I 81 Answer Wh ite 's bishop at OB2 pins B l ack's knight to the king, so . , N x R is not an immediate threat. 35 B x P is p l ayable and should l ead to a w i n in the long run , but much better is 35 P-B3, as p layed by Fischer agai nst Gheorg h i u , Buenos Ai res 1 960. S i nce White 's next move wou ld have been 36 P x N, B l ack res igned at this poi nt. B lack to play should break the p i n by 35 . . . , P-KB4 or . . . , B-B4 , which obl iges White to play 36 B x N in order to extricate h i mself from the effects of the now awkward pos ition of h i s rook and queen-b ishop. How­ ever, Wh ite sti l l would have the upper hand . . . The position below is from the Fischer-Spassky World Championship Match 1 972. You should be able to spot what one of the players missed. Pin Exploitations / 82 Answer White th reatens to p l ay 28 N x N, w i n n i ng the knight because the pawn is p i nned (if . . . , P x N ; 29 R x R c h , winning a whol e rook) . B l ack should play 27 . . . , N x N ; 28 B x N , P-B3 and m a i ntai n h i s pawn p l u s . H owever, in Game 1 4, Spassky played 27 . . , P-B3 ? , an i l l usion that was shattered when Fischer rep l i ed 28 B x P. If the b ishop were to retreat, B l ack wou ld have time to correct h i s error and wou l d in addition win a pawn (28 B-N3 ? , N x N; 29 P x N, B x P) . So White gave up h i s b i s hop f o r a pawn i n . order t o win t h e knight for free. If 28 . . , P x B ; 2 9 N x N , reg ain i ng material equal ity ; o r 2 8 . , N x N ; 2 9 B x N , again with material equal ity. Spassky p layed 28 . , B x N; 29 B x B , N x B ; 3 0 P x N , and a d raw resu lted . . . . . . . The exploitation of a paralyzed defender can include not only capturing a piece it seems to defend but also using the blank squares it seems to defend for other purposes. Try to use this idea in looking at the position below. Pin Exploitations I 83 A nswer You shou l d notice that: (a) The white knight p layed to KB6 attacks B l ack's K, Q, and R . ( b ) White 's queen is on the same l i ne a s B l ack's KNP and k i n g . Once y o u s e e both o f these elements a n d p u t them together, Wh ite's move is easy: 1 N-B6 ch, winning the quee n . B lack t o move shou l d not p l ay 1 . , R x P si nce White sti l l has 2 N-B6 ch. B l ack has various ways to meet the threat: . . (a) 0-0 1 , defending the critical square with the queen . (b) 1 , K-R 1 . u n p i n n i n g the pawn . (c) 1 . . . P-B4 , placing the critical square under the protection of the KR. . . .• . . . . B a d wou l d be attempting t o defend with the OR b y 1 . . . , R-K3 , because · White then drives the rook away with 2 P-BS , giving B lack the choice between l eaving h i s rook to be taken by the pawn or moving it away a l ong the king fi le and a l l owing 3 N-B6 ch anyway. You wi l l l earn more about maneuvers such as driving away defenders in the next chapter. P i n Exploitations / 84 Along with the exploitation of pins, you have been seeing ways for the other side to get out of trouble, most simply by moving the piece in back of the pinned piece to break the pin while maintaining sufficient protection on the pinned piece. Once the attacker starts to pile up on the pinned piece, the defender is in trouble. But he may still escape by : 1 . Adding more defenders to the pinned piece. 2. Moving the piece in back of the pinned piece with a sufficient threat or other damage. 3. Moving the pinned piece ( despite the pin ) with a sufficient threat or other damage, or so as to protect the piece in back. 4. Capturing the attacking (pinning ) piece. 5. Interposing between the attacking (pinning ) piece and the pinned piece, which creates a new pin-but perhaps one that can be more easily handled. Find one of these defenses in the position below. Pin Exploitations / 85 Answer The prob l e m here is that Wh ite 's k n i g ht is p i nned to attacked twice b u t defended o n l y once . B l ac k t o p l ay 1 . , 0 x N ch ; 2 0 x 0, R x 0 c h , so White must try to s o l ution is to p rotect the k n i ght a g a i n by 1 P-B3. B l a c k to attack the k n i ght a g a i n i m m e d i ate ly, g i v i ng W h i te u n p i n n i ng the k n i g ht. . . the k i n g and i s w i n s a p i ece by p revent th i s . The then has no way t i m e for 2 0-0 , Now see if you can find the simple defenses in the four positions below. (a) (bl (c) (d) Pin Exploitations / 86 A n swer (a) I nterpos i n g . Wh ite's b ishop is p i n n i n g the queen to the king, and 1 . , 0 x B; 2 N x 0 is a bad bargain for B l ack. But 1 . . , P-B3 blocks the p i n and B l ack is safe , whereas White m ust then retreat his b i shop. (b) Captu ring the attacke r. White's bishop i s p i n n i n g the rook to the k i n g , but B lack takes it off with 1 . . . , N x B. White can recapture with either h i s knight or pawn , but neither presents any i mmed iate danger. (c) Moving the p i ece i n back of the pinned piece. B l ack's knight i s p i nned t o t h e queen and attacked twice, b u t B l ack escapes b y 1 , O-N3 ch. White must respect the check, giving B lack the chance to move h i s now unpinned knight away (2 K-R 1 , N-N S ) . (d) Moving t h e pi nned piece. B l ack's knight is p i n ned t o t h e rook a n d attacked twice, b u t B l ack has a s i m p l e escape b y moving t h e knight back to where it defends the rook: 1 , N-B3 or 1 . . , N-03. The alternative 1 . . . , N x N ; 2 R x R, N-04 loses the exchange. . . . . . . . . . . The next several positions, starting with the one below, involve ways of exploiting, or perhaps escaping from, pins . Look both for White and for Black. Pin Exploitations / 87 Answer B lack to play can win Wh ite 's OBP because of the pin agai nst Wh ite's bishop. Si nce the bi shop 's protection does n 't rea l l y count, this pawn is attacked twice and defended effectively only once . A poss i b l e sequence wou l d be 43 . . . , R x P; 44 R x R (otherwise B l ack wi l l continue . . ., R(5)-B6 and . . . , B-B5 and win the bi shop) , B x R; 45 R-02 (protecting the p i n ned bishop aga i n ) , R x B c h ; 46 R x R, B x R; 47 K x B , at which point the forces have been reduced to Wh ite's king and four pawns agai nst B l ack's king and five pawns , a routine win for B l ack. I n the game Evans-Fischer, U .S . Champ ionship 1 966-1 967, it was Wh ite's move , and Evans unpi nned h i s bi shop by 43 K-02. Another way of defending the OBP is 43 R-B 2 . What can you find in this position for each side to move? Pin Exploitations / 88 Answer B l ack's rook is p i n n i n g Wh ite 's b i s hop to Wh ite's rook, and B l ack threatens 45 . , R x B, w i n n i n g a p i ece. I n the game Sherwin-Fischer, U .S . Champions h i p 1 966-1 967, Wh ite escaped by mov i n g h i s rook out of the p i n with check: 45 R-NB c h , K-B2 ; 4 6 B x B , P x B , although this was not good enough to save the game agai nst Fischer. . . Look at the position below for White to move and for Black to move. A nswer Wh ite to move can simply play R x B . B lack to move wou ld very much l i ke to get rid o f Wh ite's dangerous advanced pawn . But if he does, (47) . . . , B x P, White p i n s the bi shop with 48 R-OB6 and takes it off next move . You must be ca refu l about making captures that will expose you to p i ns l i ke th is one. In the game Fischer­ Najdorf, N i neteenth Olympiad 1 970 , B l ack tri ed 47 . . . , B-05; but after 48 P-R4 , B-N 7, he res ig ned without wa iting for Wh ite's next move . White simply pushes up h i s KNP and KRP wh i l e Black waits h e l p l essly. If h i s king moves toward the queen side ( . . . , K-K1 ), then R x P ; if the king goes the other way ( . . . , K-N 1 ) , then either R-OB6 fo l l owed by N-06 (or R7) , attacking the immob i l ized roo k ; or R-06 (or ONG) fo l l owed by R-08 (or N B ) . These va riations i nvo lve queening maneuve rs , which wi l l b e covered i n Chapter 1 1 . This position is similar to the previous one, in that a potential pin pre­ vents the capture of a pawn. Can you see it? Pin Exploitations / 90 Answer This pos ition, from R. Byrne-Fischer, U .S . Champions h i p 1 958-1 959 , i l lustrates a typical poisoned pawn . If 1 9 N x N P ? , R-N 1 ; or 1 9 R x R , 0 x R ; 20 N x N P ? , R-N 1 , and B l ack wins the p i nned k n i g ht. You should make sure before grabb i ng loose mate r i a l that you are not expos i ng you rself to a cou nterstroke-espec i a l ly when your opponent is a good p l ayer. Byrne was carefu l and p l ayed 19 P-B3. B l ack to p l ay need not worry about defending h i s ONP just yet and can choose a move on positional grounds . The position below involved a sequence of moves overlooked by an outstanding grandmaster. See if you can do better. Pin Exploitations I 91 A nswer Th is position is from Korchnoi-Fischer, Cand i dates Tournament 1 962, with B lack to move . White to move , with a pawn ahead and two strong passed pawns on the queen side, wou l d si mply p l ay P x N. (A pawn is said to be " passed " when its path to the eighth ran k can not be stopped by an oppos i n g pawn .) Korchnoi was under the i m press ion that the pin on th e kni ght wou l d a l l ow h i m t o rega i n h i s pi ece favorably, b u t Fischer escaped with 32 . . . , O-R2. Th is move removed the queen from behind the kn ight and also threatened Wh ite's queen . Natural ly, if now 33 P x N (or R x N), Q x Q . Another try is 33 Q-N 2 c h , mov i n g t h e queen away with check so that if the king moves , then Wh ite captures the kni ght. But B l ack wou l d foi l this attempt b y moving h i s th reatened kni ght to b l ock the check: 3 3 . . , N(3)-K4. Korchnoi chose 33 Q x Q , N x Q (the threatened kn ight recap­ tured out of danger) and p l ayed on for another e l even moves before giving u p . Note that 32 . . . , N x P? (hop i n g for 3 3 R x Q ? , N x Q) fa i l s to 33 Q-N2 ch (or R 1 ) , K-N 1 ; 3 4 R x 0 . . What can you find i n this position? Pin Exploitations / 92 Answer H e re we have a potenti a l but harm l ess p i n on White's b i s h o p . White to p l a y w i n s the exchange with B x R . I n the game Najdorf-Fischer, M a r d e l P l ata 1 959, B l ac k p l ayed 2 6 , B x B ; 27 Q x B , Q x O ; 28 R x 0, l e a d i n g to a draw. The attem pted p i n by 26 , R-K1 i s answered b y 2 7 B x R , Q x O ; 28 R x Q , R x R ; 2 9 B x P to W h ite's advantage. White can a l s o escape by 27 B-B4 , Q x O ; 28 R x Q, etc . . . . . . . The position below contains a theme you have already learned-but with a slight twist. See what you can find. Pin Exploitations / 93 Answer Th is is from Petros ian-Fi scher, Candidates Tou rnament 1 959. B l ack's . O B is buried, a n d h i s prospects are m i serable-a good t i m e t o try for a swi ndle. Here B l ack had just p l ayed 25 . . . , O-N3 and was hop i n g that White wou l d overlook . . . , N x P ch, w i n n i n g White 's queen, s·i nce the p i n prevents P x N . Petrosi a n , who won the world champ ionship fou r years l ater, saw the threat, sidestepped by 26 K-R 1 , and won in another five moves. Now decide what to do for White and for Black in the position below. Pin Exploitations / 94 Answer This pos ition occu rred in the game Germek-Fischer, B l ed 1 96 1 . Wh ite p layed 24 B x RP, exp loiting the p i n on the ONP to win a pawn . Fischer rep l i ed 24 . . . , B-B4 (connecting h i s rooks and making . . , P x B a rea l threat) , and Germek retreated 25 B-B 1 but was unable to make good h i s advantage (a draw resu lted a t move 3 1 ) . B l ack to move shou ld play 24 . . . , B-B4 s o that the rooks wi l l protect one another and make the p i n harmless. . Finally, what would you do as White and as Black here? Pin Exploitations / 95 Answer This pos ition is from Tai-Fischer, Candidates Tou rnament 1 959. Ta i to move p layed 28 Q x N ch, Q x Q ; 29 R x Q and won a kn i g ht s ince the pin made 29 . . . , N x R i m possi ble. At this poi nt, F i scher was only sl i g htly behind i n material ( B + P for fl ) , but after 29 . . . , K-N2; 30 R(6)-B8, N-K2 ; 3 1 N-R5 (not 31 R x N ch, K x R ) , Ta i soon won . Tai won this tournament and with it the right to p l ay Botv i n n i k for the world champions h i p . B lack t o p l ay h a s 28 . . . , B x Q . T h e bi shop is p i n ned t o t h e rook, but B l ack will g l adly move the p i nned bi shop to take a queen. Pin Exploitations / 96 CHAPTER Discoveries '™ UU In the types of combinations you have seen so far, one attacker strikes at two enemy pieces, either directly ( double attack ) or indirectly (skewer or pin ) . In many cases, a player can manage to place two , of his pieces where each attacks a different enemy piece. In the position below, White's bishop is attacking Black's king ( check ) , and White's rook i s attacking Black's queen. Black must of course save his king, whereupon White wins the queen. For example, 1 , K-R2; 2 R x Q and wins. . . . How did such a position come about? Now look at this position. Can you see how White wins Black's queen? Discoveries / 97 Answer To beg i n with , White is not attacki ng anyth i n g . But by playing 1 B-84 c h , White h a s t h e w i n n i n g position previously shown . ( 1 B-R 7 ch, K x B ; 2 R x Q w i n s too , b u t a t t h e cost o f a bishop.) T h e piece that moved to attack, in moving also exposed , or discovered, an attack by another piece. It's easy, isn't it? Here, then, is a simple position from the game Ghitescu-Fischer, Fourteenth Olympiad 1 960. See if you can find the crushing discovery. Discoveries / 98 Answer What you should notice is that Wh ite 's queen is stand i n g unprotected on the same l i ne as B l ack's queen , with B l ack's b i s hop in the way. If o n l y the bishop cou ld move away and make a powerfu l th reat, for i nstance agai nst the king . . . . Sure enough it can ! And that's what Fischer did : 1 4 . . . . B x R P ch . White res i g ned i mmed i ately rather than carry on after 15 K x B, O x O. Natu ra l l y , White made a · bad m i stake by al lowi ng th i s to happen (he had just p l ayed 1 4 P(Q4) x P(OBS) , th i n k i n g that B l ack wou l d routi nely recapture with 1 4 . . . . B x BP) . If he were on move , P x B wou l d e l i m i nate the d iscovery threat and win a bishop. By now you should be familiar with what to look for, so find the winning discovery here. Also, figure out a way for the other side on move to avoid it. Discoveries / 99 Answer B l ack's queen wou l d fa l l to White's rook except for t he bi shop in the way, so where can the b ishop move and do damage? Yes , 32 B x P ch and wins the queen ( . . . , K x B; 33 R x 0 ) . T h i s is from t h e game Fischer-Rosetto , Portoroz 1 958, with B l ack to move . Rosetto saw the th reat and pl ayed 3 1 . . . , K-N2 , so that 32 B x P is not with check (al lowing 32 . . . , Q x R in reply) . Movi ng the queen (31 . . . , O-R4 or 31 . , O-R6) is also poss i b l e but l eaves the queen precariously p l aced . . . See what you can find in this position for White to move and for Black to move. Discoveries / 100 A nswer You m ight have noticed the potential kni ght fork fo r Wh ite by 1 8 N-NS ch, which B lack stops by . . . , P x N . But even so, B l ack's queen is s itting alone, screened by Wh ite's kn i g ht from attack by Wh ite 's queen . So 18 N-NS ch works after a l l , because after . , P x N; 19 Q x Q ch and wins. I had the pleasure of making this move (vs . M ueckenberge r, New York 1 968) , and my opponent res igned i m med iate ly. B lack to move shou ld meet th is th reat, which he can do effectively by 18 . . , P-BS, chas ing Wh ite's queen and clearing the d iagona l so that the b ishop protects the queen . 1 8 , 0-NS ch cou ld also be played but is not as good because of Wh ite's potenti al N x P , d i scovering an attack on the queen by the bishop. . . . . . . The position below arose in the ninth game of the Spassky-Fischer World Championship Match 1 972, with Black to move. Your question is, should Black play 1 2 , N x P? Why, or why not? . . . Discoveries / 101 Answer H e 'd bette r not, because if 12 . . . , N x P ? ; 13 N x N , O x N ? ? , Wh ite has the d i scovery with 14 B x P ch, B-02; 1 5 Q x 0 , w i n n i n g th e queen . H ere we have another example of the need to be ca refu l before grabbing loose material . Fischer, of course, took care and played 1 2 . . . , P-O R 3 , protecting h i s O N P s i nce B x P was th reatened. Note that B l ack sti l l does not th reaten Wh ite's OP but wou ld do so after castl i n g , because the d i s cove ry B x P i n the sequence wou l d no longer be with check. The examples seen so far have involved what can be called discovery checks, in which a piece moves and gives check while exposing an attack by another piece. The reverse, in which a piece moves and exposes a check by another piece, is called discovered check. The position below involves a discovered check. With that clue, figure out what to do for White and for Black. Discoveries / 1 02 Answer B lack to move has 21 . . . , R-B5 ch, a d i scovered check. Wh ite cannot take the rook because he must respect the check and save his k i n g , whereupon B l ack p l ays 22 . . . , R x 0 . With t h e p i eces as they a r e , i t wi l l not h e l p White to respond with 2 2 O-K3 , because the queen is unpro­ tected. But if one of Wh ite 's rooks were on K1 , then 22 O-K3 wou ld save the queen . In the game Fischer-Zuckerman, U .S . Championship 1 965-1 966, it was White to play. F i scher p l ayed 21 K-R 1 , moving the king out of the way. Note that 21 OR-K1 wou l d prevent the loss of the queen (21 . . . , R-B5 c h ; 22 O-K3 , 0 x 0 c h ; 23 R x 0 , as d i scussed above ) , b u t wou l d sti l l a l low 21 . . . , R x B P ch; 22 K-R 1 , R x ONP. As you can see, the p i ece that moves to d i scover check can go anywhere with i mpun ity. See if you can apply what you have learned about discovered checks to this position. Discoveries I 1 03 Answer B l ack's th reat is a d i scovered check when he moves his roo k. The rook can move to any poss i b l e square without danger of captu re, so the problem is to fi nd the most useful place to move it to . White's vu l nerable poi nt is h i s kni ght, standing u n protected on the side of the board . B l ack picks it up by 38 , R-R7 ch ; 39 K-R 1 R x N; or by 38 . . , R-B6 ch ; 39 K-R 1 , R x N. Bad is 38 . , R x B ch; 39 K x R, and i n effective i s 38 . . . , R-N 7 ch ; 39 K-R 1 , R x R ch ; 40 N x R . I n the game Ste i nmeyer-Fischer, U .S . Championsh i p 1 962-1 963 , Wh ite took evas ive action by 38 K-R 1 , but Fischer played . . . , N x P and was able to w i n with h i s extra pawn . The attem pt to save the pawn by 38 P-R 5 loses more material after 38 , N-B 5 ; 39 N x N , R-N 7 ch ; 4 0 K-B 1 , R x R ch. . . . , . . . . . . Now see what you can find in this position, for White and for Black. Discoveries / 104 Answer This is from the game Fischer-Sherw i n , New Jersey Open 1 957. Sherwin was on move and p layed 24 . . . , O-R4 to remove h i s queen from the l i ne of Wh ite's rook. Wh ite 's threat was 25 B-K5 ch, winning the queen by the discovery check. If then . . , P-B3 ; 26 R x Q, or 25 . . . , O-B3 ; 26 B x Q ch. White has another discovery check, 25 B-R6 c h , but this one doesn 't work be­ cause of . . . , Q x B , s i m u ltaneous ly e l i m i nati ng the checking bi shop and removing the queen from danger. . What would you do in this position for White and for Black? Discoveries / 1 05 Answer Obviously, White to p l ay has P x Q , so the p ro b l e m for B l a c k i s where to put h i s q u e e n . I n Santas i e re-Fischer, West Orange 1 957, Fischer p l ayed 3 2 . . . , O-R 2 , correctly. The tempting 3 2 . . . , Q x R P i s met by 33 N-05 c h , P x N; 34 A x Q , another d i scovery check. See what you can find in this position, for each side. Discoveries / 1 06 Answer B lack has a d i scovery check. In the game Fuster-Fischer, Portoroz 1 958, B l ack p l ayed 32 . . . , R-B8 ch; 33 K-R 2, B x N, and White soon res igned . White to p lay w i ns a p i ece b y R x B , which of cou rse a l so d i sposes of B l ack's threat . BONUS Q U ESTI ON Go back to the d i agram on page 1 06 and assume that Wh ite has no ONP. Does B l ack's comb i nation sti l l work i n this case ? Answer to Bon us Q u estio n In the original position from the actual game, the king was from the checking rook. Without the O N P , White answe rs 32 with 33 K-N 2 . In this case the king attacks the rook, which by the bishop, so if 33 . . . , B x N ? ; 34 K x R. Note also R-N4 ch ? ? wou l d be met by 33 N x R . driven away . . . , R-B8 ch is defended that 32 ., . . Now decide what t o d o for White and for Black to move in this position. Discoveries / 107 Answer This pos ition a rose in the game A l e k h i n-Reshevsky, Notti ngham 1 936, with Wh ite to move . Wh ite has a d i scovered check by movi ng h i s k n i g ht. When such a poss i b i l ity exi sts , you should look for the most damag i n g p l ace t o move t h e screen i n g p i ece to , and y o u w i l l usua l l y f i n d o n e that h u rts the opponent. But here, there is no damag i n g p l ace for the k n i g ht to go to . A l e kh i n p l ayed 39 K-K2, and Reshevsky backed off with h i s k i n g , 39 . . . . K-N 1 . With B la c k to move, it is not necessary to avo i d the d i scovered check yet, but 39 . . . . K-N 1 i s a reasonable move , p reve nt i n g future tro u b l e . But 39 . . . . N-BS ? wou l d lose to 40 N-03 ch, K-B 2 ; 4 1 N x N (NS o r BS) . The position below occurred in the game Guimard-Fischer, Buenos Aires 1 960. White to move can capture any of Black's three pieces and should start with 26 P x R ch and then ( after ., K x P) take the other rook (capturing first with check so as to have time to make a second capture, too ) . In the game it was Black's move. Can Black save himself? If so, how? . . Hint: Black's proper sequence of m oves is lengthy but based on principles you have been learning. Look for a way to use a discovery pattern. Discoveries I 1 08 Answer Fischer p l ayed 25 . . . , R-B3, which saved this rook and the b i shop (by the p i n ) and set up a d i scovered check series. The game conti nued 26 R x R, R x P ch; 27 K-N 1 , R x N ch; 28 K-B 1 (defend i n g the rook at 0 1 ) , R-B7 c h ; 2 9 K-N 1 , R-B 1 c h (hav i n g won the kn i g ht, B l ack now went after the other rook ; he cou l d have forced a d raw by repetition of moves by R-07 ch-B7 ch-07 ch, etc . ) ; 30 R x B , R x R ; 31 R x P, R-0 1 , and Fischer won the endgame. A l so poss i b l e was .27 . . . , R-B 1 ch, picking up the rook d i rectly and l eavi ng the bishop and kn i g ht on the board . This sequence i l l ustrates the tremendous power of d iscovered checks . The sequence is l engthy but rea l ly not comp l i cated, s i n ce it is based on setting up the d i scovered check and repeati ng the pattern. Sometimes, the attacker can combine discovered check and discovery check so that two pieces give check at the same time-a double check. This maneuver is often used in a mating attack, as illustrated in the position below from a famous game between two of the great players of the early twentieth century, Reti and Tartakover, Vienna 1 9 1 0 . How should White to move proceed? Discoveries / 109 A nswer Reti had just sacrificed his queen to reach this position ( by 9 0-08 c h , K x 0 ) , and fin i shed off w i t h 1 0 B-N5 dbl c h , K-K1 ; 1 1 R-08 mate . The double check forced the king to move , s i nce any i nterpos ition or capture wou ld have blocked only one of the checks . Had B l ack chosen 10 . . . , K-B2, then 1 1 B-08 mate . So far, you have seen discoveries involving check. The discovery theme can also work without check when the attack is directed against two pieces, although the possibilities for defense are greater ( e.g. , one piece may be able to move to defend the other) . See wh at you can find for each side in the position below. Discoveries / 1 1 0 A nswer This position arose with me as B l ack in a match game agai nst my brother R. A u lt i n 1 955. I p l ayed 2 1 . . . , P x P, attacking Wh ite's queen and ex­ pos i ng a two-to-one attack on Wh ite 's rook. Wh ite had no way out, so he res igned . If 22 0 x P, R x R ; or if 22 R x P, R x O ; 23 R x 0, P x R ( B lack comes out ahead i n th is variation because the queen is protected, per­ m itting the fi nal recaptu re) ; or if 22 R x R, P x 0 . White t o move shou ld l iquidate t h i s th reat b y 22 P x P. More commonly, discoveries without check involve a direct capture, with the capturing piece exposing an attack. Find how this works in the position below, with White to move. Discoveries I 1 1 1 Answer In the game Fischer-Add ison, U .S . Champions h i p 1 966-1 967, White re­ gai ned his pawn by 20 B x P, Q x B, 21 R x B. Observe the pattern : Wh ite 's b i shop at OR2 screens an attack on B l ack's bishop, so Wh ite g ives up h i s own b i shop for a pawn i n order t o g e t B l ack's bi shop for free b y the d i scovered attack. See what you can find for White and for Black to play here. Discoveries / 112 Answer This i s from Game 14 of the F i s c h e r-Spassky World Champions h i p Match 1 973. B l a c k p l ayed 1 3 . . . , B-N 3 , remov i n g h i s b i s hop from danger. Fischer's th reat was the d i scovery starti ng with 14 N x P. W h ite g ets the b i shop back for h i s k n i g ht after e ither 14 . . , N x N; 15 R x B o r 14 . . , Q x N ; 1 5 Q x Q, N x Q ; 1 6 R x B , with a pawn p l u s for White. B l a c k has another l i ne of defense, w h i c h does not work here but is worth exa m i n i ng : s i nce the b i shop is g o i n g to be lost. B l ack m i ght as we l l try to get someth i n g for it by what is ca l l ed a desperado tactic. He cou l d try ( afte r W h i te 's 14 N x Pl . . . , B x RP, s o that if 1 5 P x B , N x N, and mate r i a l i s eve n . H owever , Wh ite then has his own desperado and c o u l d p l ay 1 5 N x N c h , Q x N ; 1 6 P x B , and Wh ite i s a p i ece u p . . . What would you play for White and for Black in this position? Discoveries / 1 1 3 Answer Here we have a typical example of the potenti a l of a fianchettoed bishop. (A fianchettoed bishop is one p l aced at N2 afte r P-N3 . ) I n Surgi es­ Fischer, M i lwaukee 1 957, B lack pl ayed 14 . . . , N x P, a discovery capture. The game continued 1 5 P x N, B x N ch ; 1 6 N x B, Q x N c h , and B l ack had won a pawn . White to move should defend h i s kn i g ht at 04 ; 1 5 B K3 is good for this purpose s i nce it breaks the p i n on the knight. - The remaining positions in this chapter involve potential discoveries that may or may not work. Figure out what to do for White and for Black to move, starting with this one. Discoveries / 1 1 4 Answer Wh ite to move wins B l ack's queen by 33 R-BS ch ( but not by 33 R-06 c h , Q-8 5 ! ) , o r wins B l ack's k i n g by 33 R-08 d b l c h , K-N 2 ; 34 Q-N 8 mate. Th i s pos ition occurred in Fischer-E l i skases , Mar del Plata 1 960, with B l ack to move . B l ack has no time for 32 . . . , P x B (33 R-BS c h ) . If 32 . . . , O-K3 , White wins by a d i scovery check: 33 R-08 ch, K-B2 (trying to protect the quee n , for if 33 . . . , R x R ; 34 0 x 0 ch ) ; 34 0 x 0 ch, K x O ; 3 5 R x R . Also if 3 2 . . . , R-R8 ch ; 3 3 K-N2 , O-K3 , White wins b y a maneuver you wi l l learn about i n the next chapte r : 34 R-08 c h , K-B2 ; 35 R-KB8 c h , K-K2 (tryi ng to mainta i n protection for the queen ) ; 3 6 R-K8 c h , K x R ; 3 7 0 x 0 c h . B lack c a n avoi d t h e d iscovery b y moving h i s k i n g , b u t then t h e king wi l l b e very exposed. This prompted the s i m p l e move p l ayed b y E l i skases : 32 . . , 0-BS ; 33 0 x 0 , P x O ; 34 B-04, and B l ack had escaped from danger but remained a pawn beh i n d . . In the position below, look carefully and . see what you can find for White and for Black. Discoveries / 1 1 5 Answer Wh ite to m ove has the rea l threat: 16 B x N, B x B; 1 7 R x B, w i n n i ng a piece. B l ac k has a potentia l d i scovery with h i s roo k on White's queen by mov i n g h i s k n i g ht at K N 3 , but he has no way to h u rt White. I n the game Tai-Fischer, Zurich 1 959, Fischer continued 15 . . , N x B , a d i scovery captu re that rema i n s har m l ess because of 16 0 x N. Now B l ac k has another d i s covery by movi ng his k n i g ht on KB3, but again there i s no way to h u rt Wh ite ; i f 16 , N x P ; 1 7 0 x N, o r 16 . . . , N-04 ? ; 17 O-B2 ! , N x N ? ; 1 8 O x P c h , K-0 1 ; 1 9 0 x R c h , etc . M eanwh i l e , B l ack's K R P i s th reatened , so Fischer actu a l ly p layed 1 6 . , R-N 3 . N ote that i n reply to both d i s­ ' covery captures here ( 1 5 . , N x B and 1 6 . , N x P) , Wh ite cou l d escape b y recaptu r i n g with t h e p i ece threatened b y t h e d i s cove ry. The i m medi ate d i scovery on the b i shop by 1 5 . . , N x P fa i l s to 16 N x N , B x B ; 1 7 N x O P c h , expos i n g the b l ack ki n g . . . . . . . . . . . . What would you d o for White and for Black below? Discoveries / 1 1 6 Answer The game Fischer-lvkov, Santa M o n i ca 1 966, proceeded 1 3 P-K5 , B-B4 c h ; 1 4 K-R 1 , N-04 . B l ack saved h i mself from the d i scovery attack b y fi rst g iving check with the attacked b i shop and then screen i n g off the attack on his rook. N evertheless, after 1 5 N-K4 , Fischer had a good game and later won . B lack t o move is not i n danger o f losing a p i ece b u t for pos itional reasons m i g ht try 13 . , P-K4 to block White 's KP. . . Now decide what to do for White and for Black in this position. Discoveries / 1 1 7 Answer In Game 2, Janosevic-Fischer, Match 1 958, B l ack p l ayed 32 . . . , R-R 1 , saving h i s rook agai nst the threatened 33 Q x R(S) . B l ack has a d i scovery check by 32 . . . , R-K7 c h , but it fa i l s to 33 Q x R(2) . See what you can find for each side in this position. Discoveries I 1 1 8 Answer The game Thorbergsson-Fischer, Reykjavik 1 960, conti nued 1 7 P x P; 1 8 R x P, and White held on. B l ack's pawn capture exposed an attack on Wh ite 's bishop, but White was able to add a second defender by re­ capturing with the rook. Natura l ly, if 1 8 BP x P or 1 8 KP x P, B lack wins a piece by 18 , Q x B; 19 Q x Q, R x 0 . B lack a l so had a skewer attempt by 1 7 , B-NS, but Wh ite can b l ock th is with 1 8 P-B3. White to move has no i mmed iate threat to worry about and might try 1 8 B-R3 or 1 8 QR-B 1 . . . . . . . .• . . Here is one last position that will allow you to show what you have learned in this chapter. What would you do? Discoveries / 1 1 9 Answer This pos ition is from B i s g u i e r-Fischer, U .S . Champions h i p 1 960-1 961 , with White to move . B i sg u i e r p l ayed 1 8 K-R 2 to avo i d the th reatened d i scovered check. Now, afte r 18 . . . , P x P , White can not win a pawn be­ cause of a p i n . I f 19 N x P , B x R ; or 19 O x P , O x O ; 20 N x O , B x R , �nd B l ac k gets the exchang e . I hope you noticed B l ack's th reat o f 1 8 . . . , P-B5 c h . If you guessed th i s wou l d w i n the queen, you were partly ri ght, for i t does win a p i ec e, though no t t h e queen . Y o u d i d we l l if y o u worked out w hat hap p en s i f Wh ite t r i e s t o defend agai nst 1 8 . . . , . P-B5 ch b y 1 9 O-K3 o r 1 9 B-K3 . If 19 O-K3 , B-05 p i n s and w i n s the q u e e n , a lthough 19 . . . , 0 x 0 c h ; 20 B x 0 , B x N w i n s a p i ece through a maneuver covered i n the next chapte r . Or if 1 9 B-K3 , then . . . , P x O ; 20 B x 0, N x B with a p i ece to the good (20 . . . , B x N a l so w i n s a p i ece) and more to fo l l ow afte r 2 1 OR-B 1 , resu lting in the d i agram below. (The best p l ay for B l ack i s hard t o find b u t worth l oo k i n g a t ; s e e i f y o u c a n fi nd i t before read i n g the copy to the right of the d i ag r a m . ) T h e above variations i l l u strate fou r d iffe rent l eve l s of w hat a p l ayer m i ght see i n the positi o n . Which l eve l were you o n ? ( a ) D i d n 't see poss i b i l i ty o f d i scovered check, 1 8 . . . , P-B5 c h . ( bl S a w that d i s cove red c h e c k wou l d w i n White's q u e e n w i th 1 9 . . . , P x O. (c) Saw that White cou l d respond to 1 8 . . . , P-B5 ch with 1 9 O-K3 o r B-K3 , frustrati ng easy w i n of queen . (d) Worked out variations and knew B l ac k wou l d come out a p i ece ahead . The position afte r 21 O R-B 1 is shown at l eft. B l a c k to m ove can w i n eas i l y i n the l ong run by 2 1 . . . , P x P; 22 N x P, R x P ; but the real crusher i s 2 1 . . . , P-07 ! , d i s p l a c i n g White 's rook . Afte r 22 R-O B 2 , K R - B 1 p i n s and w i n s t h e k n i ght ( i f 23 R-B 3 , B l ack w i n s b y e ither 23 . . . , B x N or 23 . . . , P-08 0 ch) . = Discoveries / 1 20 C H A PTER Guard Riddan ce A common situation occurs when a piece is being attacked as well as defended, so that direct capture will result in an even or a bad exchange. One focus of attack is the attacked piece; perhaps you can attack it again with good results. The subject of this chapter is the defending piece as another focus of a::tack. If you can get this defending piece out of the way, then the piece it had been guarding will be left unprotected. There are a variety of methods for getting rid of the guard, which I have classified as follows : • • • Capturing the defender ( guard removal ) ; Driving away the defender ( driveaway ) ; Capturing some other piece that the defender guards ( overworked piece) ; • • Drawing the defender away ( drawaway ) ; Blocking the line of defense ( obstruction ) . Let's start by examining each of these methods by means of an illustrative position. The first is shown on page 1 22. Guard Riddance / 1 21 The simplest guard riddance method is to capture the defender ( guard removal) . Ideally (but not always ! ) , your opponent can do no better than to recapture, whereupon you take the piece the defender was protecting. This procedure works in the position below for White to move. Can you see how? Guard Riddance / 1 22 Answer You shou ld note the fo l l owi ng : (a) Wh ite's queen attacks B l ack's knight. (b) B l ack's knight is defended by B l ack's bishop. (c) B l ack's bishop is attacked by White 's rook. So Wh ite e l i m i nates the defender: 1 R x B , R x R and then takes the un­ protected kn ight: 2 Q x N , fo r a g a i n of b i shop and kn ight for h i s rook. By the way, if B l ack rep l i es 1 . , N x B P ; then 2 R x R ch, R x R; 3 K x N. . . Another common method is to drive the defender away so that it no longer defends the attacked piece. See if you can find a way of doing this below with White to move. Also, how would you prevent this for Black to move? Guard Riddance / 123 Answer This position occurred i n the game Add ison-F i s c h e r , U .S . Champ i o ns h i p 1 965-1 966, with B l ac k t o p l ay . W h ite's th reat i s based on h i s rook attac k­ i n g B l ack's b i s h o p , w h i c h i s defended by the k i n g . So 45 P x P ch forces the k i n g to g ive up the g u a rd ( . . . , K x P; 46 R x B ) and wins the b i s h o p . F i s c h e r on move p l ayed 4 4 . . . , P-N3 ; 4 5 P x P c h , P x P , so that h i s k i n g cou l d not be driven away. N ote that if 44 . . . , P x P ? ; 45 P-B5 c h d i s l odges the k i n g and w i n s t h e b i shop a t t h e lesser expense o f two pawns after 45 . . . , K x P ; 46 R x B . Another way o f exploiting the defending piece i s to capture something else that it defends, so that the recapture leaves the originally attacked piece unprotected. For this to work, the defender must be defending two pieces at the same time. For this reason, such a piece is referred to as overworked. Try to exploit an overworked piece in this position, White to move. Guard Riddance / 1 24 Answer B lack's rook g u a rds the b i s hop and the knight, so it's working hard . I n t h e th i rd a n d decis ive game i n t h e M ate ra-Kram e r match f o r t h e E mo ry C u p , p l ayed on te l evi s i o n i n 1 973, Wh ite p l ayed 28 Rx B. Rx R; 29 K x N and soon won. N o bette r w o u l d be 28 N-86 ch ; 29 Bx N , Rx B; 30 Bx P . . . .. The winning idea for Black i n the position below is similar to the drive­ away ( but the defender is not chased ) and to the overworked piece ( but the defender is not protecting another piece ) . Instead, the defending piece is drawn away. With this help you should be able to find Black's best move, even though it was missed by a grandmaster. Guard Riddance / 1 25 Answer This occu r red in 27 . . . , R-N 7 and B ut 27 . . . , R-N8 leaves h i s q u e e n the game Barcza-F i l i p , Bucharest 1 953. F i l i p p l ayed was a b l e to win with h i s control of the seventh ran k . c h i s a knockout. W h i te must p l ay 28 R x R , b u t t h i s u n gu a rded ( 2 8 . . . , 0 x 0 ) . Occasionally the attacker can obstruct and cut off the line of defense between the defender and the piece it protects. This can be done by driving another opposing piece into the line of communication, or by placing one of the attacker's own pieces in the way. See what you can find for White to move here. Guard Riddance / 1 26 An swer I was B l ack in th i s pos ition agai nst S . Lyman, Tea m Match 1 959. Both sides had just queened a pawn , but u nfo rtu nate ly it was Wh ite's move. Wh ite p l ayed 57 0-08 c h , and I res i g ned si nce my rook was l ost. This pos ition may have been a l ittl e tri cky at fi rst s i g ht, but I hope you noticed the long .l i n e of defense between B l ack's queen and rook, and then looked for a way to break that l i n e wh i l e attacking the rook. If you know what you are looking for, then the w i n n i n g move, 57 0-08 c h , is not hard to fi n d . More genera l ly, as you l earn t h e various patte rns f o r w i n n i n g combi na­ tions, you shou ld be learn i ng what to look for in any position. When you recogn ize a potent i a l l y fam i l iar pattern , then you should spend a l ittl e t i m e looking f o r a way t o exploit it rather than i n a i m l ess thought. Once you a re able to do th i s , you wi l l be able to win agai nst most players . Now think carefully about the position below, and decide what to do for White and for Black. Guard Riddance / 1 27 Answer You should notice i mmediately that B l a c k i s threate n i n g . . . , 0 x N ( 6 ) c h , w i n n i n g a p i ec e . I n t h e game O l afsson-Fischer, Cand idates Tou rnament 1 959 , White was on move and faced the p ro b l e m of how to defend agai nst B l ack's threat. White 's m a i n choi ces are to defend the knight with h i s b i s hop o r to move it away. O l afsson chose to m ove h i s knight: 1 6 N-0 1 (the k n i ght i s somewhat happier here than at OR4 o r O R 2 , whereas 1 6 N-N 5 ? , P:...O R 3 , and t h e kni ght h a s nowhere t o go) . T h e bishop moves are no good . 1 6 B-N2 abandons the p rotection of the othe r k n i g ht (at KN5) and l oses a p i ece r i ght away. If 16 B-02, the b i shop i s doing double duty, p ro­ tecting one k n i g ht and h e l p i n g to p rotect another . I s there a way t o exp l o i t th i s s ituation ? Captu r i n g o ne k n i g ht and then the othe r i s n 't feas i b l e here . Can you obstruct the l i ne of commu n i cation ? What about 1 6 . . ., P-K6, shutting off the b i s hop ? Th i s is the best move , and you d i d we l l if you saw it. S i nce B l a c k th reatens both 1 7 . . . , 0 x N (4) and 1 7 . . , P x B , Wh ite w i l l lose a p i ece i mm ed iately if he does n 't deal with the i ntrud i n g pawn . H oweve r , if 17 P x KP, 0 x N (4) ; or if 1 7 B x P, 0 x N ( 6 ) ch; etc . , w i n n i ng one of the k n i g hts anyway. . Decide what to do for White and for Black in this position. Guard Riddance / 1 28 Answer This i;ios ition i s from the game E l a-Fischer, M i lwau kee 1 957, wi th W h i te to move . B l ack's k i n g attacks Wh ite 's rook , defended by W h ite 's k i n g . B la ck t o move c a n exp l o i t th i s by d r i v i n g t h e k i n g away : 35 . . . , R-RS c h ; 36 K-N3 , K x R , w i n n i ng t h e rook a n d a l s o defend i n g B l ack's own rook at the same t i m e . I n t h e g a m e , Wh ite w a s o n m o v e and retreated 35 R-N 2 , P-N4 c h ; 36 K-B3 . Also poss i b l e i s 35 P-KS c h , w h i c h d rives B l ac k 's k i n g b a c k but m a kes the p a w n at K S d i ffic u l t t o defend i n t h e long r u n . Based on what you have been learning, can you see why White should not play N x P below? Guard Riddance / 129 Answer N x P rel i es on the queen to defend the knight, but B l ack has two ways to crunch White : ( a ) 1 4 N x P, 0 x 0 c h ( removing the defender) ; 1 5 B x 0 , N x N , with a piece to the good and queens off the board ; or (b) 1 4 N x P, N x N ; 15 O x N , O x P c h ; 16 K-0 1 , O x R , winning a rook by exploiting the overworked condition of Wh ite's queen , which guards both the knight and the OBP. I n the game F i scher-A . Byrne, U .S . Championsh i p 1 966-1 967, White p l ayed 1 4 O x O , N x O . Here is a simple position, from the game Fischer-Bhend, Zurich 1 95 9 . White has just played 8 N x N ( at Black's QB3 ) . How should Black recapture? Guard Riddance / 1 30 Answer There are two ways to recaptu re , e ither with the NP or OP. Bhend p l ayed correctly by 8 . . , N P x N. You may have heard the general advi ce, " captu re toward the center." This is often good advice but was not the reason for Bhend's choice in this instance . Rather, he saw that 8 , OP x P exposes the queen , protected by the k i n g . Then , if the king can be driven away, the queen i s lost, which happens after 9 B x P ch, K x B; 1 0 0 x 0. . . . . Here is another simple sequence, which illustrates a slightly different type of drawaway. White h as just lost his rook to a knight fork. How can White to move get back into the game? Guard Riddance / 131 Answer I was p l ay i n g W h i te a g a i n st my broth er R. Ault in a 1 955 match g a m e . Afte r 1 0 O-B6 c h , B l ack's queen w a s d rawn u p t o 02 i n o r d e r to b l oc k t h e c h e c k , leav i n g t h e r o o k u n p rotecte d . T h e game cont i n ued .1 0 . . . , 0-0 2 ; 1 1 0 x R c h , 0-0 1 ; 1 2 0 x 0 c h , K x O ; W h i te rega i ned the roo k , and B l ack's k n i g ht was trapped beh i n d enemy l i nes and unab l e to get back to safety ( a s ituation we sha l l exa m i n e in deta i l in the next chapter) . Attempts at guard riddance · fail under certain conditions, particularly when, in response to a capture, the defender can either ( a ) recapture so as to restore protection or ( b ) liquidate the attacked piece before recapturing. For example, should respond to 17 N x in KP the position below decide how Black ch. If you have no trouble with your reply, then decide what to do for White and for Black to move. Can you find a guard riddance sequence for Black? Guard Riddance I 1 32 Answer Wh ite's 1 7 N x KP is a m i sguided attem pt to profit from the removal of B l ack's KP, one of the defenders of B l ack's KN . Shou l d B l ac k reply 1 7 . . . , R x N ? , Wh ite comes out a pawn ahead by 1 8 B x N , B x B ; 1 9 0 x B . The right reply is 1 7 . . . , 0 x N, and the queen helps to defend the k n i g ht. More i m portant i n assess ing the pos ition is that B l ack to p l ay has a working guard remova l by captu r i n g White 's OP, underm i n i n g White 's advanced kni ght. After 1 7 . . . , ON x P ; 1 8 N x N , N x N ; 1 9 B x N , B x N ; 2 0 B x B , 0 x B , B l ack has a n extra pawn ( i f now 2 1 B x P , B x P ) . The alternative 1 7 . . . , KN x P coul d have the same result but g ives White the additional choice of the tricky 1 8 N-RS ! ? , which B l ack shou l d answer by 1 8 . . . , N x N ! ; 19 B x B, OR-N 1 . If then 20 P x N ? , B x P; 21 B-N 2 , B x N , with two extra pawns . Also tricky is 1 7 . . . , ON x P ; 1 8 N x P? ! , but B l ack wins with 1 8 . . . , N x N ! ; 1 9 B x N , N-B4 ; 20 0-N S , P-KR3, and the queen is driven away from protecting the bishop. I n the game Johan nessen-Fischer, Seventeenth Olympiad 1 966, Wh ite p l ayed 1 7 P-K4 in order to provide extra protection fo r the OP. Super­ fic i a l ly, this seems to lose a pawn to 1 7 . . . , B x N ; 1 8 P x B, 0 x P , but Wh ite's cou ntermove is 1 9 P-KS ! , a standard d i scovery attac k that wins B lack's knight after B lack saves h i s queen . . The other major way to slip out of a guard-removal attempt is illus­ trated in the position below from Fischer-Reshevsky, U.S. Champion­ ship 1 95 7-1 95 8 . How does Black answer 38 B x N? - - - B t B -�- t im m mim • R � . � � u mAa ft m m � -• �--� � • - • � ft m mitm ft B . � � e · • • � Guard Riddance I 133 Answer Fischer d i d , i n fact, p l ay 38 B x N, to which Reshevsky rep l i ed 38 , B x B, a n d the game was eventua l l y drawn . I nstead of recapturing (38 , P x B?; 3 9 B x B , and Wh ite wou l d b e a p i ece ahead ) . B i a.ck s l i pped out si mply by capturing with the threatened bishop. . . . . . . As with any other tactical theme, a guard-riddance combination may work very well by itself and yet be refuted by a countercombination. In this position, Black to move has a , guard-removal combination, but he'd better not use it. Can you see why? Guard Riddance / 1 34 Answer This position arose in the fi rst game of Reshevsky-Fischer, Match 1 96 1 . Fischer p l ayed 20 . . , B x N ; 2 1 P x B , 0-02. If, i nstead, B lack should take the seemingly unprotected OP by 21 . . . , R x P, White plays 22 B-B4, p i n n i n g the rook to the k i n g . White cou l d regai n the pawn by 22 R x P, R x R; 23 B x R, but the p i n i s much better. . The next several positions require you to apply various guard-riddance themes and defenses. Decide what to do for White to move and for Black to mOVP, in the position below. Guard Riddance I 1 35 Answer Th i s position arose i n the game Reshevs ky-Ta rtakove r , N otti ngham 1 93 6 . · Reshevsky w a s o n move and p l ayed 1 0 KN x P , remov i n g one of t h e defenders of B l ack's advanced k n i g h t . I f n o w 1 O . . , B x N , t h e n 1 1 N x N ( o r B x N , but not N x B , when B l ack can h o l d h i s extra p i ece after 1 1 . . . , Q x N ) . Ta rta kove r chose 1 0 . . . , N x N ; 1 1 N x N ( recaptu r in g out of dange r ) , B x B; 1 2 K x B, l eaving Wbite a pawn ahead, a lthough the game was eventua l l y d rawn . B l a c k to play s h o u l d avo i d the danger by 1 0 . . . , N x N . The a lternative 10 . . . , N-KB3 l eaves B l a c k b e h i n d i n deve lopment, whe reas 1 0 . . . , P-KB4 a l l ows 1 1 N-K6 , for k i n g queen and rook. . What would you do for each side in the position below? Guard Riddance / 136 Answer B l ack's th reat is to e l i m i nate a defender of the KP and to exploit a p i n on Wh ite 's ON t o w i n a pawn b y 1 2 , B x B ; 1 3 K x B , N x P ; a n d if 14 N x N , B x B . Wh ite to move should protect h i s KP. I n the game Sobe l-Fischer, Canad ian Open 1 956, Wh ite p layed 12 P-B3. Also poss i b l e but awkward are 1 2 R-N 1 or 1 2 O-B 1 to protect the b i s hop (so that if 1 2 , B x B; 1 3 K x B , N x P ? ; 1 4 N x N , B x B ; then 1 5 R x B o r O x B) . . . . . . . Now see what you can find i n this position, for White and for Black. Guard Riddance I 1 37 Answer I This position arose in the fi rst game of the 1 972 Spass ky-Fischer matc h , after B l ack's fou rteenth move . A t fi rst, it m a y seem that Spassky cou l d w i n a b ishop a n d kni ght f o r h i s rook b y 1 5 B x N ( removing the defender) , B x B ; 1 6 R x B , but the troub l e is that Wh ite's other rook wou l d be l oose : 1 6 . , B x R . Spassky played 1 5 O R-B 1 , making the threat real because B l ack wi l l no longer have . . . , B x R at the end of the combi nati o n . Fi scher parried by 15 . . . , KR-0 1 , protecting the bishop. B lack to move faces no immediate danger and m i ght as wel l p l ay . . , KR-0 1 to contest the open fi l e . . . . In the position below, Black i s able t o win material b y using the guard­ removal theme with a slight twist. See if you can find it. Guard Riddance / 1 38 Answer This pos ition is from a variation of a game I p l ayed , as B l ack. Wh ite's KP ' is attacked twice (by B l ack's knights ) and defended twice (by Wh ite's knight and queen ) . B l ack's queen is l i ned up on these two defenders . The d i rect removal 1 . . . , 0 x N ? ? ; 2 B x 0, ON x P is prohib itively expen­ s ive . I nstea d , B l ack sta rts with 1 . . . , ON x P; 2 N x N and now . . , 0 x O ; 3 R P x 0 , N x N , with a pawn ahead . B l ack captures with the ON fi rst because the KN is scree n i n g the KNP ( 1 . . . , KN x P ? ; 2 0 x P) . . So far, the examples you have seen of driving away a defender have involved the king as defender. The same principle works with other defenders, especially when there are direct threats to capture them. Apply this guideline in the position below. Guard Riddance / 1 39 Answer B l ack's queen i s d o i n g dou b l e duty, p rotect i n g the B at O N 5 (the knight i s p i n ned to the k i n g and does not p rotect the B ) and helping to p rotect the N at O B 3 . Once you be c ome aware of th i s stra i n , you s h o u l d l oo k f o r ways to m a ke t h e q u e e n uncomforta b l e-to chase i t away . I n a recent i nformal g a m e , I p l ayed 1 B-KB4, w i n n i n g a p i ece because the queen had nowhere to go and sti l l p rotect both p i eces . If 1 . . , O-K2 ; 2 B x N c h , B x B ; 3 0 x B c h , and W h i te gets a rook as we l l as a m i no r p i ece . I f 1 . , 0-02, W h ite e l i m i nates t h e defend i n g kn i g ht and w i n s the b i s hop : 2 B x N , B x B ; 3 0 x B(4) B l a c k to move m ust b reak up th i s pattern by 1 , P-O R 3 ; 2 B-03 , 0-0 . If i n stead 2 B-B4 ? , P x B ; 3 0 x R c h , B x O ; 4 B x 0, B x B , l eavi n g Blac k with two b i shops f o r t h e rook. . . . . . . . Here is another chance to apply a driveaway. Can you figure it out? Answer With Wh ite to m ove , 60 R x R w i n s . I n t h e game S l iwa-Botv i n n i k , Budapest 1 95 2 , i t w a s B l ac k to move . It seems that B l a c k s h o u l d m ove h i s rook, but Botv i n n i k exp l o ited the exposed position of W h i te 's queen by 59 . . . , B-B 1 . I f 60 O-R4, Q x Q ; 6 1 P x 0 , R x R , so Wh ite h a d n o choice b u t t o take a b i s h o p a n d rook for his queen by 60 Q x B c h , Q x O; 6 1 R x R. Even s o , after 6 1 . . . , O-B 7 ; 62 N-K 1 , Q-Q N 7 , W h i te decided i t w a s t i m e t o g ive u p . Now see what you find here for White and for Black. Guard Riddance / 141 Answer This occurred in Fischer-B i s g u i e r , U .S . C h a m p i onslli p 1 958-1 959, with Wh ite to m ove . W h i te 's queen attacks Black's k n i g ht, w h i c h i s defended by B l ac k 's b i s h o p , s o perhaps W h i te can chase the b i s hop away by 28 P-R4 and win the k n i g ht. H owever, B l ack can s l i p out in three d ifferent ways : ( a ) 28 . ( b ) 28 . 29 . (c) 28 . . . . . ., ., ., ., B x N ; 29 B x N , N-N5 c h . N-N5 c h ; 29 N x N , B x N ( 5 ) ( . . . , P x N works too , b u t not B x N ( 7) ; 30 N-B6 c h , K-N 2 ; 31 B x B ) ; 30 O-N2 , B-R 3 . B-N 5 ; 29 O-N 2 , B-R 3 . I n the game, Wh ite d i d n o t w a n t to a l l ow B lack t o use Wh ite's KN4 a n d p l ayed t h e w a i t i n g m ove 28 K-N 2 , and s o d i d B l ac k (28 . . . , K-N 2) . Decide what to do for White and for · Black in this position. Guard Riddance / 142 Answer I n Smyslov-Keres , World Champ ionship Tournament 1 948, Smyslov pl ayed 29 P-OR4, chas ing B l ack's k n i g ht. Si nce this �n ight defends the rook, the immediate retreat 29 . . . , N-03 loses. But B l ack can save h i mself by 29 . . . , N-02 , driving the attacking queen away fi rst. The game con­ tinued 30 O-B2, N-03, with the focus now on Wh ite's attempt to support P-K4 (at th is poi nt, B lack wou l d have four p i eces-0 , B , N, P-to Wh ite 's th ree-A , B, P-i n case Wh ite shou ld try 31 P-K4 ? ) . B l ack t o move faces no immediate tactical threat a n d m i ght choose . . . , P-RS , . . . , R(2)-R 1 , or . . . , N-02. Now see what you can find for White and for Black in the position below. Guard Riddance / 143 A nswer White is attacking and B l ack defending his m i nor pieces . You shou l d look i nto the poss i b i l ities here . B l ack's queen is hel ping to defend the k n i g ht and also defends the l i ght-squared bi shop along with the kn ight. Th i s kn i g ht. w h i c h is p i n ned t o t h e da rk-squared bishop, c a n be e l i m i nated . Apparently, some kind of guard-riddance combi nation can work here . O n e try is 1 2 B x N , B x B ; 1 3 R x B , h o p i n g for . . . , O x R; 1 4 O x B , with two m i nor pi eces for a rook. However, it fa i l s to 13 . . . , B x 0; 14 R x 0, OR x R, and b l ack i s the exchange ahead . Another try is 12 R x B, which works and was p l ayed by Fischer agai nst Goldsmith, West Orange 1 957. B l ack has two ways to recaptu re, but both result i n White w i n n i n g two p i eces for h i s rook. If 1 2 . . . , N x R ; 1 3 Q x B, Q x O ; 1 4 B x 0. B l ack actu a l l y p l ayed 12 . . , O x R ; 13 B x N , B x B ; 14 O x B , and White went on to w i n . B l ack t o p l ay is i n a difficult situati o n , i n addition t o b e i n g a l ready a pawn down . Best seems to be 12 . . . , R-K 1 , p rotecting the bishop, and if 13 R-02, N-04 ! ; 14 B x B (White cannot a l l ow 14 P x N , B x B ch ) , R x B ; 1 5 O-N5 , N-N 3 . Weaker is 1 2 . . . , N-04 ; 1 3 B x B , N x B ; 1 4 R-02 , O-K 1 (necessary to u n p i n the b i shop before KR-0 1 wh i l e sti l l protecting the knight) , leaving B l ack with an unenvi able position . . Here is one last pos1t1on for you to show what you have learned. Decide what to do for White and for Black. Guard Riddance / 144 Answer B l ack's queen g uards the bi shop and also helps guard the KBP. I n the game Fischer-l bra h i mog l u , N i n eteenth Olympiad 1 970, Wh ite p l ayed 38 B x BP ch, Q x B; 39 Q x B, and B l ack res igned. Note that B l ack's queen attacks White 's bishop, but the wh ite queen defends it after 39 Q x B. At this point B lack has lost one pawn , is about to lose more pawns , and has no cou nterplay because of the dom inating effect of Wh ite's queen and bishop. B lack to move must try to hang on with . . . , N-B 1 , defending the b i shop and mainta i n i ng double protection on the KP. Guard Riddance I 1 45 CHAPTER Corn ering Usually, you cannot expect a single direct attack to succeed against a good player. Therefore, in the past five chapters you have been learning various combinations directed at two or more enemy pieces. There are situations, however, in which a simple direct attack cannot be parried, because the attacked piece has nowhere safe to go. In other words, the attacked piece is cornered. Naturally, for a cornering play to work, your opponent's other possible defenses to attack must be ineffective ; that is : • • • • Your attacking piece must be safe from capture. There must be no effective interpositions to block your attack. Your opponent must have no way to successfully defend his attacked piece. Your opponent must not be able to employ any successful countercombinations against you. Usually, this strategy involves attacking a more valuable piece with a less valuable one. Depending on the situation, several of your pieces may be covering possible escape squares ( especially where an enemy piece has ventured too far in among your own pieces ) , or the opponent's lines of escape may be blocked by his own pieces. The first position for you to study is shown on page 1 47. Cornering / 1 46 The position below arises from the Caro-Kann Defense, after 1 P-K4, P-QB3 ; 2 P-Q4, P-Q4 ; 3 N-QB3 , P x P; 4 N x P, B-B4 ; 5 N-N3, B-N3 ; 6 N B3 , N-B3 ; 7 P-KR4 Can you see how White is threaten­ ing to corner one of Black's pieces? What should Black do to prevent this from happening? - . Cornering / 1 47 Answer White's th reat i s 8 P-RS, which tu rns B l ack's bishop i nto a h a p l ess refugee. I t i s true that Black could th en m ai ntai n eq u a l m ateri a l by m ovi n g the bishop to K S o r B4, but in e i t h e r case White g ets a valuable l ead i n d eve l o p m ent: 8 . . . , B-KS; 9 N x B (si m p l e and g o o d , whereas 9 N-NS, B-Q 4 ; 1 0 P-Q B4, P-K R 3 ; 1 1 P x B , P x N; and if 1 2 P x P, N x BP; 1 3 B x P , N x QP), N x N ; 1 0 B-Q3 o r 8 . . . , B-B 4 ; 9 N x B , Q-R4 c h (the d o u b l e attac k recovers the pi ece) ; 10 B-Q2, Q x N; 13 B-Q3. In p racti ce, the ro uti n e move to p rovi d e for the b i s h o p is 7 . . . , P-K R3, so i f 8 P-RS , B-R2. Vari o u s oth e r m oves a re possi b l e , but are l ess sati sfactory ; e.g. : 7 . . ., P-KR4; 8 N-KS fo l l owed by N x B . Now that you h ave the idea (do you? ) , you should find it easy to figure out what to do for each side in this position. Cornering / 148 Answer This pos ition arose i n the game Flohr-Capabl anca, AVRO 1 938. Capa­ blanca p layed 1 4 . . . , P-R3 in order to create an escape square for h i s kn i g ht. Wh ite 's threat was 1 5 P-B4 or P-R4, attacking t h e wel l-defended knight with a lowly pawn. The kn i g ht wou l d then l i ke to move away but, having no safe square to move to , wou ld be l ost. Pawns aren't the only pieces that can corner opposing pieces, as the position below illustrates. The winning move was missed by a very good player against Fischer. See if you can do better. Cornering / 149 Answer In the game Fischer-Sa idy, West Orange 1 957, B l ack p layed 43 . . . , R-N3 , and the game was l ater d rawn . B l ac k . m issed 43 . . . , R-R3 , trapp i n g Wh ite 's quee n . Wh ite t o move h a s N x R , w i n n i n g t h e exchange and breaking up the th reat to corner the quee n . In the game, after 43 . . . , R-N3 , Fischer p layed 44 O-R4 , reesta b l i s h i ng the protection on his knight wh i l e re­ moving h i s queen from the pocket. See what you can find to corner in this position. Cornering / 1 50 Answer This position arose i n Fischer-Robatsch, V i n kovc i 1 968. Wh ite's th reat is 29 N-N 6, and the two kn i g hts cooperate to corner the rook. B l ack m ust lose at least a p i ece, because after 29 . . . , N-B 2 ; 30 N x R (even better than the d i scovery check 30 N-K7 ch and 31 R x N ) , N x N ; 3 1 N-N4! (th reate n i n g mate as we l l as both kn i ghts ) , N-N 3 ; 3 2 R-B6, N x N; 33 R x N , P-N3 (to avo id mate) ; 34 R x N, White is a rook ahead . B lack's best move wou ld be 29 . . . , N-K4 , and White must settle for w i n n i n g only a knight (30 N x N, R-0 1 ) . B lack was actua l ly o n move , and p layed 2 8 . . . , P-O R4, which provides an escape at R3 for the rook. B l ack has no time for 28 . . . , N x NP, because 29 R-B2 th reatens the knight as we l l as 30 N-N6 . Here is another cornering maneuver for you to find. Look for each side to move. Cornering / 1 51 Answer This pos ition i s from Fischer-Bertok , B l ed 1 96 1 , with B l a c k to move . Wh ite 's th reat is 1 4 N-B 7 , R-N 1 ; 1 5 B x P. This sequence is more than just a d r i veaway to win a pawn (wh i c h B l ac k can get back by . . . , B x P anyway) ; the m a i n p o i nt is that the rook is now cornered , and W hite w i n s the exchange : 1 5 . . . , B-B4 ; 1 6 B x R , R x B ; 1 7 P-B3 . H ere, a k n i g ht and a b i s hop comb i n e to catch the rook . I n the g a m e , B l ack p l ayed 1 3 . . . , N-B3 , p rotecti n g t h e R P a n d thus p reventi n g W h ite's combi nati o n . N ote that 13 . . . , P-Q R 3 wou l d not h e l p , s i nce afte r 1 4 N-B 7 , R-N 1 ; 1 5 B-R 7 , t h e r o o k i s sti l l trapped . Now decide what to do for White and for Black in this position. Cornering / 1 52 Answer This pos ition occurred i n the eighth game of F i scher-Spassky, World Champions h i p M atch 1 972, with Wh ite to move , B l ack having just played 15 . . , P-QN4. B lack threatens to win a pawn, starting with 1 6 . . . , P x P, but Wh ite can do better than a pawn . Fischer played 1 6 B-R7, cornering B lack's rook with the aid of the other bishop. (We don 't know whether Spassky s i mply overlooked the bishop move or thought he wou ld get compensation for the exchange.) The game conti nued 1 6 . . . , P x P : 1 7 B x R , R x B ; 1 8 P x P, B x P, with a bad game for B lack. B l ack to play has time for 16 . . . , P x P, s i nce 1 7 B-R 7 can be answered by 1 7 . . . , R-NS, and B lack wins a pawn . . As I have pointed out before, you have to be careful before you seize a piece that your opponent has left loose. Make sure he has made a mistake and not left bait for a combination against you. Of special concern to us here is the possibility that the capturing piece may not be able to get away, even though not subject to immediate capture. For example, in the diagram below, Black to move can play . . . , B x P. Should he? Cornering I 153 Answer Th i s pos ition, from Alekh i n-Fl o h r , N otti ngham 1 936, i s typ ical of in wh i ch a b i s h o p s h o u l d not seize a rook-pawn o n the second because its retreat can be cut off by the k n i g ht-pawn . If 33 . , 34 P-N3 b l ocks the b i s h o p 's retreat, and 35 K-N 2 co l l ects it. p l ayed i nstead 33 . . . , R-R 1 ; 3 4 P-KR 4 , P-83 . . . many rank, B x P; Flohr What would you d o here for White and for Black? Cornering / 1 54 Answer I n the beg i n n i n g of th is book you were g iven s i m i l a r pos itions i n which you were supposed to see that the white queen cou l d take B l ack's loose roo k, and that Black cou ld avo id this calam ity by moves such as . . . , B-N 2 . Now that you 've come t h i s far, you have to look a l ittl e deeper. I n fact, in Game 3, Cardoso-Fischer, M atch 1 957, it was White's move . Do you th i n k that Fischer l eft h i s rook to be taken for noth i n g ? You had bette r look for someth i n g , probably a way to trap the quee n . One try is (afte r 1 5 Q x R) . . . , B-N 2 ; 1 6 O-R 7 (trying to get a way, though Wh ite can always p l ay 1 6 Q x R ch and win two rooks for the quee n ) , N-B4 (blocking the exit path ) ; 1 7 P-R5 , and the queen gets out at QN6, supported by this pawn . Fortunate ly for B l ack, there i s another way : s i mp l y 15 , N-N3, and the queen has no moves and must be g iven up for a m i nor p iece (plus the rook a l ready taken ) . Wh ite d i d not fa l l for it i n the actu a l game and p l ayed i nstead 15 P-OB3, B-N2. B l ack to p l ay should deve lop with 15 . . . , B-N2 . H e cannot be so bold . as to g rab White 's QBP by 1 5 . , Q x P, because the queen is needed to h e l p seal i n White's queen if it takes the rook (then 16 Q x R, N-N 3 ; 17 O-R 7, u s i ng the square previously covered by B l ack's queen) . . . . . . Black, o n move here, is a pawn ahead but is faced with a greedy white rook, which . threatens two pawns at once. What should Black do? Cornering I 1 55 Answer There is no need to give back a pawn and enter i nto com p l i cations such as 29 . . . , R-K7 ; 30 R x RP, R x KN P ; 31 R x P . Fischer agai nst Yepez, Seventeenth Olympiad 1 966, played 29 . . . , R-02 . This move protects the OP, and if 30 R x R P ? , K-N2, and the rook can 't get out al ive. So B l ack holds on to his extra pawn and next chases back the wh i te rook. The game conti nued 3 0 K-02 , K-N2 , and Black won in another e l even moves. Here is a position from a game White and for Black. I played recently. Decide what to do for Cornering / 1 56 A n swer I n looking at th is position, you shou l d note that both of Wh ite's kn ights a re p i nned to the k i n g , and that the k n i g ht at KB3 is attacked twice and defended twice. One of the defenders , White's quee n , is precariously p l aced and can not captu re the OP safe ly because of the pin on the supporti ng kn i ght. If you consider these e l ements , the right move for B l ack should occur to you . I was B l ack, agai nst Yap , New Jersey Team Tournament 1 973 , and p l ayed 24 . . . , B-N4. Th is won Wh ite's queen to beg i n with , si nce the th reatened queen had no safe square to move to, and i f 25 0 x B or 0 x OP, B l ack does not even have to capture the queen (wh ich he can do without recaptu re by the p i nned knight) . Even better is 25 . . , 0 x N ch ; 26 K-R2 , O-N 7 mate . U nderstandably, Wh ite res i g ned after 24 . . . , B-N4. Wh ite to p lay i n the original pos ition m i ght as wel l res i g n too , fo r he has no way of dea l i ng with B l ack's th reats . If 25 P-KR4, A-NS . If 25 K-R2 , B-N 4 ; 26 0 x B , R x O ; 27 N x R ? , O-N 7 mate . . Now see what you can find for White and for Black in this position. Cornering / 1 57 Answer · Th i s pos ition is from the game Fischer-C i ocaltea, Fifteenth Olympiad 1 962, after B l ack's fou rteenth m ove . To fi nd Fischer's crus h i n g move , you have to go one step beyond the o bv i o u s . B l ac k 's queen is stuck o n the o ut e r edge of B l ack's formati o n , w i t h n o safe move . It can be attacked by 15 B-N S , but obviously Black p l ays . . , P x B. H oweve r, i f you l ook a l ittl e fu rther, you ' l l see that when White rep l i es 1 6 P x P, the queen i s aga i n attacke d . I n t h e g a m e , B l a c k n o w p l ayed 1 6 . . . , 0 x P ; 1 7 N x 0 , B x N , getti ng a b i s hop a n d k n i g ht fo r h i s queen, a n d p l ayed o n u nti l m ove 26. B lack to p l ay must p rovid e for h i s queen 's safety. H e can move his kni ght o r KB to make roo m , o r he can p l ay 14 . . , B-N S . . . What would you d o for White and for Black here? Cornering / 1 58 Answer S i nce White 's queen p i n s the KNP, . . . , P x N i s not yet a threat and Wh ite does n ot have to m ove his k n i g ht. H e can thus take advantage of B l ack's problem-h i s s mothered K R , which can be attacked by 2 1 B-R 6 , w i n n i ng the exchange. I n the game B a l as hov-Ta l , USSR Team M atch 1 973, B lack was o n m ove and p layed 20 . . . , K-R 1 , u n p i n n i n g h i s k i n g and open i n g an escape square for the rook . The game conti nued 21 B-R6 , R-KN 1 ; 22 N x B , Q x N(2). With what you have been learning, you should b e able t o handle this position. Cornering / 159 Answer B l ac k to move has P x 0 , to which White has no cou ntermove . The prob l e m for White to move is wheth er to retreat h i s queen or to captu re the u ndefended O B P . I n the game Add i son-F i scher, U .S. Champi o ns h i p 1 963-1 964 , W h i te p l ayed 12 0-03, and B l ac k rep l i ed . N-N 3 . T h e O B P i s poison , because i f 1 2 0 x B P ? , B l ac k p l ays n o t N-N3 ( d i s covery attack) ; 13 O-K3 (p rotecti ng the b i shop wh i l e remov i n g the queen from attac k) , but 12 . . . . N-B4 ! Th i s move traps and w i n s the queen , for the kn i g ht covers the potenti a l escape squares 04 and K3 (for White ) , wh i l e the b i shop attacks the queen and covers the potentia l escape squares O N 4 a n d O R 3 . . . .• . . . .. .. In the position below, Black's rook i s hemmed i n and about to be captured. What should Black do about it? Cornering / 1 60 A n swer This position a rose in the s ixteenth game of Fischer-Spassky, Wo r l d Champions h i p M atch 1 972 . B l a c k cou ld give u p t h e exchange w i t h 23 . . . , R x B ch ; 24 P x R , P-B6 ; 25 R-B 2 , K-K3 w ith reasonable d raw i n g prospects . B u t Spassky escaped a t the cost of one of h i s two extra , but dou b l e d , pawns by 23 . . . , P-B6 , which attacked Wh ite's rook and also opened u p a n escape for the trapped rook (if 24 R-K2 ? , R-O R 5 , fo l l owed by 25 . . . , R (5) x P, etc . ; or if 24 R-07 ch ? , K-03 ; 25 K x R, R x R ) . So Wh ite p l ayed 24 K x R , P x R ; 25 R x OP, and B l ac k was u n a b l e to w i n with h i s extra doubled paw n . Here is another specific problem about a _possible escape from being cornered. Can Black win White's queen by 2 1 . , R-R l ? . . Cornering / 161 Answer At first g lance, it seems that B l ac k can win White's queen by 21 . . . , R-R 1 , but perhaps you noticed that Wh ite has a safe retreat with 22 O-B3 because B l ack's k n i g ht i s p i nned to his k i n g . Much better , thou g h , is 22 R x N ch, the beg i n n i n g of a double-guard removal combi natio n . If B l ac k captures 22 , N x R, then 2 3 Q x R ch, Q-B 1 ; 24 Q x N ch, etc . Bette r is 22 . . ., K-02, but then Wh ite continues 23 R-K7 ch (23 R x OP ch i s a l s o p l ayab l e ) . Th i s time B l ac k must captu re or lose his queen, a l lowi n g Wh ite t o take t h e othe r k n i ght: 23 . , Q x R ; 2 4 Q x N , and Wh ite has B + N + P for a rook, a l ong with a d o m i nati ng positi o n . T h e position a rose i n t h e first game of t h e Tal-Botvi n n i k World Championsh i p M atch 1 960. Ta i as Wh ite won th i s game and went on to w i n the m atc h . . . . . . Consider carefully what t o do for White t o move in the diagram below. Cornering / 1 62 Answer This position occurred in Game 1 1 of the Spassky-Fischer World Champions h i p Match 1 972 , on White's twenty-fourth move . At the moment, White was a m i nor p i ece behind but had the options of 24 0 x R and 24 P x N . The former wou l d probably have won , but White had an even more va luable target-B lack's queen. Spassky played 24 P-R4, leaving the queen only one p lace to go : . . . , O-K7. White cou l d then have attacked the · queen aga i n by 25 OR-K1 , and th is time there wou l d have been no place for it to flee. If 25 . , Q x R ch ; 26 R x 0, and White sti l l attacks both rook and kn ight. B lack can buy the queen's release by 25 . . . , N-N4; 26 Q x R, 0-06; 27 P x N, P-R6, but Wh ite has an extra rook . Fischer chose to reply to 24 P-R4 with . . , . P-R6 and played on for a few more moves after 25 P x Q before res i g n i n g . . . . In the last position, you had to chase the queen with one . move and then comer it with the next move, a more complicated process . than making a single move that traps an opposing piece. Here is another chance for a complex cornering combination. Look for each side to move, and see if you can find it. Cornering I 1 63 Answer This position a rose i n the game Jauregu i-Fischer, Santiago 1 959. White i gnored the pawns and went after B l ack's queen with 28 N-NS . The queen has only one fl ight square, 28 . . . , O-B3 , but then 29 P-KS wins it. Fischer tried 28 . . . , O P x P; 29 N x Q, R x R ; 30 N-06 but cou ld not save the game. B l ack to p l ay can save h i s queen best by 28 , BP x KP ; 29 N-N S , Q x P ; 30 B-K3 , O-N 1 ; etc, with three pawns t o t h e good . . . . •• Sometimes the cornering procedure can be started by sealing in the intended victim and then collecting it on the next move or so. Find how this can be done in the position below, and what the other side should do about it. Cornering / 164 Answer In the game Fischer-Baro n , Manhattan Chess Club 1 956-1 957, Wh ite p layed 44 B-OB4, sea l i ng i n the rook . If now 44 . . . , K-B4; 45 B-03 p i n s and w i ns t h e r o o k ( 4 5 R x N c h , P x R ; 46 P-N4 c h , R x P ; 47 P x R ch i s good enough t o w i n too ) . B l ac k thus h a d t o g i ve up the exchange i m m e d i ate l y and p l ayed 44 . . . , R x B ch; 45 K x R . B l ac k to p l ay m u st move h i s rook away, either to O R S o r QNS. Here is another example of the same idea. See what you can find for White and for Black. Cornering / 1 65 Answer In the game N imzowitsch-Leonhardt, San Sebastian 1 9 1 1 , B lack had just moved his queen up to 05. N imzowitsch, one of ·the founders of the " hypermodern " school of play, sea l ed in the venturesome queen with 29 N-05 ! The queen now had nowhere to go, and 30 P-OB3 was com ing next. B l ack played 29 . . . , R x N; 30 P-OB3, Q x OP, hoping for 3 1 R x 0 , R x R ; 32 O-B2 , B x BP, a n d B lack h a s more than enough for h i s lost queen. H owever, N i mzowitsch played 3 1 KP x R, Q x P(5) ; 32 P x B, 0 x KP; 33 O-B2, leaving B l ack with three pawns for a rook. Black to move i n the original pos ition shoul d save h i s queen by 29 . . . , 0-03 or 29 . . . , O-B6. In the position below, the basic cornering idea is there, even though many further moves are required to actually capture the victim. Decide what to do for White to move and for Black to move. Cornering / 1 66 Answer The w i n n i n g move for Wh ite i s 34 N-0 6 , as p l ayed i n Kupferstich­ And reassen, Denmark 1 953 . This m ove sea l s i n B l ack's k i n g and h i s rook as we l l . With the l i m ited forces at his d i sposa l , B l ack i s u n a b l e to b reak th is b l oc kade and can only m a ke waiting m oves . Wh ite i s thus free to p u rs u e h i s own plan with l ittl e i nterference. One plan i s to push down the queen-s i d e pawns ; the p ro b l e m with th i s i s that B l ac k can push up h i s KP and K N P until White captures the m , and can then capture any threate n i n g pawn on the queen side, s i nce the sequence . . . , B x P; P(or Kl x B res u l ts i n sta l emate ( a d raw) . The correct plan for White is to go after the ensnared king and checkmate it. Th i s can be done by b r i n g i n g the wh ite k i n g to K7 and then mov i n g the knight to KB6 ( m ate) via e ithe r KB or K4 . We w i l l further con s i d e r th i s potential position b e l ow . F r o m B l ac k ' s point of v i e w , 34 . . . , K-B2 i s necessary t o g e t t h e k i n g o o u t before i t ' s locked i n . Here we have the position alluded to in the discussion above. White has brought his king to K7 and is now ready to bring his knight to KB6 (mate) . Black is being difficult and has placed his bishop on his QB3 , covering both o f the knight's access squares. Think about this a bit and decide how White should proceed . Cornering I 1 67 A nswer In a l l the pos itions so fa r, the w i n n i n g s i d e made forcefu l moves and combi nati ons, but that is not the way to do it here . B l ack's p i eces a re so tied up that he has no usefu l moves and o n l y a few u s el ess moves (with h i s pawns) . When these a re exhausted , he wi l l have to ru i n h i s pos ition h i mse lf-a s ituation known as zugzwang ( move comp u l s i o n ) . T h e bas i c i d e a f o r Wh ite i s s i m p l y t o w a i t u nt i l B lack r u n s o u t of moves with h i s pawns and has to move h i s b i shop. One way i s 1 P-KR4, P-KS ; 2 P-R 3 , P-N4 ; 3 P x P, P-KS ; 4 P x P, and now B l a c k must move h i s b i shop a n d a l l ow 5 N-K4 or 5 N-K8 (depending on where it m oves ) fol l owed by 6 N-B6 mate . Anothe r way i s 1 P-O N 4 , P-N4 ; 2 P-N S , P-N S ; 3 P x B ( not sta l e mate , s i nce B lack sti l l h a s a few pawn moves) , P-N6 ; 4 N-K4 , P x R P ; 5 N-B6 mate . I d i d n 't expect you to see a l l of t h i s from the ori g i na l game position when Wh ite p l ayed 34 N-06. T h i s move has to be good , because it l eaves Black h e l p l ess i nstead of a l low i n g his k i n g and rook to come i nto the actio n . You can p l ay 34 N-06 o n general p r i n c i p l e s and then find the r i g ht way to fi n i s h B lack off as you go a l o n g . For his part, B l ack can res i g n on general p r i n c i p l e s , w h i c h i s what he d i d i n the game (after 34 N-06) . Now apply what you have just learned to this position . Cornering / 1 68 Answer I n exa m i n i ng th i s pos ition, it s h o u l d occur to you that, a lthough White is defend i n g a g a i n st B l ac k 's threats , he is a l l tied u p . Bl ac k can expl o i t th i s zugzwang s ituation by s i mp l y waiti n g . I n t h e game Tyl o r-E m . Lasker, N otti ngham 1 93 6 , Lasker chose to wa it with 45 . . . , K-R 3 , l eaving to White the prob l e m of fi n d i n g a move . Struc k with the fut i l ity of it a l l , White res i g n e d . If 46 N-R 4 , P-N4 ; 47 N-N2 , B x P ; 48 P-R 3 , B x P, and B l a c k w i n s eas i ly w i t h h i s q ueen-s i d e pawn s . Cornering I 1 69 CHAPTER Setting Up Com binations ��- -����� · In Chapter 3 you advanced from the level of simply capturing unguarded or higher-value pieces to the level of making an attack on two pieces at once. In the first case, you make an attack directly on an opposing piece ; in the second, the attack starts with a threat to move to a certain square (from which the double attack will be in effect ) . To illustrate : On the left, the white knight directly attacks the black rook ; Black should move his rook away. Oil ti;:! right, the white knight threatens to move to Q6, forking the two rooks ; Black to move should prevent this fork by moving one of his rooks. In both cases, there are threats, though Black is more likely to overlook the less direct fork threat. In this chapter, we will go back a step and examine ways to set up the basic combinations you have been learning. To begin with, you will now learn that a double attack need not be against two enemy pieces ; it can be against one piece and a vital square. Setting Up Combinations / 1 70 Now consider the pm.ition shown below. It would be nice for White's knight to move to Q6, but it will take at least two moves to get there. As White, you should notice the potential fork and look for a way to bring it about. By this time, you should be able to pick the right way of doing this. How should White continue? Setting Up Combinations / 1 71 Answer White can reach 06 in two m oves e i ther by N-ON5-06 o r by N-KB5-06. The important d i ffe rence i s that the r i g ht way (correct and to the r i g ht i n this case) makes use of a chec k : 1 N-B5 c h , K-B3 ; 2 N-06, B i n g o ! Afte r Wh ite's first move , w e c a n s a y that t h e kn i g ht i s attacking both the k i n g and the vital square 06. This d i rect- i n d i rect dou b l e attac k g i ves White time to get to 06 before B l ack can break u p the fork patte rn . The a l ternative 1 N-N5 threatens o n l y to move to 06, g iving B l ack time to move one of his rooks (e.g., 1 . . . . KR-0 1 ) . Here is a full position in which you can apply the same kind of maneuver. Look for both sides and decide how to stop it as well as how . to do it. Setting Up Combinations / 1 72 Answer You s h o u l d be looking for and fi n d i n g poss i b l e patterns for the com­ b i nations you have been learn i n g . One pattern i s that B lack's king and k n i g ht a re on the same l i ne , i nviting a p i n , but Wh ite's b i shop i s on the wrong-c o l o red square (if you put the b i shop at K2 on ON2 i n stea d , B-R3 i s strong) . Another patte rn i s that Wh ite's rooks are i n fork position for . . . , N-B 7 . The k n i g ht i s two moves away but can start with a check: 2 1 . . . , N-KS ch; 22 K-N 4 , N-B 7 . I n t h e game Reshevsky-Smys l ov, World Cham p i o n s h i p Tournament 1 948, i t was White's move. Reshevsky p layed 21 B-B 3 , guard i ng the ·checking square. The stepping-stone threat need not be a check ; any reasonable threat will do, as in the position below. Decide what to do for each side. Setting Up Combinations / 1 73 Answer Botv i n n i k had Wh ite agai nst G rigoriev, Team Matc h , USSR 1 92 7 , and p layed 25 N-B5. The k n i g ht now attacked the queen and the forking s quare KR6. I f 25 . . . , O-B3 ; 26 N-R6 ch and 27 N x R . B l a c k chose to g i ve up the exchange in a d i ffe rent way by 25 . . . , R x N ; 26 B x R (the queen p rotects the b i s hop) . B l a ck to m ove s h o u l d break up th i s patte rn , which he can do i n va rious ways : 25 . . . , R-B3 , 25 . . . , K-R 1 , o r 25 . . . , O-K1 ( o r B3 o r 0 1 ) . H e should not p lay 2 5 . . . , R-N 2 o r 2 5 . . . , K-N 2 , which p l aces h i m i n a d i rect k n i g ht fork b y 2 6 N-B5 ( ch ) . N ote a l s o the va riation 2 5 . . . , R-N 2 ; 2 6 N-B 5 , R-N4 ? ; 2 7 N x 0 c h , K-R 1 � 28 0 x R ; o r 26 . . . , O-N4 ? ; 27 N x R , 0 x O ; 28 N x 0 . S i nce ne ither o f these cou nte rattacks wo rks , B l ack ( afte r 25 . . . , R-N 2 ? ; 26 N-B5) m u st res i g n h i m."1 elf to 26 . . . , R x N ; 27 0 x R. The use of the stepping-stone threat is of course not limited to knights. In the position below, use it with a different piece, and see what you can do to stop it as well. Settif1g Up Combinations / 1 74 Answer B lack's queen and rook a re v u l n e ra b l e to a double attack by a b i shop at Wh ite's OB7, and s u re enough, White has a bi shop i n the v i c i n ity. Once you see th i s , gett i n g there shou l d be no p rob l e m-there is o n l y one w a y i n two moves, starting conve n i ently w i t h a c h e c k . I w a s the v i cti m of th i s p l ay , made in a s i m u ltaneous exh i b ition i n 1 957 by a trio of America's lead i n g young masters. After 27 B-06 c h , K-R 1 ; 28 B-B7 , I w a s stuck. A t th i s p o i nt 28 . . . , Q-R 2 wou l d have h e l d on f o r a l ittl e wh i l e , but I p l ayed 28 . . , O-N6 a n d got mated b y 2 9 R-ON4, Q x R ( . . . , Q x B staves off the mate at tremendous cost) ; 30 Q-R 6 mate . B l ac k to p l ay s h o u l d block th i s combination and contest the QB fi l e by 27 . . . , R-QB 1 . . The next two positions are slightly more complicated because they involve slight twists to the basic stepping-stone maneuver. See what you can find for each side to move. Setting Up Combinations / 1 75 Answer In the thi rteenth game of the Tal-Botv i nn i k World Champions h i p M atch 1 960, Wh ite p l ayed 1 0 N-05, which prevented B l ac k 's threat. B la c k to move can set u p a pawn fork by 10 . . , P-KN4. The queen has only -0ne safe square, 1 1 O-R3 , but then 1 1 . . , P-N5 w i n s a p i ec e. Note that the pawn wou l d t h e n be supported by B l ack's k n i g ht, which White can e l i minate after h i s actua l tenth move by N x N c h . Th i s sequence (with Black t o move) i s a l ittl e tricky, because the fork i n g pattern exists only when the queen i s driven t h e r e . On t h e othe r hand, you a re fam i l ia r with cornering patterns from the last chapter , and White's queen i s a l i kely-looking victi m . If chased with 10 , P-N4 , does i t have anywhere to g o ? Yes , to K R 3 , but then the fork is there. . . . . . Here is the second position with a slight twist, but it should be no trouble for you. Decide what to do for both White and Black to move. Setting Up Combinations / 1 76 Answer Th i s pos ition arose i n the game Euwe-Tartakove r , N ott i n g ham 1 936. Euwe , then the wor l d cham p i o n , p l ayed 2 1 P-K5 . The advanci ng pawn th reate ns to take B l ack's kn i g ht and also to advance a g a i n to K6, forki n g queen and r o o k ( 2 1 . . , N-B4 ; 22 P-K6, O-K 1 ; 23 P x R c h , etc . ) . B l a c k c a n take oft the pawn , b u t w i l l t h i s stop White ? N ot q u ite , f o r then (21 . . . , P x P) White rep l i es 22 N x KP, and the k n i g ht does the fork job i nstead of the pawn . Tartakover p l ayed this l i n e , s i nce i t only l oses the exchange for B l ack, conti n u i n g 22 . . , Q x KP; 23 N x R, N x N; 24 Q x P . B u t Wh ite had a c r u s h i n g pos itio n . · B lack t o move c a n p lay 2 1 . . . , Q x K P , e l i m i nati ng White's th reat. The a lternative 21 . . , N x P stops the fo rk th reats too , but loses to 22 Q x P, attack i n g rook and k n i g ht. . . . In the stepping-stone examples you have been working with, you have set up your combination by getting one of your pieces to a vital square. An even more common way is to get one of your opponent's pieces to the square where you can make your combination work. The position below, from Fischer-Letelier, Santiago 1 9 59, is a simple illustration of this repositioning process. See if you can find how Fischer did it. Look for a pattern that doesn't yet work, and then see if you can make Black reposition his pieces so that it does. Setting Up Combinations / 1 77 A nswer B l ack's queen and rook a re in l i n e for a potent i a l s kewer by Wh ite 's b i shop, but B l ack's OP is in the way. So Fischer p l ayed 22 P x P , attacking the knight as we l l a s the queen. B l ac k recaptu red , 22 . . . , 0 x P , to save his kni ght, but then Fischer p l ayed 23 B-K5, w i n n i ng the exchange (23 . . . , O-ON3 ; 24 B x R , 0 x B ) . By the way, Wh ite s h o u l d not try 22 P-B6 because of 22 . . . , N x O P ; 23 P x B , N x B. As i d e from v i s ua l i z i ng the potentia l s kewer from the o r i g i n a l pos it io n, another w a y of find i n g the r i g ht sequence i s to consider w hat happens one move ahead . S i nce White's center pawns are under attack, 22 P x P and i ts forced rep l y 22 . , 0 x P s h o u l d enter you r cons i d e ratio n . Now the s kewer i s p l a i n l y v i s i b l e : a b i s hop i s able to move on to the d i agonal (at KS) , and both the kni ght and queen p rotect it. . . In the position below, White can win material by taking advantage of a simple combination pattern th at will exist on the second move if Black makes the obvious reply. The right move may be a little difficult to · find because the pattern does not yet exist, but see what you can do. Setting Up Combinations / 1 78 Answer You m u st l ea rn to look for the fam i l i a r combi nation patte rns not only in the position that i s r i g ht i n front of you , but a l so i n poss i b l e futu re pos itions. I n this pos ition, a l l of B l ack's p i eces look secure , but look ahead one move . Wh ite 's kn i g ht i s attack i n g B l ack's KP and KBP. The KP i s defended by the KBP, so i f 37 N x KP, P x N. W h i te can then try 38 Q x P ch, K-R 2 ; 39 R-07 ch, N-N 2 , and Wh ite 's " attack " i s at an end . The KBP is defended by the king , so if 38 N x B P , K x N ; and what now? Aha ! B l ack's k i n g and rook are now vu l nerable to a double attack by the queen : 39 O-N 7 ch and 40 0 x R, netting a rook and pawn fo r the knight. Th i s position i s from the game Ta rtakove r-Th omas, Nottingham 1 936. Black rep l i ed to 37 N x B P with . . . , N-N 2 , and Wh ite withdrew, 38 N-KS, with a pawn to the good . Here is another position with a similar concept-a nice combination exists because a black piece is guarding a vital square as well as a pawn. So this piece can be said to be overworked, which you learned about in Chapter 7. See what you can find for White to move. Setting Up Combinations / 1 79 Answer B l ack's da rk-squa red b i shop h e l ps defend the OBP and a l s o g u ards agai nst White's N-K7 ch. This b i s hop i s wor k i n g ha rd-too h a rd in fact-de­ fen d i n g not two different p i eces (as in C hapter 7) but a p i ece and a v i ta l square. W h i te was Marsha l l , American c h a m p i o n from 1 909 to 1 93 6 , agai nst E s s e r , London 1 899. M a rsha l l p l ayed 1 5 B x P , w i n n i n g a pawn s i nce 1 5 . . . , B x B ? ? ; 1 6 N-K7 c h w i n s the queen . B l a c k p l ayed 1 5 . . ., B-K3 i n stead , but cou l d not save the game agai nst M a rs h a l l . Sometimes you can make your combination work by driving one of your opponent's pieces to a good (for you ) square. See if you can do this with White to move below. Setting Up Combinations / 1 80 Answer Wh ite has a potential kn i g ht fork at KN6, which at the moment is occup i ed by White's rook . Any move by the rook w i l l threaten N-N6 c h . One poss i b i l ity i s 48 R x O N P , b u t B l ac k can p l ay 48 . . . , R-R6 ch ; 49 K-N2 , R x P , rema i n i n g two pawns ahead . Anothe r i s 4 8 R x K N P , P x R ; 4 9 N-N6 c h ( rega i n i n g the rook) . K-B 2 ; 5 0 N x R c h , K-N2 , a n d the k n i g ht i s cornered . A th i rd poss i b i l ity i s 48 R-N 7 ch, but B l ac k can reply 48 . . . , K-K 1 o r 48 . . . , K-B 1 , not 48 . . . , K-B3 ? ? ; 49 R-KB7 mate , o r 48 . . . , K-03 ? ; 49 N-B7 c h . I w a s p l ay i n g B l ac k agai nst my brothe r R . A u l t , New J e rsey 1 957, and he p layed 48 R-K6 c h . T h e k i n g h a s o n l y two p laces t o retreat, and e a c h a l l ows a k n i g ht fork. If 48 . . . , K-0 1 ; 49 N-B7 ch w i n s the rook , so I chose 48 . . . , K-B 1 ; 49 N-N6 c h , K-N2 ; 5 0 N x R , K x N , but m y position was hope less. In this position I came out ahead with the help of one of the maneuvers you have j ust been learning. See if you can figure out how. Look for each side to move. Setting Up Combinations / 181 Answer Wh ite to m ove has B x Q, w i n n i n g eas i ly , so the p rob l e m is what to d o f o r B l ack . I w as p laying B l a c k agai nst D u b e c k , N ew J e rsey I nterco l l e g i ate 1 959, and had p l ayed th i s l i n e , h o p i n g my opponent wou l d fa l l i nto the trap with his last move ( 1 4 B-KN 5 ) . At fi rst g lance, Wh ite seems to win a piece, because after the queen moves away, 1 5 B x N . B l ac k can s ave the k n i ght by 14 . . . , 0-R4 ch ; 1 5 K-B 1 , N-B4 , but I p l ayed 14 . . . , O x B ! It is B l a c k who wins the piece, for if 1 5 Q x 0 , N-B6 ch ; 1 6 K-B 1 , N x Q , so my opponent res i g ned i nstead . T o s e e th i s trap, you must a l s o see the l i n k between Wh ite's queen and the bishop i t p rotects , and real ize that the k n i ght-fork pattern works i f the queen repl aces the b i s h o p . B l ac k t h e n makes t he tem porary sacrifice of h i s queen i n order to repos ition Wh ite 's queen on the desi red square. The position below is from Miyasaka-Fischer, Nineteenth Olympiad 1 970, with Black to move. Fischer's move resulted in his opponent's immediate resignation, for it set up. a combination. With this hint, look beyond the obvious and find the move. Setting Up Combinations / 1 82 Answer Fi rst l et's look at the obv i o u s . B l ack has an i nviting pawn fo rk by 30 , P-KS, but then 3 1 Q x B , P x R ; 32 Q x N , P x P ; 33 R-O B 1 . The prob l e m i s that B l ack's b i shop i s l eft u n protected after t h e pawn 's advance. B l a c k a l so h a s a d i scovered c h e c k by movi n g h i s k n i g h t but no p l ace t o g o where he can d o d i rect damage . H oweve r , he c a n move t h e knight s o t h a t it w i l l p rotect the bishop and t h u s make the pawn fo r k work. Fischer's move was 30 . . , N-R4 ch, and White res i g n ed . I f Wh ite p l ays o n with 31 K-N 1 , then . . . , P-KS w i n s a rook. . . . . Like the last position, the one below illustrates a way to make a familiar combination work at the second move without allowing the opponent time to prevent it. Look carefully and decide how White to play wins. Setting Up Combinations / 1 83 Answer This position i s from the game between F i ne and Em. Lasker, N ottingham 1 93 6. Wh ite has a potenti a l d i scovered check by mov i n g h i s KP, but at p resent h i s kn i g ht i s i n the way. If the kn i g ht moves away, then P-KS c h wi l l be a threat. If t h e k n i g ht can move t o m a k e a th reat too , t hen Bl ac k wi l l have tro u b l e stopp i n g both . I f y o u fo l l ow this reaso n i n g , t he right move , 28 N-B6 , should be easy to fi n d . The game conti nued 28 . . , O-B 4 ; 29 P-KS c h , P-N3 ; 30 P x N , N x B P , w i t h White a p i ece f o r a pawn ahead . Anothe r try for Wh ite i s 28 N x P , but B l ac k comes out even i n mate r i a l afte r 2 8 . , Q x N ; 2 9 P-KS c h , P-N 3 ; 3 0 P x N , 0 x P (or 30 . . . , N x BP) . . . . Here is another position from which you are to set up a combination, with Black to play. Setting Up Combinations / 1 84 Answer Th i s position a rose i n Game 1 1 of Botvin n i k-Bronste i n , Wo r l d Champion­ s h i p M atch 1 95 1 . W i th a queen and pawn for a rook and k n i g ht, B l ack i s comforta b l y ahead , b u t h e sti l l h a s t o wi n t h e g a m e . H e cou l d even l ose by 39 . . . , Q x Q R P ? ; 40 R x P , Q x N P ? ? ; 4 1 R-KB m ate . As you exa m i n e t h e position , y o u shou l d note that W h i te's k i n g p rotects h i s k n i g ht, w h i c h p rotects h i s roo k-a s i tuati on ripe f o r d i s rupti o n . The o n l y w a y t o p rod one of these p i eces i s 39 . . . , P-R4 ch, but W h i t� can rep l y 40 K-N S , m a i n ta i n i n g p rotection of the kn i g ht, and i f t h e n 40 . . . , P-B3 ch ; 4 1 K x B P . So t h i s d i rect d r i veaway atte mpt fa i l s , b u t maybe it can be made to work. It wou l d work if 39 . . , P-B3 blocked KNS so that Wh ite's k i n g c o u l d n o t g o t o K N S . Th i s w a s B ronste i n 's move , and Botv i n n i k res i g n e d , f o r t h e r e i s no w a y to stop 40 . . . , P-R4 c h . If 40 R x P , P-R4 c h ; 4 1 K-R4, O x R P m ate o r 4 1 K x P , O x N c h ; 42 K-R 4 , O x R ch ; etc . I f 40 N-06, the rook i s l ost (40 . . . , Q x R ) . . How would you set up a crushing combination i n this position, with White to move? Setting Up Combinations / 1 85 Answer Wh ite i s a pawn beh i n d , but B l ack's king is dangerous l y exposed . Furthermore, B l ack's k i n g and queen are on the same l i n e , v u l nerab l e to a rook . Once you note th i s , the correct move shou l d be easy . Fischer was White agai nst my b rother R. Au lt, U .S . Championship 1 959-1 960 , and p l ayed 29 R-R4 . The threat i s to b r i n g the rook to KN4, takin g a pawn in the p rocess and-much more i m p o rtant-p i n n i ng B l ack's quee n . With no way to add a defender to his KNP, B l ac k i s h e l p l es s . I f 29 . . . , O-K2 ; 30 R x P c h , K-R 1 ; 3 1 R-R 1 c h , and mates as soon as B l ac k th rows i n h i s kni ght a n d queen a s sacrific i a l offeri ngs [ 3 0 . . . , N-N3 wou l d h o l d out a l ittl e longer) . My b rother tried 29 . . . , O-N 2 ; 30 R x P , N-N 3 , but had to res i g n after 31 P-B6, O-R 1 (if 31 , Q x P; 32 B x N ) ; 32 R x N c h , because o f 32 . . . , P x R ; 33 Q x N P c h , O-N 2 ; 34 Q x Q mate . . . . In the position below, with White to play, again you have to look one step beyond the obvious and also make use of a basic endgame principle mentioned earlier. Setting Up Combinations / 1 86 Answer Th i s pos ition i s from Fischer-Pach m a n , Fou rteenth O ly m p i ad 1 960. Wh ite i s a pawn ahead , B l ack's k i n g is i nsecure, and B lack's k i n g and queen are i n l i ne for a pos s i b l e s kewer check. White i s attack i n g the KNP twice agai nst o n l y one defender, but the queen must capture fi rst and be exchanged fo r the rook . Look deeper, and you ' l l fi nd that th i s i s i ndeed the right start. Fischer p l ayed 38 O x N P ch, R x O; 39 R x P ch, the p o i nt being that White now wins back the queen with the s kewer check: 39 . . . , K-03 ; 40 R x 0 , K x R. The resu l t of all th i s action i s that W h i te has won a second pawn and traded down to a k i n g and pawn end i n g , genera l ly a n easy w i n with o n e extra paw n , l et a l one two . Fischer p l ayed 41 P-KN 4 , mobi l iz i n g h i s ki n g-s ide pawns ( i t is i m portant to d i scourage B l ack 's k i ng from march i n g in, . . . , K-03-B4-N5 x P , fo r W hite can queen a pawn i n the meantime by P-R4-R5 and P-N S , etc . ) , and B l ac k s o o n res i g n e d . Black to play below has an easy win by setting up a combination similar to one that was used in a recent position. Enough said ; now, see if you can find it. Setting Up Combinations / 1 87 Answer H e re we have another defender substitution , this time to m a ke a p i n effective , from t h e g a m e P i l n i c k-Fischer, M a r d e l P l ata 1 959. White's b i s hop i s o n l i ne with the k i n g , but the b i shop p revents B l ac k from u s i n g t h e d i agonal t o exp i oit th i s opportu n ity . This b i shop i s attacked a n d defended b y rooks , w h i c h g ives B l a c k t h e poss i b i l ity o f su bstituti n g a roo k for the b i shop by 37 . . . , R x B ; 38 R x R . At the cost of the exchange, B l a c k now sets u p a pin by 38 . . . , B-K5 and w i n s the rook by the r i g ht fo l l ow-u p . The game conti nued 39 R ( 7 ) x P, R-KB 7 . B l a c k attacks the stricken rook a g a i n (as in C hapter 5). but he must do it this way to keep the king away, not by 39 . . . , R-N 6 , w h i c h wou l d a l l ow 40 K-N2 . In the g a m e , White n ow tried several checks , 40 R-B8 ch (the p i n ned rook can sti l l support a checking p i ece) . K-N 2 ; 41 R (8)-B7 ch, K-R 3 , and then res i g n e d . The next several positions involve setting up combinations of the same sort as illustrated in the preceding positions in this chapter. Now you will be expected to find them and also to avoid them ; in other words, decide what to do for both White to move and Black to move, starting with the one below. Setting Up Combinations / 1 88 Answer White to play has a k n i g ht fork by 22 N-K7 ch, but B l ack's k n i g ht guards th i s square , a l lowing the repl y 22 . . . , N x N. U nfo rtu n ate l y fo r B lack, the k n i g ht a l so g u a rds the rook , and White conti nues 23 0 x R c h . Not o n l y does this get back a rook fo r the k n i g ht (which wou l d be good enough by i tself) . but a l s o B lack can play only 23 . . . , O-K 1 , when 24 0 x 0 is mate . I n the s i xteenth game of the Botv i n n i k-Ta l World Champions h i p Match 1 960, it was B l ack's m ove . Tai avoi ded the danger by playing 21 . . . , R-KB 1 , to which Botv i n n i k rep l i ed 22 N-B7 . Also effective in stopping White's b i g th reat was 2 1 . . . , R-02, which stops 22 N-B7 as we l l . What would you do for White and for Black in this position? Setting Up Combinations / 1 89 Answer B l ack has a potenti a l k n i g ht fork by mov i n g . . . , N-K4 , but W h i te can answer P x N. You shou l d look-though in vai n-for a way to get rid of the W h i te OP. Anoth e r poss i b i l i ty i s that if B l ack's OP were out of the way, Wh ite's OP wou l d be p i n n ed to h i s u n protected quee n . So, if 21 . . ., P x P; 22 P x P , N-K4 , and B l ac k w i n s the exchange. There i s a nother way t o recaptu re, 22 0 x P , w h i c h u n p i n s t h e queen . H owever , t h e q u e e n i s h e l p i n g t o g u a rd t h e KP, w h i c h B l ac k can t h e n w i n . I n the game Bonda revs ky-Botv i n n i k , USSR Champ i o n s h i p 1 94 1 , Botv i n n i k p l ayed 21 . . . , P x P , and White chose to g ive u p the pawn by 22 0 x P, R x P ; 23 R x R, R x R. White to p l ay can stop the th reat i n various ways : B-02, B-B 2 , P x P , o r P-B5. Perhaps best i s 2 2 B-N 3 , s o that i f 2 2 . . . , P x P ; 2 3 P x P, N-K4 ; 24 B x N . R x B ; 25 O-N 3 , etc . Here again, look for a way both to set it. up a combination and to prevent Setting Up Combinations / 1 90 Answer B l ac k wou l d have a knight fork at OBS, except that his b i s hop i s occupy­ i n g that square. If the bishop moves , then . . . , N-BS wi l l be a threat, s o t h e prob l e m i s to m a ke an effective move w i t h the b i shop. T her e i s a s i m p l e captu re ava i l a b l e , 23 . . . , B x B , which w i n s the exchange afte r Wh ite recaptu res : 24 R x B , N-B S . I n t h e twenty-fi rst game of t h e Botv i n n i k-Bronste i n W o r l d Champion­ s h i p M atch 1 95 1 , White was on move and p l ayed 23 B-N2 . N ow B l a c k has no forcefu l move w i th t h e bi shop, leaving White time t o react agai nst the th reat of . . . , N-BS s h o u l d the b i shop move away. This position should not be too difficult, either. Decide what to do for each side to move. Setting Up Combinations / 191 Answer I was Wh ite a g a i n st Kraus , New J e rsey 1 973, and p l ayed 20 N-B7 . The k n i ght threatens the rook , but m o re i mportant, it th reatens 21 N-K6 c h , fork i n g k i n g a n d quee n . B l ac k h a d n o w a y t o defend agai nst both th reats , so he res i g n ed . If 20 . . . , N-K4 , s i mp l y 2 1 N x R , and the k n i g ht has no tro u b l e gett i n g back out at O N 6 . B l ac k t o m ove i s sti l l i n b i g tro u b l e . I f 20 . . . , N-B 1 ; 2 1 N-B7 , R-N 1 ( i f . . . , R-R 2 ; 22· O-N 6 ) ; 22 KR-0 1 , B-02, and Wh ite has the cho i c e , turn i n g t h e sc rews tighter by 23 B-N4 , K-B2 ; 24 O-N 6 , etc . , o r cas h i n g i n t h e exchange w i n by 23 N-K6 c h , N x N ; 24 B x R , N-05 ( i f . . . , 0 x B ; 25 R x B , etc . ) ; 25 B-N 3 . T h e a lternative 20 . . . . N-K4 i s m e t by 2 1 B x N , P x B ; 22 O x K P c h , B-B3 ; 23 N x B , O x N ; 24 O x P , and Wh ite i s two pawns up in a command i n g positi o n . Now figure out this position, which shouldn't b e very hard i f you're careful. Setting Up Combinations / 1 92 Answer Th i s position arose i n the game Reshevs ky-Lom bardy, U .S . Champion­ ship 1 972 , with White to p l ay. Both White's b i shop and B l ack's knight a re loose, so 37 R x N, R x B does n 't do much for White . More i mportant, B l ack's k i n g , k n i g ht, and rook a re a l l o n the same d i agona l , a feature Wh ite s h o u l d try to exp loit. The obvious try i s 37 B-R3 , but B l ac k has 37 . . . , R-N 6 ch; 38 K x P, R x B; 39 R x N, with a long fight ahead . R eshevs ky p l ayed the right move , 37 B-B 3 , R-BS ( p rotecting the knight and attac k i n g the b i shop) ; 38 R x N , w i n n i ng a piece (38 R x R; 3 9 B-N 4 , K-K 1 ; 40 B x R ) . B l ack t o move shou l d l i q u idate the m i no r p i eces b y 3 7 R x B; 38 R x N. The position below is an example of a common type of combinational trap that chess players shouldn't fall into but do. Decide what to do for each side to move. Setting Up Combinations / 1 93 Answer With Wh ite to move , the s o l ution is to set up a position in w hic h White can move h i s KN away with check, d i scover i n g an attack on the u n p ro­ tected b i s h o p . I was Wh ite in th i s game (vs . Price, New York 1 964) and p u n i s hed my opponent for his care l essness by 1 3 B x P ch. If 1 3 . . . , K x B ; 1 4 N-KNS c h , K-N 1 ; 1 5 O x B , With Wh ite a pawn ahead . B lack p l ayed i n stead 13 . . . , K-R 1 , and I retreated my b i shop with 14 B-B2 so as to avo i d . . . , P-K N 3 , s ea l i ng it i n . B l ac k t o p l a y shou l d avo i d th i s com b i nat i o n , w h i c h c a n be d o n e i n various ways : p rotecting t h e bishop ( 1 3 . . . , 0-02, among others ) ; re­ treating the bishop ( 1 3 . . ., B-B4) ; blocking Wh ite 's b i s ho p ( 1 3 . . . , N-N3 ) ; exchang i n g ( 1 3 . . . , B x N ) ; or even moving the k i n g out of the potential check ( 1 3 . . . , K-R 1 , so that i f 14 B x P , P-N3 , corn e r ing the b i s hop) . Any of these moves , and others as we l l , stop the combi nation but l eave Black with a poor pos ition even though mate ri a l is eve n . In this position, the winning idea is basically simple but may appear unattractive at first glance. See what you can find, for each side to move. Setting Up Combinations / 1 94 Answer B lack has a k n i g ht for a pawn and wi l l happ i l y p lay 30 . . . , Q x Q, even though 31 R x P ch, Q-R 2 ; 32 R x Q ch, K x R cuts his g a i n a l ittl e . I n the game F i scher-Panov, S kopje 1 967, F i scher had sacrificed to reach th i s position a'n d continued 30 R-N 6 ! , h itti ng at B l ack's vul nera b l e K R P . W i t h no w a y t o defe n d , B lack res igned . I f 30 . . . , P-R 4 ; 3 1 P-N4, R-KN 1 ; 32 R x R P , R x R; 33 Q x R, Q x R; 34 -a x Q ch, K-N 2 ; 35 P x P, and Wh ite m o p s u p . F i s c h e r ' s m o v e (30 R-N 6 ! ) m a y be hard t o s ee because it moves i nto a p i n , but White c rashes through as s hown . N ot as good is 30 Q-B 1 (with the same pu rpose-attack on the KRP) , P-R4 ; 3 1 Q-0 1 , P x P ! ; 32 Q x R P ! (otherwise B l ack can defend h i ms el f; e . g . , 32 R x R P , R-K8 ch ! o r 32 P x P , R-KS ! ) , R-K2 (forced to preve nt mate ) ; 33 O-N4, P x P; 34 R x P, but White sti l l w i n s . Weak for Wh ite i s 30 Q-N 6 ? ! , Q x Q ; 3 1 R x Q , R-K2 ! , a n d B l ack escapes the mate . By the way , an i n structive variation is 30 R-N6 ! , R-R8 ch ; 3 1 K-R2 , R-R 7 ! ; 3 2 Q-K4 ! (White s h o u l d not take the rook , for he wou l d then l ose h i s own rook and h i s attack as we l l ) , R-K 7 ; 33 O-N 4 , R-KN 1 ; 34 R (4) x P. Here is your last position to figure out in this chapter-not too easy, but not too hard if you look for patterns and ways to make them work. Setting Up Combinations / 195 Answer T h i s position i s from V i d m a r-Capablanca, N otti ngham 1 93 6 , with B l ac k t o p l a y . B l ack can force t h e w i n of the exchange b y setti ng u p a fork with two p re l i m i na ry m oves . The potenti a l fork is by . . . , N-B6 c h , but th i s square i s defended by Wh ite 's queen and knight. Fi rst, 21 . . . , B-R 4 , putt i ng a defender on t h e forking square and chas i n g Wh ite's r o o k a s wel l . W h e n White retreats , 22 R-R 1 , B l ac k fo l l ows w i t h 22 . . . , P-B4, d r i v i n g away the k n i ght. Then 23 N-0 2 , N-B6 c h , and B l ack has s u cceeded . These moves wi l l not work i n reve rse order, by the way, for if 2 1 . . . , P-B 4 ; 22 N-B3 , B-R 4 ; 23 B x N , and Wh ite i s safe . I n the game, Vidmar answered 2 1 . . . , B-R4 with 22 K-R 1 , to which Capablanca s h o u l d have responded 22 . . . , B x R; i nstead , he chose the adventu rous 22 . . . , 0-RS. Setting Up Combinations / 196 , CHAPTER Exchange Series In this and the next two chapters, we will consider three important secondary themes : exchange series, queening combinations, and mate­ based combinations. Each of these themes combines certain special con­ siderations with the basic combinational elements you h ave already learned. Thus far, we have dealt almost exclusively with sequences of moves in which one player does something and the other reacts to it, such as ( a) attack, defend and ( b ) capture, recapture. Sometimes the second player can respond in a different way-by a comparable action elsewhere on the board-which results in a sequence of ( c ) attack, attack or ( d) capture, capture. These sequences, which I h ave termed exchange series and which include the maneuvers known as zwischenzug and desperado, involve some general principles and many examples worth studying. Let's start with a simple example. In the position below ( Fischer-Sherwin, U.S. Championship 1 9 621 963 ) , White is a pawn ahead but Black is on move. (White's pawn at his KN7 arrived there by 5 P-K5, 6 P x N, and 7 P x NP ; Black's pawn at his QB6 arrived there by 5 . . . , P-05 and 6 . . , P x N . ) See if you can find the correct move fo r Black. . Exchange Series / 197 Answer I n th i s pos ition we have an exchange series al ready in progress (the moves from move 5 can be described as 5 attack, attac k ; 6 captu re , captu re ; 7 captu re ) . The various poss i b i l ities for B l a c k i l l u strate some i mportant p r i n c i p l e s of exchange s e r i e s . O ne a lternative i s t o continue captu r i n g w i t h 7 . . , P x N P; 8 P x R = 0 ( becomes a quee n ) , P x R 0. At th i s po i nt, mate r i a l is eve n , but not for long ( 9 Q x 0) . As often happe n s , the first p l ayer to fi n i s h h i s series of captures ends u p with the advantage . B l ack can a l s o m a ke a d ifferent capture, 7 . , B x B , but afte r 8 PxR 0, White is far ahead because of the d iffe rent values i nvolved . W ith the understa n d i n g that White 's K N P is th reate n i n g to cap off its a l ready destructive career with 8 P x R 0, B l ack's most obvious move is 7 . . , B x P ( a recaptu re) . Th i s puts an end to the exchange s er i es , which ofte n resu l ts i n the second pl ayer e n d i n g u p beh i n d . Wh ite wou l d then p l ay 8 NP x P and be a pawn ahead , except for the deta i l of his loose b i shop. H e solves th i s by making an i n-between move (known by the German zwischenzug) 8 B x B ch, N x B; 9 N P x P , with a pawn ahead . The zwischenzug a l l ows a p l aye r to change an important aspect of the pos ition before procee d i n g with his des i red move . The correct move for B l ac k , as p l ayed by Sherwi n , is to captu re in a d ifferent way before recaptu r i n g , namely by 7 . . , P x OP c h . The check must be respected , whereupon Black can safe ly end the exchange series with even mate ri a l : 8 Q x P , B x P ; 9 B-'-03 . . = . . = = . . Exchange Series / 1 98 In the last position, the right move (7 . . . , P x QP ch ) should be clear to you, though some of the general principles may be hard to under­ stand. As another illustration, here is a hypothetical position. Decide what to do for White to move and for Black to move. Exchange Series / 1 99 Answer As noted earl i e r , the fi rst p l ayer in an exchange series often ends up with the advantage, which is the case here . Whoever moves w i n s at l east a p i ece for a pawn , start i n g with 1 P x N o r 1 . . . , P x N. With White to play, the fu l l sequence goes 1 P x N , P x N ? ; 2 P x B, P x B ? ; 3 P x R = 0 c h , K-02 ; 4 Q x N P , with White ahead b y a queen and rook just for b e i n g one move ahead . B l ack should cut his l osses to a knight for a pawn by (after 1 P x N J 1 . . . , B x P , but White shou l d sti l l win eas i ly . Once the series of captu res beg i n s , it i s diffi c u l t for the second p l ayer to break the series without rema i n i n g beh i n d i n materi a l , as i s the case h e re . N ote that each time the first p l ayer (White i n th i s exa m p l e ) captu res , he g o e s a h e a d i n mate r i a l ; e a c h time t h e s e c o n d p l ayer cap­ ture s , he catches u p i n mate ri a l . With B l ack t o move , B l ack i s the first p l ayer i n the series a n d comes out ahead i n the same manner (1 . . . , P x N; 2 P x N ? . P x B; 3 P x B ? , P x R = 0 ch ; etc . ) . Now see i f you can figure out what t o d o i n this position for each side to move. Exchange Series / 200 Answer \ The position is from G . Thomas-Bog o l j u bow , N otti ngham 1 93 6 , and B l ack on m ove p l ayed 1 7 . . . , N-N S , avo i d i ng the exchang e series . The fi rst p l ayer often comes out ahead in exchange series , but many ti mes he does not, for reasons such as the fo l l owi ng : ( a) The second p l ayer can m a ke a capture with a check or some oth e r s e r i o u s th reat and t h e n end t h e series without d i sadvantag e. ( b ) T h e se c o n d p l ayer can take m o r e p i eces ( i n quantity or q u a l ity) than can the first p l ayer . (c) The whol e series o f captures can be r u n through t o an e q u a l and (to the second p l ayer) harmless end . ( d ) The second p l aye r can break the series (as by recaptu ri ng or by m ov i n g the threatened p i ece away) with a s uffici ent threat to rega i n h i s materi a l . H e re w e have a n examp l e o f ( a ) with ( c ) i nvolved a s we l l . I f 1 7 . . . , P x N ; 1 8 P x N , P x B ; 1 9 P x B , P x R = O ; 2 0 P x R = Q ch (the check forces B l ack to recaptu re and end the series ) , R x O; 2 1 R x 0, with even mate r i a l . With White to m ove , the same check a l l ows W h i te to end the series a rook ::: � ead : 18 P x N , P x N ? ; 19 P x B , P x B ? ; 20 P x R = Q ch, R x O ; 21 Q x O P . B l ac k wou l d do bette r to d rop out r i g ht away : 1 8 P x N , B x P ; 1 9 N-K4 , with a pawn for W h i te 's extra k n i g ht. Exch.:!nge Series / 201 practice, you should think your way through each move in the ex­ change series, keeping alert for possible ways in which either you or your opponent can break out of the series. It may help for you to think through the full series of captures first and then to go back over the sequence, looking for possible variations. Try this method with the position below, for White to move and for Black to move. In Exchange Series / 202 Answer Th i s pos ition arose i n the game Leve nfisch-Botv i n n i k , M oscow 1 93 6 , w i t h W h i te t o move . F i rst c o n s i d e r t h e fu l l series : 1 2 P x N , P x N ; 1 3 P x B , P x P ; 1 4 P x R = O c h , K x O ; 1 5 R-O N 1 , and W h i te i s far ahead . Poss i b l e va r i ations : 1 2 P x N, B x BP; B l ack stops the series with a pawn for the k n i ght, but h i s pawn at 05 i s attac k i n g two p i eces , so B l ac k gets h is p i ece back with the bette r game bes i d e s . Th i s suggests that Wh i te shou l d stop the exchanges before they sta rt by tak i n g B l ack's O P . Fo rtu nate l y for White, th i s pawn i s attacked three times and de­ fended o n l y twi c e . W h i te chose to p l ay 1 2 N x P , but Botv i n n i k retri eved the pawn by 1 2 . . . , N x N ; 1 3 B x N, N x P, exp l o i t i n g the overwo rked cond ition of Wh ite 's queen (if 14 B x N, B x B; 15 Q x B , Q x B J . With B l ack t o move, the fu l l series i s i n Wh ite 's favor because Wh ite gets more va l u a b l e p i eces a l o n g the way and ends with check: 1 2 . . . , P x N ; 1 3 P x N , P x P; 1 4 P x B, P x R = O; 1 5 P x R = Q ch, K x O; 1 6 0 x 0 . Poss i b l e var i ati ons : 1 2 . . . , P x N ; 1 3 P x N , B x B P , recaptu r i n g t o stop t h e s e r i es a n d l eaving White u n a b l e t o recapture safe l y s i nce 1 4 P x P, B x P ch w i n s the exchange for B l a c k , but the a lte rnative 14 0-0 , P x P i s a l m ost as bad . Exchange series can involve pieces other than pawns doing the capturing. Here is a simple example for you to analyze, for White to move and for Black to move. Exchange Series / 203 Answer Th i s position i s from the Tarrasch trap in the Ruy Lopez Opening, with White to move at th i s p o i n t . Wh ite wins as the first p l ayer i n an exchange series i nvolving the k n i g hts : 12 N x B , N x N; 13 N x B c h , K-R 1 ; 14 P x N , KR-K 1 ; 1 5 B-R 3 , and White keeps two extra p i eces . Bette r for B l a c k i s 1 2 N x B , P x N ; 1 3 N x N , with an extra knight for W h i te . But Wh ite must avo i d 1 2 N x N ? , B x N ; 13 R x B ? ? , R-08 ch, w i n n i n g a p i ece o n l y _ to be m ated b y B l ack's rook. B l ac k to p l ay can m a i nta i n mate r i a l equa l i ty by 12 . . . , N x N, with a m o re comfo rta b l e game after either 1 3 P x N , B-B3 ; 1 4 B-B4 , B-R5 o r 1 3 N x B , P x N ; 1 4 P x N , B-B3 . The position below involves some more complicated variations than those in the last one, but you should be able to think them out. Decide what to do for White to move and for Black to move. Exchange Series / 204 Answer Wh i te to m ove i s a p i ece beh i n d but can capture either of B l ack's k n i g hts . He can start an exchange s e r i es w i th h i s pawn and B l ack's k n i g h t by 1 9 P x N , N x N ; 20 P x B . N ow if 20 . , N x R ; 2 1 P x R = 0 c h , R x O ; 2 2 B x R , 0 x B ; 2 3 R x N , and W h i te has a n extra roo k . But B l ac k can do much better by trad i n g his rook w i th check before i t i s captu red : 20 . . , R x R ch ; 2 1 R x R , N x R ; 22 0 x N , B-04 , and B l ac k is the exchange ahead and c a n deal with W h i te 's tro u b lesome pawn by . . . , R-K1 ; . . . , P-B3 , etc . S i nce the exchange s e r i es does n 't work out, W h i te s h o u l d c o n s i d e r t h e oth e r captu re . I n the game V i d m ar-F i n e , Nott i n g h a m 1 93 6 , Wh i te p l ayed 1 9 R x N , R x R ; 20 N x R , N-04 , l e ad i n g to a d raw. N ote that Wh ite s h o u l d not try 20 P x N ? because of 20 . . , R x N ; 21 P x B , 0 x B , a n d W h i te can res i g n . B l a c k t o m ove starts a p i ece ahead a n d h a s va rious ways t o come out on top . One i s 19 . . . , N x N ; 20 R x R ch, R x R ; 2 1 P x N, P x P; 22 B-R 4 , N-06. Another i s 1 9 . . . , B x N ; 20 P x B , N x KP. Y o u s h o u l d be a b l e to work out these variations in m o re deta i l if you care to. . . . . Exchange Series / 205 As mentioned earlier, exchange series often involve the maneuvers known as the zwischenzug ( in-between move ) and the desperado. For example, in the previous position, after 1 9 P x N, N x N; 20 P x B, Black's move 20 , R x R ch can be considered a zwischenzug. In the same position, the rook can be considered a desperado, and so can Black's knight at Q6 in the original position. A desperado is a piece that is going to be captured and is moved to inflict as much damage as possible beforehand. Here is a very simple position illustrating a desperado . What should Black to move do? . . . Exchange Series / 206 A qswer T h i s s ituation faced Fischer ( B l ack) in the fi rst game of h i s World Champions h i p M atch 1 972 with Spassky. B l ack's b i s hop i s cornered and about to be captu red . I nstead of subm itting meekly, B l ac k should use the b i s hop as a desperado by 34 . B x P , which Fischer d i d . Of course Wh ite sti l l gets the b i s h o p (35 K x B), but the d iffe rence i s that B l ac k t h e n has two pawns f o r it i nstead of o n e , m a k i n g it much h a r d e r for White to conve rt h i s mate r i a l advantage i nto a w i n . Spassky did in fact manage to w i n , but not before Fischer m i ssed a d rawi n g l i ne . . .. In the position below, from Fischer-Mednis, U.S. Open 1 957, Black, hoping to win a pawn, has started a combination and has just played 1 6 . . , B ( QN2 ) x B (KN7 ) . How should White respond? . Exchange Series / 207 Answer If White meekly p l ays 1 7 K x B, he wi l l rema i n a pawn b e h i n d afte r 1 7 . . . , B x N . Before h i s k n i g ht is taken off, he shou l d see what damage h is k n i g ht can do as a desperado. Fischer p l ayed 17 N x B P , O-B3 ; 1 8 N x B , B-R6 (th reate n i n g mate by . . . , O-N7) ; 1 9 P-KB3 ( b l oc k i n g the th reat) . K x N, with even mate r i a l . Anothe r way wou l d be 1 7 N x N P , B-R 6 ; 1 8 N x N c h , R x N . I n e ither l i n e , if B l ack captu res t h e despe rado kn i g ht d i rectly, then White p l ays 1 8 K x B . Note , b y the way, that the desperado tacti c works fo r White i n part because B l ack's l i g ht-squared b i shop cannot itse l f be an effective des­ pe rad o . Had White moved his O R to K 1 i n stead of h i s KR (so that Wh ite 's rooks wou l d be on K 1 and KB 1 ) , then 1 7 N x BP wou l d have fa i l ed to 1 7 . . . , B x R ; 1 8 N x B, B-R6 ; etc . Now that you are more familiar with the desperado, let's examine some more examples of the use of the zwischenzug. In the position below, White faces the very serious threat of 3 1 . , P x P mate or 3 1 , B x NP mate. The only reasonable defense seems to be to interpose the bishop, but 3 1 B-Q4 allows 3 1 . , R x R. How does White save himself? . . . . . . . Exchange Series / 208 Answer If White ma kes the des i red move ( B-04 ) , he leaves h i s rook in the l u rc h . O n e poss i b i l ity, o f course, i s t o look f o r anothe r move . Another i s t o do someth i ng about the rook before p l ay i n g B-04- i n other word s , to try a zwischenzug with th e rook . With mate i mpend i n g , o n l y a check w i l l ga i n the needed t i m e . S u re enough, there i s a chec k : 3 1 R x R c h . Afte r B l ack recaptu res , 3 1 . . . , R x R , White can safe l y p l ay 32 B-04 , stop p i n g B l ack 's threat, as p l ayed by me vs . Dubeck, Team M atch 1 959 . Here White to play is two pawns behind, but after 45 R x R, K x R; 46 B x P, he gets one pawn back and will be able to draw the ending with opposite-colored bishops ( in such a situation, each side's bishop controls squares of a different color ) . Is this two-move sequence White's road to salvation? If not, why not? Exchange Series / 209 Answer When one s i d e captu res, it i s n atu ral and usua l l y correct for the other side to captu re back. Someti mes it i s desirable to i nterpose a move before recaptu r i n g , and th i s i s one of those t i m e s . I f 45 R x R, B l ac k s ho u l d make t h e zwischenzug 45 . . . , P-R6 ch before recaptu r i n g . N at­ ura l l y White must respect the check and move h i s k i n g , l eavi ng B l ac k t i m e for 46 . . . , K x R . T h e po i nt o f t h e d e l ay i n recaptu r i n g i s that B l ack's ORP i s moved forward to a safe square i n the meanti m e . B l ack thus reta i n s his two extra pawn s . I n the game M i n i c-F ischer, Skopje 1 96 7 , White p l ayed 46 B-B4 i nstead but cou l d n 't save t h e g am e. N o r does 46 R-B6 ch h e l p , because after 46 . . . , K-N2 ; 47 R x P , Black p l ays 47 . . . , B-05 ch ; 48 K-B 2 , P x B ch . This position, from Fine-G. Thomas, Nottingham 1 936, is an example of the use of a zwischenzug to gain material. How does White to move win a pawn? Exchange Series / 210 Answer White won the pawn by 24 P x P , B x B; 25 P x P ch (the zw i schenzu g ) , 0 x P ; 26 K x B , a typ ical use of a zwischenzug with a d i scovery captu re . B l ac k wou l d do bette r to rep l y (to 24 P x P) 24 . . . , P x P, to which White has a s i m p l e " overwor k" exp l o i tation to w i n the pawn : 25 B x B , 0 x B ; 2 6 R x P . The tro u b l e i s that B l ack then gets suffi c i ent counte r p l ay to hold the game by conti n u i n g 26 . . . , R-B 7 ; e . g . , 27 0-05, 0 x O ; 28 R x 0 , R x O R P ; 29 R ( 6 ) x P , R x R ; 30 R x R , R-O N 7 . More prom i s i ng f o r White is 25 R x P, 0 x R ; 26 B x B, O-K2 ( B l ack must g ive back the exchange because of the th reat of 27 B-05) ; 27 B x R, R x B; 28 0-0 2 , but W h ite sti l l wou l d have d iffic u l ty converting h i s extra pawn i nto victo ry. Even i n the actu a l game, B l ac k was a b l e to d raw in 60 move s , a lthoug h White missed some prom i s i ng l i nes . H oweve r , afte r 24 P x P, P x P, W h i te has a less d i rect and stronger con­ tinuati o n , namely 25 B-R 3 ! (th i s can be p l ayed on move 24 with the same effect) . B l a c k wou l d then be h e l p less to defend his KP, for i f 25 . . . , B-04 ? ? ; 26 0 x B , or if 25 . . . , P-K4 ? ; 26 B x R , P x O ; 27 H x 0. The coun­ terplay attempt 25 . . . , R-B7 can be met by 26 B x P ch, K-R 1 ; 27 R-02 , O-O B 2 ; 28 B-B 5 . In the position below, White has just played 22 B ( QNS ) x N ( QB6 ) . How should Black reply? ��­ A . Exchange Series / 21 1 Answer If B l ac k recaptu res d i rectly , 22 . . . , P x B, then White reg a i n s h i s pawn by 23 0 x BP. I n stead , B l ack has a n effective zwischenzug by 22 . . . , N-B 6 , chas i n g the queen away before recaptu r i n g , as p l ayed by Spassky i n the fou rteenth game of the 1 972 World Champions h i p M atch agai nst F i scher. As you can see , not a l l zwi schenzugs are checks . The game conti nued 23 O-N4 , Q x O; 24 P x 0 , P x B , and B l ack h e l d o n to his extra pawn ( not now 25 R-B 1 ? because of 25 . . . , N-K7 ch) . In this position, from Calvo-Gheorghiu, Las Palmas 1973, White has won Black's queen by a combination ( last move : 17 R ( Q l ) x Q ( Q 8 ) ) . Black still gets enough material for the queen that he need not feel embarrassed about not resigning yet. How should Black continue? · Exchange Series / 212 Answer B l ack shou l d p l ay 1 7 . . , B x R, retreati ng his b i shop from attack and captu r i n g the rook at the same t i m e . Eve n so, after 1 8 P x P , Wh ite has a queen and pawn fo r rook and b i s h o p , a w i n n i n g advantage . In the g a m e , B l ac k tried the zwischenzug 1 7 , B x P ch, expect i n g 18 K-N 1 , KR x 0, with approx i mate mate r i a l equal ity and exce l l e nt activity for B l ack's p i eces . Wh ite c rossed up th i s p l a n by p l ay i n g 1 8 R-0 2, OR-0 1 ; 1 9 R-K3 , and B l ac k got o n l y a rook and pawn for the l ost queen . B l ac k fai l ed t o s e e that t h e doomed rook c o u l d c o m e b a c k t o i n terfere with his zwischenzu g . . . . . The remaining positions .in this chapter will give you a chance t o apply what you have been learning about exchange series. To make this next position easier, I'll tell you that it is Black's move and call your attention to the possibility of 1 8 , N x B. Now choose a move for Black. . . . Exchange Series / 213 Answer You may have seen that i f 18 . . . , N x B; 19 B x B ? , N (4 ) x B, recaptu r i n g w i t h t h e th reatened knight and w i n n i n g a p i e c e . B u t White p l ays i n stead (after 1 8 . . . , N x B l 19 P x N, and it i s B l a c k who i s in trou b l e . If B l a c k moves h i s th reatened knight away , h i s b i shop wi l l be l eft u n p rotected to 20 B x B. This leaves a short exch a nge series , 1 9 . . . , B x B ; 20 P x N , B x B P ; 2 1 N x B , with White a p i ece ahead . I n the game Fischer-Ka l m e , U .S . Champ i o n s h i p 1 960-1 961 , B l a c k p l ayed 1 8 . . . , 0-0 1 . T hi s p rotects the b i shop from beh i n d , a l lowing 1 9 . . . , N x B ; 20 P x N , B x B; 21 P x N , B x P ; 2 2 N x B , 0 x N , with B l ac k a pawn ahead . Fischer p l ayed 1 9 O-R4 , a g a i n chang i n g t h e outcome o f t h e exchange s e r i es because t h e queen covers OB6. N ow 19 . . . , N x B ; 20 P x N, B x B; 2 1 P x N, B-B 1 ; 22 N x B , 0 x N ; 2 3 0 x P , and White i s a pawn ahead . The game, which so far went 1 8 . . . , 0-0 1 ; 1 9 O-R4 , cont i n ued 1 9 . . . , O-R 1 ; 20 0 x 0, R x 0, l ead i n g to a draw. From now on, you'll have to figure things out for White to move and for Black to move, starting with the position below. Exchange Series I 214 Answer Both queens a re under attack, but White to p l ay w i ns mate r i a l by 1 8 P x 0, N x O; 1 9 K x N, o r even by 1 8 B x N . I t was B l ac k to m ove i n the twe lfth game o f the 1 95 1 World Champi on­ s h i p M atch betwee n B ronste i n and Botv i n n i k . I t woul d be poss i b l e for B l ack to p l ay 1 7 . . . , N x O; 18 R x Q, N-K6 ; etc ., and even bette r to p l ay 1 7 . . , Q x OBP, estab l i s h i n g p rotection for the kni ght at O N S , s aving t h e q u e e n , and w i n n i n g a pawn . B e s t i s Botv i n n i k's move , 1 7 . . . , N x P ch ; 1 8 K-N 1 (force d ) , N x B ch (a second zw ischenzug ) ; 1 9 Q x N , Q x O B P , a n d B lack has two extra pawn s . . What would you do for White to move and for Black to move in this position? Exchange Series I 215 Answer Bl ack to p l ay w i n s queen fo r rook by 39 . . . , R x 0 . Wh ite t o p l ay must b e concerned about h i s queen , but queen moves accompl i sh l ittl e . Before settl i n g for someth i n g l i ke 39 O-R4, O-K3 , White shou l d i nvestigate poss i b i l ities a r i s i n g (a) from mov i n g the k n i g ht to d i s cove r a n attack by h i s b i shop on B l ack's rook and (b) from poss i b l e knight forks . O n e i d e a is 3 9 N-K7 c h (a real w i n n e r if B l ack cou l d n 't captu re) . R x N ; 40 B x R , P x B ; 4 1 0 x P. T h i s l i ne g ives up B + N fo r R + P, not wo rth getting exc ited about, espec i a l l y s i nce B l ac k can de­ fend h i s pawns by 41 . . . , R-K3 ; 42 0-B S , B-B S , with the better game. The correct move was p l ayed by F l o h r agai nst Capab l an c a, Nottingham 1 93 6 : 39 N-06. Th i s m ove d i scovers the b i shop 's attack o n B l ack's rook and a l s o attacks B l ack's queen . I f B l ack moves his quee n , 40 B x R g ives White the excha n g e . Capablanca p l ayed 39 . . . , R x O; 40 N x 0, R x NP ch ( a desperado move) ; 4 1 K x R , R x N ; 42 B-R2 ( not 42 R x P ? , B-N 2 , p i n­ n i n g ) . and F l o h r won . Capab lanca p refe rred g i v i n g up the exchange to 40 . . . , R-N4 because of 4 1 N x P, R-K4 (otherwise 42 P-B4 , c l o s i n g the rook out of the game) ; 42 N x R P , and B l ack's game i s in s h a m b l es . Now decide what to do here, for each side to move. Exchange Series / 216 Answer Th i s t i m e White to p l ay w i n s a q u e e n , 1 7 B x 0, so we can concentrate on what to do for B l ac k to move . S i nce B l ack's knight is l oose , mov i n g the queen away loses a p i ece ( 1 6 . . . , O-B3 ; 1 7 R x N ) . But the menac i n g b i shop i s loose too , so B lac k c a n p l ay 1 6 . . . , 0 x B; 17 R x N , which i s w h a t happened i n t he g am e Reshevsky-Euwe , World Championsh i p Tournament 1 948. The a l terna­ tive 1 6 . . . , N (4)-N3 a l s o m a i nta i n s equa l mate r i a l but l e aves B l ac k much m o r e tied u p t ha n d o e s Euwe 's move . A l l th i s has l ittle t o do w i th the top i c of th i s chapter, but i f you were a d i l i gent student you noti ced the desperado try 1 6 . . . , N x P . If, then , 1 7 B x 0 , N x O; 1 8 B-K7, R-K 1 , and the knight comes back to 05 with a pawn ahead for B l a c k . B l ac k a l s o s e e m s t o win a p a w n after 1 7 P x N , 0 x B . H oweve r , White continues 1 8 N-N S , threate n i n g the KBP as we l l as 1 9 0 x P mate . White then reg a i n s h i s pawn ( 1 9 . . . , P-K N 3 ; 20 N x BP, but not 1 9 . . . , N-B3 ? ? ; 2 0 R x N ) with the better game. Here is one more for you to figure out-for White and for Black. Exchange Series I 217 Answer Th i s position arose in the game Petro s i an-Fischer, U S S R vs . Wo r l d M atch 1 9 70 ( s e c o n d game) , with B l ack t o p l a y . Fischer p l ayed 1 9 . . . , N-04 , decl i n i ng to enter i nto the exchange s e r i es set i n motion by 1 9 . . . , B x N . S i nce White cannot recapture the b i s h o p , he must seek his chan ces with 20 R x N, with these va r i ations : (a) R etreat : 20 . . . , O-K 1 ; 2 1 R x N , B x O (or 2 1 . . . , O x R ; 22 O x B ) ; 22 R x 0 , K R x R ; 23 R x B , w i n n i n g two m i no r p i eces for a roo k . ( b) A d iffe rent retreat: 20 . . . , 0-0 1 ; 2 1 0 x B , 0 x B ; 22 R-0 1 , O-N4 ; 23 R-07, th rottl i n g B l ack. (c) Conti n u e captu r i n g : 20 . . . , B x O ; 2 1 R x 0 , but now B l a c k has two l oose p i eces and w i l l lose one of th e m . ( d ) Vary i n captu ri n g : 20 . . . , 0 x R ; 2 1 B x 0 , B x O ; 2 2 B x R , R x B ; 23 R x B , N-B 3 , with a mate r i a l l y eve n e ndgame that seems s l i ghtly i n B l ack's favor . · Fischer chose to keep the game com p l i cated ( 1 9 . . . , N-04 ; 20 N-N 2 , B-N4 ) a n d eventu a l l y w o n i n 66 move s . Exchange Series / 2 1 8 CHAPTER Q u een ing Combination s The usual way to get ahead in material is to capture your opponent's pieces, so that you have more in number or value. Another way is to reach the eighth rank with a pawn and promote it to a queen, thereby adding about eight points to the numerical value of your own forces. (You may choose to promote your pawn to a rook, bishop, or knight rather than to a queen ; except in very special circumstances, however, you should take a new queen. ) Pawn promotion is the dominant theme in endgames, for it allows a small advantage to be turned into one large enough to force mate. Once a p awn gets close to the eighth rank, it becomes very dangerous and bears careful watching by the opponent, who will try to block its progress or liquidate it. Nevertheless, you may be able to force the pawn through and either gain a new queen or compel your opponent to give up material in order to stop the pawn. The position below provides a simple example. Decide what to do for White to exploit his dangerous pawn. Also, see if you can find a ·way for Black to move to stop it. Queening Combinations / 219 Answer I n the game Fischer-Ad d i s o n , U .S . Cham p i onsh i p 1 962-1 963 , F i scher s i mp l y pushed h i s R P , w i n n i ng a p iece and soon afte r the game : 43 P-R 7 , B x R P ; 4 4 R x B . Because White's rook contro l s K R 7 and h i s b i shop contro l s K R 8 , pus h i n g the pawn l eaves B l ac k the choice of (a) lett i n g t h e pawn promote t o a queen , ( b ) g i v i n g u p the rook b y 4 4 P-R8 = 0 , R x O ; 45 B x R , o r (c) g i v i n g u p t h e b i shop (th e l east evi l ) as p l ayed i n t h e g a m e . T h e r i ght move shou l d be easy t o f i n d o n c e y o u appreci ate the i m portance of gett i n g an advanced pawn a l l the way to the e i g hth rank and promoti ng it. Underesti mation or d i s regard of th i s opportun ity wou l d l ead t o t h e m i staken 4 3 R x P , w i n n i n g a pawn b u t g i v i n g B l ac k a chance to res i st fiercely ( e . g . , 43 . . . , R-0 7 ; 44 B-B 7 , R x P ch; 45 K-B 1 , R-O B 7 ; etc . ) . Even with B l ac k t o move , there i s no way f o r B l ac k t o stop t h e pawn w i thout g i v i n g u p mate r i a l . One try i s 43 . . . , R-07, w h i c h White sti l l can answer by 44 P-R 7 , d i s regard i n g the th reat s i nce 44 . . . , R x P c h ? ; 45 K-B 1 , B x P ; 4 6 K x R y i e l d s White a rook i nstead of o n l y a b i shop for his advanced pawn . By the way , i f 43 . . . , R-0 7 ; 44 R-KN 7 , R-0 1 ! ; 45 P-N4 ? (correct is 45 R-K7 , R-0 7 ; 46 P-R 7 , retu r n i n g to the sequence above) , R-KR 1 , and B l ack can b l ockade the pawns. Here is a similar position. Decide what to do for White to move and for Black to move. Queening Combinations / 220 Answer In th i s pos ition, as in the l ast one, White has a dangerous pawn on the s i xth rank and contro l s the queen i n g square (OBS) with h i s b i s h o p . The d iffe rence is that he does n 't control the square right in front of the pawn . The l o g i c a l move is 34 R-07, as p l ayed by Botv i n n i k agai nst Tyl o r at N ottingham 1 93 6 . We w i l l con s i d e r i n the next pos ition how th i s move is fol l owed up, for the proper continuation agai nst the best defense is i nstructive and one you may not have p l a n n e d . You d i d fi ne i f you s e l ected 34 R-07 on general p r i n c i p l e s , such as taking control of squares i n front of th e advanced pawn . B l ack to move s h o u l d try to b l ock the pawn 's p rogress , which he can do by 34 . . . . R-0 1 . I f 35 R x R, B x R, and Wh ite can make no fu rther progress because the b i shops control different squares (opposite-colored bishops) . Or if 35 R-K 1 , K-B 1 p revents 36 R-K7 . In the game, Black answered 34 R-Q7 with . . , R-Q l , producing the position below. What would you do now for White? . Queening Combinations / 221 A nswer Had B l ac k p l ayed someth i n g l i ke 34 . . . , K-N2 ( i nstead of 34 . . . , R-0 1 ) , Wh ite cou l d have proceeded with 3 5 P-B7 , B x P ; 3 6 R x B . Now, however , B l ack threatens t o exchange rooks , and 3 5 P-B7 leaves the rook loose. N eve rth e l ess , 35 P-B7 is the ri ght move , for getting a new queen is more va l u a b l e than losing a rook (35 . . . , R x R; 36 P-B8 = 0 c h , R-0 1 ; 37 O-N4 c h , etc . ) . I n the g a m e , B l ack p l ayed 35 . . . , B x P and res i g ned after 36 R x B. N ote that 35 R-K7 wou l d be wrong because of 35 . . . , K-B 1 , chas i n g the rook off the seventh rank ( i f then 36 P-B7 , K x R ; 3 7 P x R = 0 c h , B x 0 , and B l ack i s a pawn ahead though u n ab l e to wi n ) . A s Botv i n n i k demonstrated here, i t is ofte n i m portant and . even neces­ sary to g ive up mate r i a l for the g reater g a i n of queen i n g a paw n . The next two positions will give you a chance to apply the principles covered so far in this chapter. What should White to move do in the position below? Queening Combinations / 222 Answer White has an advanced pawn , but it i s under attack. N e ither 42 R-N 7 , P-83 , nor 42 R x P , R x P a r e worth getting exc ited ove r, espec i a l l y with an easy w i n ava i l a b l e . White was th e g reat Capab l a n c a , p l ay i n g agai nst a group of consu lting p l ayers as part of a s i m u ltaneous exh i b ition ( Capa­ b l anca p l ay i n g many games at one time) , London 1 92 0 , and he poli shed them off with 42 R-N 6 ch . Th i s g i ves B l ack the c h o i ce of 42 . . . , R x R ; 43 P-R B = Q , o r 4 2 . . . , K-02 ; 43 R x R (and next 44 P-RB = Q ) . Before proceeding, consider these three variations o n the original posi­ tion. In each one, White can use his rook and advanced pawn to win quickly. How? (a) (b) (c ) Queening Combinations / 223 Answer fa) Wh ite g a i n s contro l of the queen i n g square without loss of time by 1 R-N8 ch , K-02 ; 2 P-R8 = 0 . (b) T h e s i m p l e way i s t o control the OR fi l.e by 1 R-R4, l eavi ng Bl ac k no defense. ( I n general , rooks are b e s t p l aced behin d an advanced paw n , not a l ongside o r in front of it.) 1 R-N7 wou l d sti l l w i n , b u t o n l y after m a n y more moves . (c) 1 R-N7 ch forces a pos ition either l ike that i n the ori g i na l pos ition p l ayed by Capab l anca or in position Ca) above . If 1 . . . ,. K-03 ; 2 R-N6 c h , R x R ; 3 P-R8 = 0 . Or if 1 . . . , K-0 1 ; 2 R-N8 c h , K-B2 ; 3 P-RB = 0, R x O ; 4 R x R . Here, belatedly, i s the second position. How should White proceed? . Queening Combinations / 224 Answer I gave you th i s position at th i s point because it conta i n s the poss i b i l ities both of push i n g an advanced pawn to g a i n mate r i a l and of making a sacrifice i n order to queen the advanced pawn . You no doubt saw and perhaps chose the obvious 36 P-R 7 . B l ac k , to be sure, m u st g ive u p h i s b i.shop , b u t afte r 36 . . . , B x R P ; 37 B x B , K-K6, White h a s t o p l ay care­ fu l l y to w i n (38 K-K 1 , P-R4 ; 39 K-B 1 , P-N5 ; 40 K-N 2 ) . In the game Fischer-Euwe , Fou rteenth Olympiad 1 96 0 , Fischer p l ayed the much better 36 B-K5 . Th i s pins B l ack's b i shop to h i s king, so that the b i shop may not bl-0ckade the pawn by 36 . . . , B-R2 , which wou l d be a good move i<f it weren 't i l l egal. Of course , the wh ite b i shop is u n protecte d , but its captu re a l l ows the white pawn to queen (36 . . . , B x B; 3 7 P-R 7 and 38 P-R8 = 0 ) , after which Wh ite w i n s e as i l y . So Euwe res i g n e d . In this last position it was easy to judge that neither Black's king nor his bishop could catch White's pawn. When the question is whether a king can stop a passed pawn (that is, any pawn not blocked by an opposing pawn in its remaining path to the eighth rank ) , there is a simple rule to use instead of counting out moves. Draw a diagonal line from the passed pawn to the eighth rank; then complete a mental square as shown below. If the king can get into this square, it can stop the pawn. If it cannot get into the square, the pawn can queen. To test your understanding of this rule, decide whether the pawn can queen with White to move, and also with Black to move. Queening Combinations / 225 Answer W i th White to move , the b l ac k king can 't get i nto the square, so the pawn queens. Each time it moves forward , the magic square keeps movi ng too , just out of reach of the b l ac k k i n g . U s i n g the square , you don 't need to count out the move s , but here they are : 1 P-N S , K-B S ; 2 P-N6 , K-04 ; 3 P-N 7 , K-K3 ; 4 P-NB = 0 c h . W i th B l ack t o move , t h e k i n g steps i nto the squar e and catches the pawn (1 . . , K-BS ; 2 P-N S , K-04 ; 3 P-N 6 , K-K3 ; 4 P- N 7 , K-B2 ; 5 P-NB = 0 c h , K x 0-whew ! ) . Here a re two other notes o n u s i n g the square method : d raw the di­ agonal and imagine the square on the s i d e toward the oppos i n g kin g ; also, for a passed pawn on the second ran k , d raw the square as if it were on the th i rd ran k , s i nce it can gain a step by mov i n g two squares on its first move . . In the position below, Black can force a quick win. To find it you'll have to think carefully and apply the magic-square rule with a sneaky twist. Can you do it? Quee11ing Combinations / 226 A nswer B l ack has a b i shop for two pawns but can scarce l y hope to make progress with 55 . . . , B-K 1 . Someth i n g more v i gorous is needed . I n the game Fischer-Pac h m a n , M a r del P l ata 1 959, B l ack p l ayed 55 . . . , R x P ch ; 56 R x R , B x R , whereupon Fischer res i gned . You shou l d al ways be a l e rt to s i m p l ifications of th i s sort and exa m i n e them to see if B l ack can queen a pawn ove r o n the queen side afte r 57 K x B , P-N 5 . At first s i ght, it may seem that W h i te can step i nto the m ag i c square of the O N P . Fu rther i n s pecti o n shows that if 5 8 K-K3 , B l ack pl ays n o t 5 8 . . . , P-N6 but 58 . . . , P x P, mov i n g the pawn ove r one fi l e where it is out of reach (59 K-02, P-R 7 ; 60 K-B2 , P-R8 = 0) . Wh ite's a l te rnative i s to capture the ONP by 58 P x P , but th i s l e aves B l ack with a passed ORP that the king can 't catch and c l oser to q u ee n i n g than White's new passed O N P ( 5 8 . . . , P-R 6 ; 59 P-N5 , P-R 7 ; 60 P-N 6 , P-R8 = 0 , and t h e q u e e n stops White's ONP before it, too , can queen ) . Also note that Wh ite 's passed KP can be stopped by B l ack's k i n g , which i s in th i s pawn 's magic square. This time, White to move can force a queen by a simple procedure we haven't discussed yet. You should be able to find it if you look. ; Queening Combinations / 227 Answer White i s th e proud possessor of a dangerous , passed O R P , but if he pushes it right away, B l ack can block it with h i s knight: 36 P-R 6 , N-B 1 . White can sti l l w i n by 37 N-08, N-R 2 ; 38 N x KBP c h , but it w i l l take a wh i l e . Before sett l i n g for th i s l i n e , cons i d e r that B l ack's kn i ght needs his OB1 square to b l ock the pawn . I f the k n i g ht i s stopped from getti ng there, it has no other way to b l o c k the passed pawn i n t i m e . With th i s reaso n i n g , t h e move 36 N-06 stands out, as p l ayed b y Tarrasch a g a i n st Voge l , Nuremburg 1 9 1 0 . N ow B l ack can 't stop the pawn , e i ther with h i s knight o r w i th h i s k i n g . B l ack tried 36 . . . , K-05, b u t res i gned when Tarrasch p l ayed 3 7 P-R6 . Here again, White t o move can force the queening of his pawn b y the same sort of procedure that was used in the last position ; this time, however, the play is more complicated. See if you can find how. Queening Combinations / 228 Answer Th is position occu rred in the game Foltys-G o lombek, London 1 947 . White has o n l y a k n i g ht and p a w n fo r a r o o k but has an am b i t io u s pawn on the seventh rank eager to queen . White p l ayed 42 R x R ( R8) . and B l ac k (show i n g confidence i n his opponent's a b i l ity) res igned . The reason i s that, afte r 42 . . . , R x R. White b l ocks out the remai n i n g rook by a dou b l e j u m p with h i s knight: 43 N-07 c h , K-K2 ; 44 N-N 8 , and the pawn queens on the next move (44 N-N 6 , R-R 1 ; 45 P-'-B8 = 0, R x O ; 4 6 N x P c h w i n s too , but takes much longer) . White cou l d a l s o reach the same position by the less fo rcefu l 42 N-B6 (threate n i n g 43 N-08) , R-08 1 ; 43 R x R ( R S ) , R x R ; 44 N-N 8 , but B l ack can p ro l o n g h i s res i st­ ance by 43 . .. R x P. The way chosen by Foltys is better because it l eaves B lack l ittle choice. . In the position below, decide what to do for Black to move, but be careful. Queening Combinations / 229 Answer B l ack can p l ay the obvious 56 . . . , P-B 7 ; 57 B x P , K x B, but sti l l has to work to wi n , because Wh ite's king goes afte r B l ack's pawn s . (A con­ ti nuati o n m i ght be 58 K-N4 , K-0 6 ; 59 K-B 5 , N-B5 ; 60 K-N 6 , K x P ; 6 1 K x P , N-K6 ; 6 2 K x P , N x P ; 6 3 K-N5 , N-B5 ; 64 P-R 6 , N-K3 ch ; 65 K-N 6 , K-B5 , and B l ack can stop White's pawn just i n t i m e and then queen his own .) H oweve r , there i s a much bette r move for B l ac k , based o n the fact that White's b i shop is the o n l y p i ece b l oc k i n g the passed pawn 's ad­ vance. Here the b i s h o p can 't be screened off, but it can be gotten rid of. Fischer agai nst Saidy, U .S . Cham p i o n s h i p 1 963-1 964 , p l ayed 56 . . . , N-K6 , and Wh ite res i g n ed . N ext comes 57 . . . , N-B4 , and the b i s h o p is d r iven away. Once the b i shop goes away-o r stands and d i es-B l a c k queens h i s pawn . ( B y w i n n i n g th i s g a m e , b y t h e way, F i scher compl eted h i s amaz i n g 1 1 -0 sweep of that yea r's championsh i p .) B l ack h a s another w i n n i n g method : 56 . . . , N-B5 ; 57 K-N4 ( i f 57 B x N , P-B 7 ) , N-03 , kee p i n g o u t White's k i n g and permitt i n g B l ack t o p l a y 58 . . . , P-B 7 ; 59. B x P , K x B without fear of counte rp l ay . Since queening or the threat to queen a pawn is worth so much, it can be combined with other threats, so that the opponent loses material one way or the other. Either your pawn queens or you win material through some other maneuver. Here is a simple example. Decide how White can gain material, and also how Black to move can stop White. Queening Combinations I 230 Answer Wh ite was Gapri ndashvi l i , women's wo r l d champ i o n , p l ay i n g agai nst Ku raj ica i n a recent tou rnament ( O l ot 1 973) . White has a pawn on the seventh rank ( " Chess Queen Th reate n i n g to Queen ? ? " ) , but the quee n i n g square is covered by B l ack's r o o k and q u e e n . Neverthe l e s s , White t o move queens with d i s covered chec k : 33 P-N8 = Q c h . T h i s not o n l y g a i n s a new queen , s i nce B l ack must respect the check rath e r than captu re the quee n , but a l s o happens to m ate B l ack (the king has nowhere to flee, so Black can only sacrifice his b i shop and queen to put the mate off for two moves ) . I n the gam'e , B l a c k p l ayed 3 2 . . . , Q-N 1 to b l oc k the pawn , but h e l ost the game anyway in 60 move s . In this position, from Fischer-Goldsmith, West Orange 1 957, White is well ahead in material but can finish Black off quickly. Can you see how? Also, what should Black to move do? Queening Combinations / 231 Answer Fischer p l ayed 44 P-B7, and B l ac k res i g ned . I f he takes the pawn , he l oses h i s rook to a k n i g ht fo r k : 44 , R x P; 45 N-KB c h , K-K2 ; 46 N x R . I f h e l e aves the pawn a l o n e , i t queens o n the next move . B l ack to p l ay can p revent the combi nati o n by 44 . . , K-K3 , which makes it pos s i b l e for him to struggl e o n for a wh i l e l on g e r . . . . . Here is another simple one. Decide what to do for White to move and for Black to move. Queening Combinations I 232 A nswer I was Wh ite in th is game agai nst Durki n , U .S . Amate u r 1 957, and p l ayed 38 Q x R, cau s i n g my opponent to res i g n . B l ack's rook on K 1 i s d o i n g dou b l e duty, p rotecting t h e oth er r o o k and g u a rd i ng the queen i n g square . Shou l d Bl a ck p l ay 38 . . . , R x 0 , then 39 P-R8 = Q ch res u r rects the queen , and after 39 . . . , O-N 1 , 40 R-N8 wins B l ack's q u ee n . If, instead , Black makes a move l i ke 38 . . . , R-KB 1 ; 39 R-N 8 , and Wh ite w i l l have two queens and two rooks agai nst one of each . But 38 R-N 8 ? i m m e d i ate l y l oses t o 38 . . . . Q x P . B l ac k t o move shou l d l i q u i date Wh ite's passed pawn by 38 . . . . Q x P and then exp l o i t h i s own passed pawn s . This one is a little more complicated , but you should be able to handle it. Decide what to do for each side to move. Queening Combinations / 233 Answer White wou l d be happy to capita l ize on h i s passed but vu l n erab l e OP before B l ack can corral it. Fischer d i d just th i s with two i nc i s ive moves against D o n n e l l y , M i lwaukee 1 95 7 . Fi rst, 31 N-B 6 , th reate n i n g 32 N-07 ch and a l s o keep i n g B l ack's k i n g away from the paw n . N ext, after B l ack rep l i ed 31 . . . , R-K3 came 32 R-0 1 . B l ack res i g n e d , for if 32 . . . , R x N ; 33 P-07, and the pawn q u e e n s . N atura l l y , 32 R-0 1 i s much bette r than gobb l i n g pawns by 32 N x P ch, K-N 2 ; 33 N x P , R x P . Note also that 32 P-07 i s premature because of 32 . . . , K-K2 ; 33 R-0 1 , K-0 1 ( but not 32 . . . , R-03 ; 33 R-K1 , K-N 2 ; 34 R-KB , K x N ; 35 P-08 .= 0 , R x O ; 36 R x R). B l ack to move must p l ay ca refu l l y to l i q u id ate the passed pawn . Cor­ rect is 3 1 . . . , R-04 ; 32 N-B 6 , R x P ; 33 N x P c h , K-N 2 ; 34 N x P, R-07, and White w i l l h ave to work h a rd to u n rave l his pos i t i o n and cash i n o n h i s two-pawn advantage . The remaining positions i n this chapter cover the various combinations involving queening a pawn or the threat to do so. What would you do for White to move and Black to move here? Queening Combinations I 234 A nswer White seems to be in tro u b l e because h i s advanced pawn is attacked twice and defended only once-and there seems to be n o way to defend it aga i n . A careless p l ayer wou l d keep the pawns eve n by 40 B x P, R x P, but there i s a much better move . Consider that i f White's b i shop were not i n the way, W h i te cou l d p l ay R-KS ch, w i n n i n g . The trou b l e w i th most bishop moves i s that B l ac k can take the OP ( e .g . , 40 B-B 6 , 0 x P) . One move p reve nts tbe pawn 's captu re , 40 B-B7 ! , as p l ayed by Di C a m m i l l o aga i nst the you ng F i s c h e r , Eastern Open 1 95 6 . B l ac k has n o way t o save h i ms e l f : if 40 . . . , R x B; 41 R-KS c h , K-R 2 ; 42 R x 0, etc . ; or i f the queen moves away , the pawn queens (40 . . ., 0 x B; 41 P-08 0 ch). Fischer tried a check t o s e e what wou l d happe n , 40 . . . , N-BS c h , and res i g n e d when Wh ite p l ayed 4 1 K-B 1 . If White rep l i e s 4 1 B x N ? , B l ack gets out by 4 1 . . . , R x P ; 42 O-K4 , P x B ; 43 0 x K B P . B l a c k t o p l ay stops a l l this b y 40 . . . , R x P fo l l owed b y 4 1 . . . , P-B3 (if 40 . . . , O x P ; 4 1 B x P) . = Decide what to do for White and for Black here. Queening Combinations / 235 Answer Th i s i s from E l i s kases-G runfe l d , Ostrau 1 933, with White to p l ay . Wh ite has two pawns on the seventh ra nk but no obvious way to capita l ize on th i s before the pawns are captu red . With B l ack to move , the game q u ickly fizz l e s i nto a d raw: 52 . . . , R x P ; 53 R x P , R x P . E l i s kases found t h e way fo r White , t h e key t o w h i c h i s that t h e K R P c a n be queened successfu l ly : 5 2 R x P, K x P ; 5 3 R-R B , and B l ac.k res i g n e d . N o matte r w h a t B l ack d o e s t o stop t h e OP, White exchanges roo ks , l eavi ng B l ac k 's k i n g too far away to catch the R P . If 53 . . . , R x P ; 5 4 R-R 7 c h , K-K3 ; 5 5 R x R , K x R ; 5 6 P-R 6 , etc . ( N ote that the k i n g i s outs i de the mag i c square . l Or if 5 3 . . . , K-K2 ; 5 4 P-08 = Q c h , R x O ; 5 5 R x R , K x R ; 5 6 P-R 6 , etc . O n move 52, i f 5 2 . . . , R x P ( i nstead of 52 . . . , K x Pl. the outcome i s the same : 53 R-RB ch, K x P; 54 R-R7 c h , K-K3 ; 55 R x R , K x R ; 56 P-R 6 , etc . Now see what you can do here for White to move and for Black to move. Queening Combinations / 236 Answer Though W h i te i s s l i ghtly behind i n m ate r i a l , he has a dangerous pawn at K7 ( i f he can do someth i n g with it quickly before it i s captured ) . and h i s b i shop i s p i n n in g B l ack's rook to the king. The obvious move i s 32 B x R ch and t h i s can be fo l l owed u p stro n g l y by 32 . . . , K x B ; 3 3 P-K5 , w i n n i n g a pawn . But White has a bette r move , a s p l ayed by Botv i n n i k agai nst Euwe i n the World Champions h i p Tou rnament 1 948 : 32 B-05, and Euwe res i gned . Not satisfied with p i nn i n g the rook to the king o n the ri ght, th i s bishop now h i ts at the kn i g ht and rook on the left, too . Afte r the obvious 32 . . . , R-O B 1 , White p l ays 33 B x N, maki n g u s e of th e p a s s e d pawn , s i nce 33 . . . , R x B ? ? a l l ows 34 P-K8 0 c h. Bette r fo r B l ac k i s 33 . . . , R x P , but afte r 34 B-05 c h , K-R 1 ; 35 B x RP, White has a n extra and passed p a w n and d o m i n ates t h e board w i t h hi s two b i shops. Agai nst a p l ayer of Botv i n n i k 's strength , it w as reasonab l e o f Euwe t o res i g n a n d spare h i ms e l f t h e agony o f res isti ng fo r a wh i l e . With B l ac k to move , th i ngs a re much d iffe rent, s i nce 3 2 . . . , N x P rids B lack of a b i g thorn i n h i s s i d e . White m i ght as we l l even up the mate r i a l by 33 B x R ch, K x B, and i f then 34 P-K4 , P-B4. . = In this last pos1t1on, from a world championship match, Black had sacrificed a piece to reach this position. How should he proceed? ( This takes a little thought, so worry only about Black to move. ) Queening Combinations / 237 Answer Th i s is from the s i xth game of th e Botv i n n i k-Ta l M atch 1 960 . Tai p l ayed 28 . . . , B-B S , which reg a i ned h i s p i ece afte r 29 N x P , R x R ; 30 N x R (4) , R x B c h , and eventu a l l y won the game. Ta i m i ssed a much better con­ tinuati o n , starti ng with 28 . . . , R x N. White shou l d recapture with 29 R (3) x R (if eit h e r 29 R ( 1 ) x R o r 29 B x R, B l ack wins r i g ht away with 29 . . . , R-08 [ch] ) . Then B l ack wins by 29 . . . , R-08 ( d i scove r i n g the th reat of . . . , B x R ) ; 30 R-B4 , B-N 7 , l eav i n g W h ite no answer to the th reat of 31 . . . , B x R. If 31 B-KB3, B x R ; 32 B x P , R x B ch ; 33 B-B 1 , B x P, and B l ack emerges two b i s hops ahead . Of course, if 3 1 R x R , P x R = 0 . You d i d we l l i f you found th i s l i n e ; i f you d i d n 't-neither d i d Ta i ! ( I n h i s book on t h e match , T a i exp l a i n s that the spectato rs had been making so much noise d u r i n g the game that the refe rees had shortly before moved the game to a c l osed roo m , upsetti ng his concen­ trat i o n . ) Queening Combinations / 238 C H APT E R Mate-Based Com binat ions As stated in Chapter I, opportunities to win material ( queens, rooks, bishops, knights, pawns ) are more common than opportunities to check­ mate ( win the king ) . Nevertheless, you should be able to identify a checkmate when the time comes . Here are several basic patterns for checkmate for you to figure out. If you are familiar with them, you will have a quick and easy review. If not, think them out-they're not hard. In each one, White moves and mates in . one or two moves. (a) (b) (c) (d) Mate-Based Combinations / 239 Answer ( a ) A s i mp l e back-ran k mate : 1 R-NB ch, R-B 1 ( putting off the end by one move) ; 2 R x R mate . ( b ) Wh ite uses both rooks to force the k i n g back and ad m i n i ster mate : 1 R-N 7 ch , K B 1 ; 2 R BB mate . (c) The queen backed up by the b i shop g i ves mate on the l o ng d i agonal by 1 0-RB mate . With th i s arrangement, O-N 7 i s often mate too , but here B lack can respond . . . , N x 0 . ( d ) Anothe r s i m p l e back-ra n k mate : 1 0- BB c h , R x O ; 2 R x R mate . White , of cours e , can afford to g ive up h i s queen-or anyth i n g e l s e , f o r that matter-to g e t B l ack's k i n g . - - I f you got the last ones, you will find the four below almost a s easy. If you didn't, try harder now. (e) (g) (h) Mate-Based Combinations / 240 Answer (e) Wh ite 's queen goes afte r the king along the seventh ran k : 1 Q x P c h , K-R 1 ; 2 Q x P m ate . (f) The pawn at KB6 provides the support fo r b r i n g i n g the queen u p and i n : 1 O-R 6 , (any move ) ; 2 O-N 7 m ate . Eve n though Wh ite 's fi rst m ove i s not a check, B l ac k has no way to avo i d the mate . ( g ) The kni ght g ives check and at the same t i m e supports the queen 's attack on the K A P , besides d r i v i n g the k i n g i nto a death trap : 1 N 86 c h , K-R 1 ; 2 Q x RP m ate . ( h ) You may have had trou b l e with this-it's a variant of the s mothered mate i l l ustrated at the beg i n n i n g of C hapte r 3, p. 33: 1 R-N 8 c h , R x R ; 2 N-87 m ate . - It would, of course, be possible to go into mating combinations at great length, but that is beyond the scope of this book. Here, we are mainly interested in ways of using the threat to checkmate in order to gain material. Let us consider some examples. In the position below, Black threatens to win a piece, offering White the alternative of mate. Can you see how? Then decide on a good move for White. Mate-Based Combinations / 241 Answer Wh ite 's pawns in front of h i s k i n g are sti l l unmoved , a s i g n of potential danger. B l ac k 's th reat i s based on the need for White to keep h i s rook on the first rank. S i n ce th i s same rook (at O B 1 ) i s also h e l p i n g to d � fend the knight at 083 , it i s working too hard . B l ac k to move exp lo its th i s by 1 9 . . . , B x N ; 20 N x B ( not 20 R x B ? ? , R-08 mate ) , R x N, w i n n i n g a piece, s i nce White dare not recaptu re ( 2 1 R x R ? ? , R-KS mate ) . Th i s position occu rred i n a game o f m i ne (Valvo-Ault, C o l u m b i a U n ivers ity Champ i o ns h i p 1 960) w i t h my opponent t o move . Wh ite s i m p l y p l ayed 1 9 P-KR 3 , creati ng an escape square f o r t h e k i n g a n d t h u s remov i n g t h e poss i b i l ity of mate on t h e b a c k r a n k and ru i n i ng my combi nat io n. The pawn move sel ected i s less weake n i n g t h a n 1 9 P-B 3 , whereas 19 P-N3 ? does not create a va l i d escape square because White 's KN2 is covered by B lack's b i s h o p . A poor choice wou l d be 1 9 R (2)-B2, wh ic h stops t h e immed i ate th reat but sti l l l eaves t h e b a c k ran k vul nerab l e . Fo r examp l e , Black could continue 1 9 . . . . N-KS ; 20 N x N, R x N , w it h the dou b l e threats of 21 . . . . R x P and 21 . . R-NS (with a d o u b l e attac k on b i shop and KNP) . . . · The same theme of a vulnerable back rank can be used by White to shatter Black's position below. See if you can discover how. Mate-Based Combinations / 242 Answer If you 're a l e rt to mat i n g poss i b i l ities, you ' l l notice that Wh ite has three attackers ( R + R + BJ l i ned u p on his ON8, whi l e B l ac k has three de­ fenders (R + N + K) . Th i s means that n o m ate i s poss i b l e at the moment; it also means that B l ack's rook can 't l e ave the back rank without a l l ow i n g mate . Th i s r o o k i s a l s o tryi n g t o defend t h e K R P , which i s t o o bad . I n the game Fischer-We i nste i n , U .S . Champions h i p 1 960-1 961 , Fischer pl ayed 33 Q x K R P , and B l ack res i g n e d . When a mate i s i nvo lved, o rd i na ry con­ siderati ons of mate r i a l don 't a p p l y ; if you keep that i n m i n d , you shou l d n 't have a menta l b l ock about g i v i n g up your queen for a pawn here . Look a l ittl e furthe r and you ' l l see that if 33 . , R x O ; 34 R-N8 c h , N x R ; 35 R x N mate . S i nce 3 3 . . , R x 0 i s out of the q uesti o n , B l ac k must .deal with the queen 's attac k on the rook and a l s o the bishop. H owever , 3 3 . , R-K1 o n l y p retends t o g u a rd t h e bishop , s i nce 34 Q x B a g a i n exp l o its t h e rook's n e e d t o stay on the b a c k rank. That's w h y B l ac k res igned . . . . . . Now see what you can find here, for White to move and for Black to move. Mate-Based Combinations I 243 Answer This pos ition i s from Ke res-A l e kh i n , M a rgate 1 93 7 , with W h i te to move . Keres fi n i s hed off h i s opponent by 23 O x B c h . S i nce 23 . . . , R x O ; 2 4 R-KB c h , R-0 1 ; 2 5 ( e i ther) R x R i s m ate ; a lthough 2 3 . . . , K-N 1 ; 24 0 x R c h , K-R 2 avoi d s m ate at the cost of rook and b i s h o p , A l e kh i n res i gn e d . Need l ess t o say, Ke res's move i s much bette r than 2 3 0 x P ? ? , w h i c h woul d a l l ow 2 3 . . . , 0 x BP ch ; 2 4 O-B2 ( k i n g moves l ose the queen ) . 0 x P , a n d White i s i n b i g troub l e . B l ack t o p l ay c a n p rotect h i s b i shop a n d chase Wh ite 's queen a t the same time by 23 . . . , R-03. The three previous positions involved the possibility of mate on the back rank, a fairly common weakness. (For this reason, many inexperi­ enced players, heeding the warnings they have received, can't wait to play P-KR3 or P-KN3 in front of their castled king, thereby avoiding most back-rank mates but creating new weaknesses that their opponents can exploit. ) There are, of course, other ways to mate, and these, too, can be used as an element in combinations. The position below is a case in point. Without further comment, see what you can find for White to move and for Black to move. Mate-lli:>secl Combinations / 244 Answer Th i s pos ition is from S a idy-Karpov, San Anto n i o 1 972, with B l ac k to move . Wh ite had just b l undered under pressure by p l ay i n g 52 R ( R3)-R 5 , and Karpov pounced w i t h 52 . . . , 0-07. Th i s move creates a d o u b l e attac k on t h e r o o k and by 53 . . . , 0 x R P mate , so White res igned . Wh ite to move can stop the combi nation by 53 R-R3 or 53 0-02 or , best of a l l , 53 R x P, threate n i n g 54 P-04 . In the position below, one side is able to gain material by a combination _ involving a mating threat. Figure out what to do for White to move and for Black to move. Mate-Based Combinations I 245 Answer Th i s pos i t i o n i s a l i ne from the Vienna Opening, with B l ac k to move . White's queen and b i s hop are l i ned up on B l ack's K B 2 , w h i ch is gua rded by the k n i ght at B l ack's KR3 and a l s o by the k i n g . The k n i g ht i s s u bject to captu re , so we have a s i m p l e defender e l i m i nati on p l ay : 10 B x N , B x B ? ; 1 1 0 x B P mate . B l ac k m i ght want to prolong the game b y 1 0 . : . , O-K2 , stoppi n g the mate i nstead of recaptu r i n g the b i s h o p , but after 1 1 N x BP c h , K-0 1 ; 1 2 B x B , R x B ; 1 3 N x R , B l ac k is hope l es s l y beh i n d . B l ack t o move must p rotect agai nst t h e mate , b u t t h e obvious 9 ., O-K2 a l l ows 1 0 N x BP c h , w i n n i ng the exchange . The sav i n g move i s 9 . . , P-03 , so that 1 0 B x N c a n be m e t b y 1 0 . . . , B-K3 ; 1 1 O-B3 , KB x B ; 1 2 B x B , P x B ; 1 3 O-R3 , B-N 2 ; 1 4 0 x P c h , K-8 1 (even though Wh ite ' recovers the pawn he had prev i o u s l y s acrificed ) . . . . Here again, one side i s able to gain material by a combination involving a mating threat. Decide what to do for White to move and for Black to move. Mate-Based Combinations I 246 Answer Wh ite wins the exchange by 34 N-B5, d iscovering an attack on the rook and th reate n i ng mate by 35 Q x P, not to mention the fork by 35 N-K7 ch . Black is obl iged to p l ay 34 . . . , P x N , a l l owing 35 R x R . When this occurred i n the game Kashdan-Ste i ner, Pasadena 1 932 , White (one of America's top players at the time) m issed th is quick w i n . Kashdan pl ayed 34 O-B3 instead and won the endgame . ( It's a l l right for grandmasters to miss th i ngs l i ke this when they have the ski l l to win endgames with positional advantages, as Wh ite did here . Lesser players shou l d n 't miss such chances.) B lack to move must take care to defend h i mself. He does not have time for 34 . . . , 0 x RP, because White sti l l conti nues 35 N-B5, P x N ; 36 R x R , and B l ack's queen does not have a safe square to move to on White's back ran k (otherwise that wou ld be the end of White ) . L i kewise, 34 . , P x P sti l l a l l ows 35 N-B5, etc. A good defense is 34 . . . , R-02 , so that the rook w i l l be protected (35 N-B5 ? ? , P x N ; 36 R x R , N x R ) . . . I n this position, one . side i s able t o make use of a mate threat in a different way. See if you can discover how, as well as what to do for the other side. Mate-Based Combinations I 247 Answer From B l ack's p o i nt of view, h i s k n i g ht at OR4 attacks a b i s h o p , w h i c h is defended b y t h e quee n . I f B l ack's q u e e n cou l d move t o O N 4 , a s kewe r attack wou l d w i n a p i ece, s i nce White . wou l d be u n a b l e to defend the l i g ht-squared b i shop aga i n and mov i n g it wou l d expose the dark-squa red b i shop beh i n d it. N ote a l s o that B l ack can th reaten mate by mov i n g 1 4 . . . , O-B3 . Th i s occu rred i n t h e game R ivera-Fischer, Fifteenth O l y m p i ad 1 962, which conti nued 15 P-B3 ( b l o c k i n g the mate ) . O-N 4 ; 1 6 B-R4 , 0 x B( 7) , and W h i te gave u p . T o g e t t o th i s p o i n t , B l ack used the m ate th reat as a ste p p i n g-stone to get his queen to ON4 without l oss of time ( 1 4 . . , 0--02 wou l d give White time to defend ) . I n m a k i n g h i s fou rteenth a n d fifteenth moves , Fischer a l s o h a d to an­ tici pate poss i b l e trou b l e in getting his queen out safe ly and to make sure that h e cou l d . This means foresee i n g that i f then 1 6 R-N 1 , 0 x RP ( ready to open a n escape d i agonal by , P x P) ; 1 7 R-R 1 , 0 x B P ; 18 O-K2 , P x P ; 1 9 KR-B 1 , 0 x P c h . You too , c a n l ook seve ra l moves ahead i f you know what to look for . In th i s case , you wou l d be l oo ki ng for ways to corner the queen and how the queen can escape , w h i c h a l l ows you to conce ntrate you r attention on a few sequences of moves among the m i l l ions poss i b l e . Wh ite t o move shou l d antici pate B l ack's maneuver b y movi n g o r p ro­ tect i n g one of h i s b i shops or by b l oc k i n g the mate th reat in advance ( by 1 5 P-B3) . One poss i b i l ity wou ld be 1 5 B-R 2 , so that 1 5 . . . , O-B 3 ; 1 6 P-B 3 , O-N4 cou l d be met b y 1 7 B-R 1 o r 1 7 R-N 1 . . . . . Mate-Based Combinations / 248 Here is another position that you should find not too difficult. Pick a move for White and for Black to play. Mate-Based Combinations / 249 Answer White i s two pawns beh i nd but i s making trou b l e for B l ac k . In the game N i cevs ki-Fischer, Skopje 1 967, Fischer col l apsed White ' s game by 34 . . . , R-KN 6 . The rook th reatens the queen and a l s o sets u p the th reat of 35 . , 0 x P mate . The queen can be moved to stop the mate , 35 O-K2 , but th i s abandons the knight: 35 . . ., Q x N . I n the game, White res igned at th i s point. On move , White shou l d trade off the k n i g ht, 35 N x B , to e l i m i n ate the danger. After 35 . . ., R x N , White has a m i se rab l e game but can p lay on fo r a w h i l e with 36 R x R, Kx R or 36 R ( 8)-K5 or 36 R (8)-K4 , a l l of which avo id a s i m i l a r combi nation that B l ack wou l d then be th reaten i ng : 36 . . . , R-N 6 ; 37 O-K2 , R x R crunc h . . . This position requires some fancy playing. Work i t out for each side to move. Answer Th i s position arose in Unzicker-Fischer, Buenos Ai res 1 960, with White to p l ay . White has sacrificed a p i ece to get B l ack's k i n g on the ropes but must p l ay accu rate l y , o r e l se the king wi l l esca p e . U n z i cker , the · West German g rand maste r , p l ayed 22 O-N4 ch. Fischer res igned rathe r than cont i n u e with 22 . . . , K-R 3 ; 23 O-R4 ch, K-N3 ; 24 R-KN3 ch. Observe how White checks back and forth with h i s queen so that it ends u p on KR4, where i t w i l l protect the rook com i n g ove r to KN3 . Then B l ack has to g ive up his queen by 24 . . . , 0 x R; 25 0 x 0 ch. The a l ternative is 24 . . . , K-B4, whi ch sta rts the king on a jou rney that, you can be s u re, it wi l l n ever retu rn from ; the k i n g i n t h e m i dd l e of the board , s urrounded by a hosti l e queen and two rooks and with no chance for h e l p , w i l l a l most a l ways per i s h . One way for Wh ite to mate wou l d be 25 O-R5 ch, K-B5 ; 2 6 R-N4 c h , K-K6 ; 2 7 R-K1 c h , K-B7 ; 2 8 O-R4 ch , O-N 6 ; . 2 9 0 x 0 mate. You can no doubt fi nd some more ways i f you care to look. Also effective i s 24 R-KN3 ( i n stead of 24 R-04) , a g a i n compel l i n g B l a c k to g ive up h i s queen to stop mate . B l a ck to move can escape by 22 . . . , R-K 1 (or 01 ) , c reati n g a hole at K B 1 for his k i n g to sneak throu g h . (Th is i s why, with White to play, 22 O-R4 wou l d be a m i stake, for 22 . . . , R-K1 ; 23 R-KN 3 ch, K-B 1 .) Wrong for B l ac k woul d be 22 . . . , P�KB4, because of 23 O-N5 c h , K-R2 ; 2 4 R-04 , l eavi n g B l ac k one awfu l way t o avo i d mate : 2 4 . . . , P-B5 ; , 25 R x P, 0 x R c h ; 26 0 x 0 . Mate.Based Combinations / 251 This position, as well as the last one, involves a theme somewhat different from that in the other examples, in which the mate threat is one of the elements allowing the attacker to win material. Here the mating net is the focus of attention, and material is won not by shifting elsewhere but by taking advantage of the defender's desperate efforts to avoid mate. Given this clue, look carefully for each side to move. Mate-Based Combinations / 252 Answer I n the game Fischer-Reshevsky, U .S . Cham p i o ns h i p 1 962-1 963 , F i s c her p l ayed 4 1 K-03 and w o n eventu a l l y . What h e m i ssed w as 4 1 K-B 1 , with the th reat of 42 B-B2 ch and 43 R-KR 7 m ate . The only way for B l ac k t o save h i mself i s t o g e t h i s r o o k over t o the K R fi l e , which means giving up his b i s hop : 41 . . . , B-N 2 ; 42 B-B2 ch, K-R 6 ; 43 R x B, R-KR 1 . Note that the b i s hop check at m ove 42 d r i ves the k i n g away and p revents counte rp l ay . If 42 R x B d i rectly, then 42 . . ., K x P , and B l ack can put u p a bi t of res i stance. I n t h e proper sequence, th i n g s are rea l l y easy fo r White : after 43 R x B , R-KR 1 , he continues 44 R x P, P-KS (a desperate bi d for the k i n g 's freedom ) ; 45 R-R6 c h , R x R ; 46 P x R , and the pawn queens . B l ack to m ove s h o u l d p l ay 4 1 . . . , P-KS in order to free h i s k i n g from the trap, s i nce KNS becomes ava i l a b l e to the king once Wh ite's KBP is moved o r removed . The position below requires you to use a little finesse. See if you can do that, playing for each side to move. Mate-Based Combinations I 253 Answer I was p l ay i n g White in th i s game agai nst Scott, U .S . Amate u r 1 956 . My opponent was on move , and I was hoping to s q u i r m out. I fig u red that if 2 7 . . . , B x R ; 28 0 x 0 ( ? ? ) . whereas if 27 . . . , 0 x 0 ch ; 28 R x 0 , and I was safe . Some tri cky variati ons wou l d resu lt from 27 . . . , 0-R S ; 2 8 P-N3 , B x P . My opponent ended th i s specul ati on with 27 . . . , B-K6 ch ; 28 K-R 1 , B x R ; 29 0 x B , and now, with my k i n g . chased ove r , 29 . . . , O-K7. The o n l y way to stop mate is 30 P-K R 3 , a l l ow i n g 30 . . . , R-B8 ch ; 3 1 0 x R , 0 x 0 ch . If 30 O-B6 , R-B8 ( o r O-B8,K8 ,08) mate . Or i f 30 K-N 1 , O-KB 7 ch ; 3 1 K-R 1 ( back t o t h e .corner) , O-B8. ch ; 32 0 x 0 , R x 0 mate . U n d e rstandab l y , I chose t o p lay 30 ( resigns) . B y the way, Black can also w i n more s l owly by 27 . . . , B x R; 28 0 x B, 0 x KP; etc . , s i nce 2 8 0 x 0 ? ? loses t o 2 8 . . . , B-K6 ch ; 29 K-R 1 , R-B8 mate . With White to p l ay , 28 0 x 0 w i n s , s i nce B l ack is a move beh in d i n exp l o iting the back ran k : 2 8 . . . , B x R ; 2 9 P-N 3 . Here is another chance to use some finesse. Decide what to do for White to move and for Black to move. Mate-Based Combinations / 254 Answer Th i s position is the fi n i s h of the famous game R eti-Bogoljubow, New York 1 924 . With White's bi shop out of the way, Wh ite wou l d have a mate in two move s , starting with 0 x B c h . So any move that the bishop makes wi l l th reaten mate. Try looking for some v i o l ent captu re-there i s none. On the othe r hand, there i s a c l ever obstruction move . R eti p l ayed 25 B-K8 , and Bogoljubow res i gned . If 25 . . . , R x B, White mates with 2 6 0 x B ch, R x O; 27 R x R mate . O r if 25 . . . , B-K2 ; 26 O-B8 ch, B x O ; 2 7 R x B mate. B l ac k can avo i d mate o n the back rank b y abandon ing h i s b i shop : 25 . . . , P-K R 3 ; 26 0 x B c h , K-R2 , b u t gets mated anyway by 27 B-N6 c h , K x B ; 28 O-B5 m ate . Other fut i l e t r i e s a re 25 . . . , B x P c h; 26 0 x B , P-KR3 ; 2 7 O-B8 ch and mates i n two moves m o r e, as above ; and 25 . . . , K-N 1 ; 26 0 x B m ate . B l ac k can stave off mate for a l ittl e wh i l e , a t t h e cost o f h i s queen, b y 2 5 . . . , P-KR 4 ; 2 6 0 x P c h , K-N 1 ; 27 B-B7 c h , 0 x B ; 28 0 x 0 c h , K-R 1 ; etc. B l ack to p l ay s h o u l d m a ke room for his k i n g , wh ich he can do by 25 . . . , P-N 3 . This move i s much better than 25 . . . , P-KR3, for it both opens squares for B l ack's bishop and restricts the operation of White's b ishop . Now see what you can d o with this one, for each side t o move. The crushing move is not obvious, but keep looking. Mate-Based Combinations / 255 Answer B l ack was the America n , Morphy, the g reatest p l ayer of h i s t i m e , vs . Marache, New O r l eans 1 857. B l ack cou ld w i n i n time with h i s three pawns for the exchange , but M o rphy ended it r i ght away with 19 . . . , N-K N 6 . This exposes an attack on White's quee n , so if 20 B x N , Q x 0 . The logical try fo r White i s to l i q u i date queens , 20 Q x 0 , but th i s a l l ows 20 . . . , N (5)-K7 mate ( by the two k n i g hts ) . If 20 R-K1 , N x Q, or if 20 0-K3 , N ( 5 )-K7 c h ; 21 Q x N ( 2 ) , N x Q c h ; 22 K-R 1 , N x B . White to p l ay sti l l has prob l e m s saving h i s que e n . The obvious 2 0 Q x P loses a p i ece to 20 . . . , N-K7 c h ; 21 K-R 1 , N x B . White can stop the com b i n ation with 20 P-B 3 , but afte r 20 . . . , P-O N 4 ; 21 N-R 3 , B-N 3 , White sti l l h a s a b a d g a m e . If 20 P-N3 , N x P ; 2 1 Q x Q , N ( 6 )-K7 ch (there i s no more mate , but th i s zwischenzug gets the k n i g ht to safety) ; 22 K-R 1 , R P x Q ( n ecessary so that 23 B-N 5 can be met by 23 . . . , P-B3 ) , and Black wins more mate r i a l through the double th reat of . . . , N x B and . . . , N-B 7 . If 20 P-K R 3 , N-K N 6 ! ( anyway) ; 2 1 Q x Q , N ( 5 )-K7 ch ; 22 K-R 2 , N x R c h ; 23 K-R 1 , R-08 ! ; 2 4 P-N3 (to stop mate b y . . . , N (8)-N6 d b l c h a n d . . . , R-R8) , R P x Q , w i n n i ng eas i ly . Decide what to do for White to move and for Black to move here. Mate-Based Combinations I 256 Answer With B l ack to p l ay, . . Q x Q puts an end to matte rs . I n the game Marshal l-B u r n , Pa r i s 1 90 0 , it was White's move . Marsha l l faced the prob l e m o f how to conti nue h i s attack, for which h e had sacrificed a p i ece for two pawn s . His sol ution : 1 7 R-RB c h , K x R; 18 O-R 7 mate . The rook sacrifice pu l l s the k i n g ove r to the corner where O-R 7 i s mate ; if i m m ed i ate l y 1 7 O-R 7 c h , K-B 1 . Y o u m a y have m i ssed th i s by looking fo r some combi nati on to g a i n mate r i a l , but-as I s ai d at the beg i n n i ng of th i s chapte r-you ought to be a b l e to see a mate when it's there . . . As you may have noticed, you are now getting positions with mating and assorted other themes, and they are generally a bit more complex than the ones at the beginning of the chapter. Here's another one for you to ponder, for each side to move. Mate-Based Combinations I 257 Answer I was p l ay i n g Wh ite vs . Herrick in th i s game, d u r i n g a recent team matc h , 1 972 . M y opponent h a d j u st p l ayed 27 . . . , N ( N 5)-B7 , th reate n i n g m y queen. F i rst, I thought o f moving 28 0-0 B t , attacking t h e knight i n turn . Th i s a l l ows 2 8 . . . , R-K8 ch , but I noted that B l a c k wou l d then pa y for aband o n i n g h i s back-ran k p rotection : 29 0 x R , N x O ; 30 R-08 mate . Th i s led my thoughts to the right move : 28 O-K5 ! Th e queen attacks the · rook but ca n 't be captured (28 . . . , R x O; 29 R-08 ch, R-K 1 ; 30 R x R mate ) . When B l ack ran away, 28 . . . , R-O B 1 , I conti nued 29 P-KR 3 . B l ack's queen must guard agai nst mate at his KN2 (29 . . . , 0 x RP; 30 O-N 7 mate) but has no safe square to go to . B l ac k tried 29 . . . , N-05, hoping I wou l d i m p u l s ive l y p l ay 30 P x O?, after which 30 . . . , N-B6 ch w i n s my own quee n . Fortunate l y , I resi sted the urge to g rab the queen long enough to d i scover what wou l d happen and p l ayed 30 R x N ; B l ack res i gned (if 30 . . . , O-N3 , 3 1 R-N4) . With B l a c k to move i n the d i agrammed positi o n , . . . , N x 0 takes care of White. · Now see what you can do with this position, w'ith White to move and with Black to move. Mate-Based Combinations / 258 Answer Th i s pos ition arose in the twenty-second game of the World Championsh i p M atch 1 95 1 between B ronste i n a n d Botv i n n i k, with Wh ite t o move . At fi rst, it woul d seem that Wh ite shou l d move or protect h i s l oose q u een , bu t look fu rther. B l ack's k i n g i s c r i n g i n g i n t h e c o r n er and potenti a l l y vu l ne rab l e o n the l o n g d i agona l . Without B l ack's d ark-squared b i shop to protect th i s d i agon a l , B-B6 ch o r O-B3 ch wou l d w i n at once . Thus , you might want to cons i d e r ways of getting th i s b i shop off the d i agona l , which m i ght l ead you to the m ove p l ayed by Bronste i n : 3 7 B-N 3 . S i nce th i s move l e aves the queen u n protected , you must exa m i n e the conse­ quences of 37 . . . , Q x Q� wh ich turn out to b e : 38 B x B c h , K-N 1 ; 39 R-K N 7 c h, K-R 1 ; 40 A-NS mate . Of course, 37 . . . , B x B ; 38 O-B3 ch , and White m ates in two move s . So B l ac k m ust retreat the b i shop , but­ lo and behol d-B l ack's rook is thereby exposed . Botv i n n i k p l ayed 37 . . . , B-N 2 and res igned after 38 Q x Q c h , an e l ementa ry zwischenzug before tak i ng the rook. By the way, note that if B l ack's othe r b i shop were on h i s KN3 i n stead of K 1 , B l ac k cou l d save h i s rook b y 37 B-N3 , B-N 2 ; 38 Q x Q ch, A x 0. B l a c k to move c a n p l ay 37 . . , Q x Q a n d w i n eas i l y enou g h , even though Wh ite cou l d then p l ay 38 A-BB ch, O-N 1 ; 39 A x Q ch , K x A . . Here i s another position for you to figure out, for each side to move. Mate-Based Combinations / 259 Answer Th i s t i me Botvi n n i k as B l ac k vs . Gog l i dze , M oscow 1 935, was on the w i n n i ng side of a m ate-based combi nati o n . W h i te has a rook guard i n g h i s b a c k rank, b u t b y 2 6 . . . , O R-N 1 B l ac k gets both rooks i n position to swoop down . W h i te rep l ied 27 0-06, natura l l y sav i n g h i s queen , a lthough his o n l y chance was to g ive u p his queen for a rook (some chance ! ) . Botvi n n i k then wrapped i t u p with 2 7 . . . , 0 x R ch ; 2 8 K x 0 , R-N8 c h , a n d W h i te res igned i n preference t o 2 9 K-K2 , R-B7 m ate . N ote t h e i m­ portance of B l ack's pawn on KS i n confi n i n g Wh ite's k i n g . Wh ite t o m ove c a n prevent t h e com b i n ation by 2 7 O-N 1 b u t rem a i n s with a d iffi c u l t pos ition after 2 7 . . . , OR-N 1 ; 28 0-0 1 , O-N 7 ; 29 O-R 1 , R-B7 . Worse are 27 R (3 )-R 1 , OR-N 1 ; 28 0-06, R-N 4 ; and 27 P-KN 3 , w h i c h creates a serious weakness w h i c h B l ack's queen a n d b ishop wi l l be g l ad to exp loit. The less weaken i n g escape h o l e 2 7 P-KR3 has the defect of not stopp i n g Botv i n n i k 's comb i n ation (work it out) . After the last several positions, this one should be easy for you . Find a good move for White to play and for Black to play. Mate-Saised Co11J1binatiom; I 260 A nswer B l ack's k i n g i s on the back rank and in danger, but i f 47 R-R8 ch, K-02, and the k i n g s l i ps out. But White has another l i ne of approach-the queen fi l e . I n the game F i scher-Fo r i ntos , Monaco 1 96 7 , Fi scher p l ayed 47 R-03 , and B l ac k res i g n e d . The b i shop is under attac k and can 't be defended . That l eaves the option of run n i ng away, but i f the b i shop moves , 48 R-08 m ate . B l ac k can stop mate by 47 . . . , R-OBB ; 48 R x B , R-B 1 ; 49 K-R 6 , but it's not worth the effo rt. Black to m ove can hold on by e i ther 47 . . . , K-02 o r 47 . . . , R-08, though h e sti l l wou l d be a pawn beh i n d . Here i s one last position that involves checkmate a s one o f the elements in a combination. It's not too hard if you look . Mate-Based Combinations I 261 A nswer Th i s occu rred i n Ben ko�M artz, Vrnjacka-Banja 1 973 , with White to move . With B l ac k to move , there is no pro b l e m-24 . . . , R x 0 fi n i shes White (25 R-R8 ch can be met by 25 . . . , B-K B 1 , 25 . . . , R-B 1 , or 25 . . . , B-OB 1 ) . I t wou l d appear that White's queen must m ove , but note that i n the variation above B l ac k i s saved from mate by . . . , B-K B 1 o r by the rook and other b ishop contro l l i ng O B 1 . I f Wh ite p l ays 24 N x B , which Benko d i d , the kn i g ht, wh i l e it is a l ive, covers B l ack's KB 1 and KN2 and has removed one of the defenders of B l ac k 's O B 1 . I f 24 . . . , R x 0, the kn i ght sti l l l ives , and Wh ite mates start i n g with 25 R-R8 ch (when B l ack m oves . . . , B-KB 1 ; R x B i s mate ) . M eanwh i l e B l ack's rook i s under attack, so 24 . . , P x N gets 25 0 x R ch i n reply. I f the rook moves away , Wh ite has time to save h i s kn ight and stay a p i ece ahead ; whereas if 24 . . . , O-K 1 , both 25 R-B7 , R x R ; 26 N x R , O-OB 1 ; 27 N x P (s l i pp i n g out of the p i n , B l ack's l ast hope) and 25 N x B , R x 0? ( better i s 25 . . . , K x N ; 2 6 R-B7 , etc . ) , 2 6 N x 0 l eave B l ack l ittl e hope . Note fi n a l l y that Wh ite can protect h i s k i n g with h i s b ishop (24 . . . , O-N8 ch ; 25 B-B 1 ) . So B l ack res i g n e d . . Mate-Based Combinations / 262 Despite the successful examples given so far in this chapter, there are many times when the attacking player is unable to checkmate or win material. If the attacker has made an all-out effort and falls short, the advantage usually swings to the defender, who is often left with extra material from faulty sacrifices made by the attacker. It may happen that the defender, through no special effort on his part, weathers the attack. In other cases, the defender may be able to pull through by his own countercombination. Let us consider two examples. In this position, Black has sacrificed a piece to reach what appears to be a forced mate ( . . . , R-KR3 ) . Yet White to move can escape. Can you see how? Mate-Based Combinations f 263 Answer In the game R hodes-Abrahams, B l ackpool 1 946, White won by 21 N-N 4 . T h e kni ght forks q u e e n and roo k , a n d i f B l ack retreats 2 1 . . . , O-N 4 ; 22 N x R c h , P x N ; 23 Q x B , leaving h i m i n a hopel ess pos ition . The natural move i s 21 . . , P x N, which d i s poses of the offe n d i n g k n i ght and renews the threat of mate-but there i s one l ittl e deta i l to noti ce : 22 B x P ch ( d i scove ry check) . K x B ; 23 Q x 0. In th i s variati o n , the fact that the bishop can move and g ive check saves Wh ite from b e i n g mated . . BON U S QU ESTI ON Go back to the pos ition and see if you can fi g u re out how W h i te can save h i ms e l f from be i n g' mated , ass u m i n g that the b l ack k i n g i s on (a) K B 1 and ( b ) KR 1 , i n stead of on KN 1 . Answer to Bon us Q u estion (a) With the b l ack king on K B 1 , White s l ips out by 21 N-N 4 , P x N ; 22 P x P , and White's rook p i ns B l ack's, m a k i n g 22 . . . , R-KR3 i mposs i b l e . But much bette r i s 22 B-R3 ch ! , forc i n g the king o n to a w h i te square and sett i n g up a d i s covery check (22 . . . , K-K1 or 22 . . . , K-B2 ; 23 B-N 6 ch-or 22 . . . , K-N 1 ; 23 B x P ch) and w i n n i n g the queen . ( b ) With the k i n g on KR 1 , White can p l ay 21 N-B7 c h , R x N ( 2 1 K-N 1 i s no h e l p , fo r t h e kni ght covers B l ac k 's KR3 ) ; 22 OR-K1 , O-R 3 ch ; 23 K-N 1 , g i v i n g back the extra p i ece to save the k i n g . Mate-Based Combinations I 264 Here again, things look desperate for White. He is about to get mated by the queen at his KB2. Is there a way out? Mate-Based Combinations I 265 A nswer White's defense i s based on a l ittl e deta i l-B l ack's k i n g and queen are on the same l i n e . Of course, a pawn sta nds in between them (25 R-N 1 doesn 't work) , but perhaps that can be ove rcome. The r i ght way i s 2 5 R x K N P c h , wh ich e l i m i nates the K N P a t the cost o f a roo k . Afte r 25 . . . , K x R ; 26 R-N 1 p i n s the queen to the k i n g (so does 25 . . . , Q x R ; 2 6 R-N 1 ) , stopp i n g the mate and w i n n i n g the queen . After the smoke c l ears (26 . . , Q x R ch ; 27 K x Q), Wh ite i s l eft with the w i n n i n g ad­ vantage of Q + P + P + P for R + B . N ote that White gains no mate r i a l i n t h e combi nation itse l f ; he g ives u p R + R f o r Q + P . W h e n faced with checkmate , the first con s i de rati on of a cou nte rco m b i n ation should be whether i t wi l l stop the m ate . I f you sti l l come out ahead after stopp i n g t h e mate , s o m u c h t h e better . Th i s pos ition wou l d have occurred i n t h e g a m e R a b i n ovich-Botv i n n i k , U S S R Ch am p i o n s h i p 1 92 7 , h a d Botv i nn i k p l ayed 24 . . . , P( K5)-K6 . But Botv i n n i k saw the danger and p l ayed i nstead 24 . . . , B-B4 (see the d i a• g ra m b e l ow) . W i th the b i shop move B l ac k sti l l threatens m ate and covers Wh ite's KN 1 as wel l , so that if 25 R x K N P ch ? , K x R ; 26 R-N 1 ? ? , Q x R mate . I n the g a m e , White tried 25 P-K3, but sti l l l ost afte r 25 . . . , Q x BP ch ; 26 Q-B2 , Q x R ch ; etc . . Mate-Based Combinations / 266 Before we wrap up this chapter, let us note briefly two other themes involving the king . . Sometimes, on an off day, you'll have such a bad game you'll be happy even to draw instead of losing. Two ways to do so are ( a ) to get yourself stalemated ( not in check but with no legal moves) and (b) to keep checking your opponent ad infinitum (perpetual check ) or tt> otherwise compel an endless repetition of the position. In the position below, White's �ituation certainly qualifies as desperate, but White to move can draw. How? Mate-Based Combinations / 267 A nswer Th i s pos ition occu rred in D e l m a r-Congdo n , New York 1 888. B l ack shou l d h ave w o n eas i l y b u t h a d j u s t made a very care l ess move b y b r i n g i n g h i s q u e e n t o Q B 6 . White p l ayed 1 O N 8 c h , forc i n g 1 , K x Q a 1J d l eavi n g W hi te sta l emated . Most sta l e m ates arise from i nept attem pts to checkmate with an overwhe l m i ng mate r i a l advantage. Even so, sta l e m ates sti l l arise amo n g master p l ayers w h e n they get a b i t care l ess . When you 're w ay ahead , make s u re that you r opponent has a k i n g move or some pawn moves­ otherw i s e , watch out! - . . . Having seen how White saved himself in the previous position, you should have little trouble finding out how White to play pulled out a draw against a famous grandmaster in the position below. Mate-Based Combinations / 268 A nswer T h i s pos ition a rose in the game P i l n i c k-Res hevsky, U . S . C h a m p i o n ­ s h i p 1 942. I f 1 Q x P , B l ac k l i q u i d ates by 1 . . . , Q-KB c h ; 2 K-N 2 , Q-N 6 c h ; 3 Q x Q , P x Q , a n d w i n s eas i l y (4 K x P , K-N 1 ; 5 K-B4, K-B 2 ; 6 K-K4 , K-B3 ; 7 K-Q4 , K-N 4 ; etc . ) . P i l n i c k , h owever, p l ayed 1 Q-KB2 ! , fo rc i n g an i m m e d i ate d raw because 1 . . . , Q x Q i s stale­ m ate , and 1 . . , Q-N3 ? ? s i m p l y loses the q u een (2 Q x Q c h , o r even . bette r, 2 P x Q ch, K-N 1 ; 3 Q-BB m ate) . Note t h at w i t h o u t W h ite's pawn o n Q R5, B l a c k wo u l d win by a n swe ri n g 1 Q-KB2 w i t h . . . , Q-N3. Perpetual checks or other endless repetitions occur much more commonly than stalemates and are much harder for the materially stronger side to prevent. For example, in the position below, Black had two pawns for two knights but drew by a perpetual check . How? Mate-Based Combinations / 269 Answer What saves B l ack i s the exposed white k i n g , w h i c h can be checked end­ lessly u n l ess White g ives up too much mate ri a l . Th i s occurred in the game A l e kh i n-Botvi n n i k , N otti ngham 1 936. Afte r 17 . . . , O-N 6 ch ; 18 R-B 2 , O-N8 c h , t h e g a m e was g iven u p as d rawn . Shou l d White try 1 9 K-K2 , B l ac k w i n s back both b i s hops ( 1 9 . . . , Q x B ch and 20 . . . , Q x Bl with a won game. If the king goes to 02 , . . . , R-0 1 . ch wins W h i te' s queen for a roo k , and then B l ack can pick off a b i s h o p ; fo r examp l e , from move 1 8 : K-02, R-0 1 ch ; 1 9 K-B 1 , R x Q ch ; 20 R x R, 0-BS c h ! and 21 . . . , Q x OB ( not 20 . . . , Q x B ? ; 2 1 R-08 ch , B-B 1 ; 22 B x P) . As a final footnote, observe the position below. Although a bishop and pawn ahead, White has no way to force Black's king away from in front of the pawn. Black's king can move back and forth between KR l and KN l , and any attempt by White to push forward results in stalemate. If 1 P-R7 or 1 B-B4 or 1 K-B7, Black is stalemated. The same thing happens on 1 B-N5, K-N 1 ; 2 P-R7 ch, K-R 1 , unless White gives up his pawn ( 3 K-N 5, K x P ) , leaving him unable to mate with a lone bishop. So white has the choice of allowing an endless repetition or of stalemating, but the result is still a draw. White's helplessness, by the way, is caused by the bishop being on the wrong color_.'...that is, not controlling the queening square. If the bishop were on the dark-colored squares instead, White would win easily. Mate-Based Combinations / 270 C HAPTER Review of Basic Elements W e have now covered all o f the basic elements o f chess combinations, so this is a good point at which to review. I have selected one or two simple examples from . the content of each of the first 1 2 chapters. They are presented in sequence as problems for you to solve ( as usual, for White to move and for Black to move) . If you find yourself really unable to solve any position, you may want to restudy parts of the appropriate chapter. But by now you should have little trouble. Just think carefully-starting with ihis position. l!evuew of llasic !:iements / in Answer Th i s position arose i n the game Fi ne-M itche l l , H asti ngs 1 935-1 936 . B l ac k had just p l ayed 38 . . . , B ( R 2)-N 1 ; F i ne saw the l oose p i ece ( C h a pte r 1 J and p l ayed 39 Q x B c h . B l a c k res igned , for as if l o s i n g a p i ece were not enoug h , h i s queen goes too afte r 39 . . . , K-K2 ; 40 R-R7 c h , K-B 1 ; 41 N-N 6 ch , d r i v i n g the k i n g away . Even before h i s th i rty-e i g hth move , B l ack had a l ost game and may wel l h ave b l undered through hope l essness . He may a l s o have made a desperate g a m b l e of a sort often tried in " b l itz " ches s , mov i n g a p i ece to a squ are where it i s l oose but from w h i c h it threatens anoth e r p i e c e . An unwary p l ayer, not expecti ng such an outright b l under, m i ght overlook the capture and so also the th reat to his own p i e c e . In th i s game, B l ac k hoped to p l ay . . . , B x 0 , but Fine was a l ert. Remember Basic R u l e 1 from C hapte r 1 , page 2: Captu re your op­ ponent's unguarded p i eces , and don 't l eave your own p i eces unguarded . What should White to play and Black to play do here? Review of Basic Elements / 272 Answer Black's rook at h i s K1 is attacked tw ice and defended tw i c e , but Wh ite wins the exchange by 25 0 x K R , 0 x O; 26 B x 0 , R x B. Remember the Bas i c Rule 2 , from Ch apter 2 , pag e 1 7 : Trade or exchange your less val u a b l e p i eces for the more v a l u a b l e p i eces of you r opponent; con­ verse l y , do not trade your own p i eces for less va l u a b l e ones . B l ack to move s h o u l d observe the second h a l f of t h i s r u l e by not letting his more va l u a b l e rook be traded fo r White's less va l u a b l e b i s h o p . I n t h e g a m e A l e k h i n-Tyl or , N o tt i n g h a m 1 93 6 , B l a c k p l ayed 24 R-K3 , hang i n g on though sti l l a pawn beh i n d . Note that if 24 O-N 3 , Wh ite p l ays s i m p l y 25 0 x 0, P x O; 26 B x R, R x B (not 25 0 x R, R x O; 26 B x R , 0 x K P ch ; etc . , w i th B l ack getti n g 0 + P for R + R ri ght away) . . . . . .• .. Now find a good move for White to play and for Black to play below. Review of Basic Elements I 273 Answer Th i s position i l l u strates a s i m p l e d o u b l e attack, from the game Thomp­ son-Morphy, New York 1 857. M o rphy p l ayed 19 . . . , 0 x N P ch, attack i n g k i n g and r o o k . After 20 K-0 1 , M o rphy d i d n o t take t h e r o o k r i g ht away but p l ayed first 20 . . B x P; 21 O-K2 and then 21 . . . , 0 x R . and White res i g ned . M o rphy's p l ay i s an exa m p l e of a l l ow i n g a beaten opponent as l ittl e chance as poss i b l e (by 20 . B x P i nstead of the i m m e d i ate 20 . . . , 0 x R ) . Double attacks such as these were covered in Chapter 3 . W i th Wh ite to p l ay , Q x Q d i s poses o f B l ac k 's threat a n d h i s queen a s wel l . . . . .. Decide what to do for each side to move in the position below. Review of Basic Elements / 274 Answer As you also learned in Chapter 3, not a l l double attacks work. In th i s example, from Fischer-Robatsch , V i n kovc i 1 968, Wh ite h a s a kni ght fork with 24 N-B7 . B l ack, however, s l i ps out eas i l y with 24 . . . , R x R ch (ex­ chang i n g one of the attacked p i eces) ; 25 R x R , R-R2 (saving the other attacked p iece and m a i nta i n i ng protection of the O R P , which the knight also attacks) . I n the game, Fischer chose 24 R x R c h , to which Robatsch correctly rep l ied 24 . , N x R, preventi ng 25 N--,B 7 . With the alternative 24 . . . , R x R ; 25 N-B7 attacks both the rook and the ORP, and if 25 . . . , R-K5 (counterattacking) ; 26 R-0 1 , N-N 1 (protecting the ORP) ; 27 N (4) x P, P x N ? ; 2 8 R-08 ch, etc . B l ack to move has . only to fol l ow Basic R u l e 1 and p l ay . . , N x N , w i n n i n g the loose knight. . . . What would you do for White to move and for Black to move in this position? Review of Basic Elements / 275 Answer Wh i te to move th reatens to pin B l ack's rook to his king by B-K6 , w i n n i n g the exchange. I n p i ns a n d skewers , covered i n C hapter 4 , y o u strike d i rectly at one enemy p i ece and i n d i rectly at another one on the same l i n e . In th i s case, with the h i ghe r-val u e p i ece i n back, the maneuver �s cal led a pin ; reve rse the positions of B l ack's rook and k i n g ( K at KB2 , R at KN 1 ) and it ls c a l l ed a skewer, although the i d e a i s the same. I t was B l ack's move when th i s arose i n the game Reshevs ky-Euwe , Wor l d Champ i o n sh i p Tournament ,1 948 . Euwe p layed 28 . . . , O-R5 , and the game conti nued 29 P-B4 (sto p p i n g 29 . , 0 x B P mate ) , K-R 1 (movi ng out of the potenti a l p i n ) ; 30 B-K 1 , O-B3 ; 3 1 B-OB3 ( p rotect i n g the ONP} . A better a l ternative for B l ack is 28 . . . , N-B4 , w h i c h b l ocks the b i sho p and a l s o th reatens 29 . . . , N-N6 c h ( s i nce 30 P x N i s imposs i b l e because of the p i n , a subject covered in Chapter 5) . A poor a l ternative for B l ac k i s 28 . . . , R x N P , s i nce th is. move w i n s o n l y a pawn f o r t h e exchange after 29 B-K6 . . . Now decide on a move for White to play and. for Black to play in the position below. Review of Basic Elements / 276 Answer H e re we have a s kewer of two rooks by White's b i s h o p , 26 B-R 6 , wh ich I p l ayed agai nst Wagner, U .S . I nterco l l e g i ate Champions h i p 1 959 . Al ready a pawn down and about to lose the exchange to the skewer , my opponent res i g n e d , thereby secur i n g fi rst p l ace and title for m e . B l ac k to move shou l d p l ay 26 . . , R x P, reestab l i s h i n g mate r i a l equal i ty and. b reaking up the s kewer . . Now figure out what t o d o for each side t o move here. Review of Basic Elements / 277 Answer Here we have a p i n exploitatio n , as descri bed in Chapter 5. Wh ite's knight is attacked by quee n , rook, and bi shop and is defended by the bishop and pawn . Norma l l y th is protection wou l d be suffici ent because of the re l ative values i nvolved (despite Wh ite's two-to-three i nferiority) . But the pawn is pi nned to Wh ite's queen and provides only pseudopro­ tection . Black to play wins by 1 6 . . . , B x N ; 1 7 B x B, R x B, and if 1 8 P x R?, O x O. The position is from a wel l-known game · pl ayed by Ste i n itz as B l ack agai nst Rosenthal , Vienna 1 873 . White was on move and saved the piece by 1 6 0-B2, unpinning the pawn . Back in those days , the superiority of two bishops over a b ishop and knight was not recognized , unti l Ste i n itz won th is and s i m i lar games ; The basic procedure . is to push the kn ight back, which Ste·initz started by 1 6 . . . , P-OB4 . See what you can find in this position for White to move and for Black to move. Review of Basic Elements / 278 Answer Th i s i s from Keres-M i kenas, Kemeri 1 937. Wh ite can p l ay 31 R x RP with a c l ear exchange ahead , but Black wou l d sti l l be able to res ist for a long time because a l l the pawns a re on one side of the board . Keres fi n i shed off the game right away by 31 R- B 1 , a s i mp l e p i n-and-w i n maneuver from Chapter 5 . White first sets u p t h e p i n , fixi n g t h e bishop as a target. S i nce B l ac k can ne ither move the b i s h op (without losing h i s rook i n stead) nor p rotect it aga i n , h e i s h e l p l ess agai nst the com i n g 32 R-NS. A s it happens , Wh ite a l s o threatens 32 R x B d i rectly because of the unprotected back rank (32 . . . , R x R ? ; 33 R-NS ch and mate next move ) , so a continuation m i ght be 31 . . . , P-N 3 ; 32 R-NS , R-R 1 ; 33 R ( 1 ) x B , P-RS ; 34 R-RS, etc . , w i n n i n g eas i l y . B l ac k resigned i nstead . B l a c k to m ove must avo i d the p i n , and by . , B-NS he can protect h i s O R P as wel l . . . Decide what t o do for White to move and for Black to move here. Review of Basic Elements I 279 Answer Wh ite has a d o u b l e attack by N-B7, b ut B l a c k has a m o re powe rfu l d i s­ covery check of the sort covered in Ch apter 6. In the game Bazan­ Fi scher, M a r d e l P l ata 1 960, Fischer on move p l ayed 30 . . . , N-N 6 ch ; 3 1 R P x N ( 3 1 BP x N ? , R x R mate ) , R x R ch ; 32 K-R 2 . B l ack has won the exchange and in d o i n g so has also avo ided White's doub l e attack. B l ack cou l d now conti nue with 32 . . . , R-K2 and w i n i n the l o n g run with h i s mate r i a l advantage-good enough to justify h i s d i scovery combi na­ ti o n . But B l ack has even better-White 's k i n g i s in a mati n g net (see Chapte r 1 2 ) . Fischer p l ayed 32 . . . , R-O B 1 ; 33 R x B P ( R-B7 o r N-B7 stop the mate at the cost of a p i e ce ) , R ( 1 )-B 8 , and Wh ite res i gned , for h e has no way to stop . . . , R-KRS m ate . White to move s h o u l d not p l ay 3 1 N'-B 7 , for B l a c k h its back harder with the d i scovery : 3 1 . . . , N-N6 ch ; 32 R P x N, R x R ch ; 33 K- R 2 , R-O B 1 a n d w i n s (34 N-N5 c h , K x P ; 3 5 R-07 c h , K-B3 ; etc . ) . I n th i s l i ne B l ac k w i n s by a i m i n g toward t h e b a c k rank by 33 . . . , R-O B 1 , whereas the attempt to pin and win by 33 . . . , R-K2 l oses to White 's own d i scovery check, 34 N-N5 ch, K x P; 35 R x R. To return to the o r i g i n a l pos ition , Wh ite must g u a rd agai nst B l ack's threat by movi ng h i s rook ( 3 1 R-0 1 , etc .) or p rotecti ng it ( 3 1 R ( 7)-N 1 ) . What would you do for White to move and for Black to move in the position below? Review of Basic Elements / 280 Answer As a l so shown in Chapte r 6, many d i scove ries do not i nvolve g i v i n g c h e c k . T h i s pos ition , f r o m Ben ko-Cze rn i a k , R e g g i o 1 970, i l l ustrates a d i scove ry capture . If White moves h i s k n i g ht at KS , B l ack's b i s ho p w i l l b e l oose , s o you should l o o k for p l aces t o move the k n i g ht that i nvolve threats o r captu res . I f 1 2 N-N 6 , B x N; 13 B x B , and White doesn 't w i n anyth i n g . If 1 2 N x N , Q x N , and t h e queen p rotects t h e b i s h o p . The knight also has two captu res , the right one b e i n g 1 2 N x KBP. Because of the fork, B l ack i s obl iged to p l ay 1 2 . . . , K x N, whereupon 1 3 B x B · reg a i n s the p i ece with a pawn ahead and B l ack's k i n g exposed . N ot q u i te as good is 1 2 N x O B P because of 1 2 . . . , O-B 2 ; 1 3 B x B , Q x B ; 1 4 N-R S , P-O N 3 ; 1 5 N-N3, although White sti l l h a s an extra pawn . In the game, it was B l ack's move , and B l ac k stopped the th reat by 1 1 . . . , O-K2, p rotecting the b i shop and a l s o putting three agai nst two on Wh ite 's advanced k n i g ht. Now figure out what to do for each side to move in this position. Review of Basic Elements I 281 A nswer In Chapter 7, you learned about various ways of getting rid of guard i ng p i eces so that you can capture what they are gua rdi n g . These i nc l ude gu a rd remova l , d riveaway, ove rworked p i ece, d rawaway , and obstruction . The present position i l l u strates exp l o i t i n g an ove rwo rked p i ec e. W h ite's queen gu a rds both the b i s hop and rook . I n the game S l iva-Pach man , M oscow 1 956, B l a c k p l ayed 28 . . . , R x B , and W h i te res i g ned . Afte r 29 0 x R , 0 x R , B l a c k wou l d be a p i ece ahead and m ust lose mo re to stop mate (30 O-KN 1 , 0 x N ; etc . ) . N ote that if 30 0-08 c h , B l ack can i nterpose safely by 30 . . . , B-KB 1 . I n the o r i g i n a l pos ition , B l ack can p lay 28 . . . , B x B P , exp l o i t i n g the pin on the k n i g ht (29 N x B?, H x R ) to w i n a pawn , but Pac h m a n 's move is much better . Wh ite t o p l ay can save t h e p iece fo r t h e moment b u t sti l l faces a g r i m s i tuati o n . T h e agg ress ive 29 R x P removes t h e rook from d a n g e r b u t a l s o fata l ly weakens t h e k i ng 's defenses , w h i c h B l a c k exp l oits b y 29 . . . , R x B ; 3 0 R x B c h , K x R ; 3 1 0 x R , O-R 6 ch ! ; 3 2 K-N 1 , 0 x N P mate . White can try to h o l d on by the defensive 29 K-N 1 , but after 29 . . . , B-KB 1 ( h e a d i n g for OB4) ; 30 N-04, R x R ; 3 1 0 x R , 0 x B P ; 32 N-K2 ( i f 32 N-N3 , B-04 w i n s ) , 0-0 7 ; 3 3 O-B 1 , B-B4 c h ; 3 4 K-R 1 , B-R 3 , White i s hope­ lessly tied u p . See what you can find here for White t o move and for Black t o move. lleview of Basic Elements / 282 Answer Wh ite appears not to h ave a weak p o i nt, unti l and u n l ess you cons ider the connection between Wh ite's queen and k n i ght. I n a game p l ayed in Eng l and between R itson-M o rry and Ab rahams, B l a c k broke the l i n k by 21 . . . , B-K7. Wh ite has no p l ace to move h i s queen to reesta b l i s h p ro­ tection fo r the k n i ght, and the b i s hop a l so stops the white king from com i n g ove r to h e l p . If 22 O-R3 c h , K-N 1 l eaves White with the same prob l e m as befo re . All Wh ite can do i s to make an escape square for his k i n g and abandon the k n i ght (22 P-K R 3 , Q x N c h ; etc . ) . B l ac k 's p l ay is a s i m p l e exa m p l e of an obstruction maneuve r , another of the guard­ riddance themes from C h a pter 7 . Wh ite to p l ay must take the teeth out of . . . , B-K7 , w h i c h he can do best by 22 P-B3 , so as to answer 22 . . . , B-K7 with 23 K-B 2 . What should White to move and Black to move do here? Review of Basic Elements / 283 Answer Th i s pos ition, from Tarrasch-B u r n , Ostend 1 90 7 , shows an exa m p l e of a corne r i n g p l ay cove red in Chapter 8. Ta rrasch p l ayed 30 N-N 6 , and B u rn res i g n e d . The b l ack queen, surrounded by h e r own p i eces , i s lost to the k n i ght. Note that Wh ite 's b i s hop pins B l ack's KBP to the k i n g , m a k i n g 30 . . . , P x N i m poss i b l e . ( Even without t h e p i n , White wou ld sti l l ga i n ; from the o r i g i n a l positi o n , with B l ack's k i n g at K R 1 i n stead o f KN 1 , Wh ite w i n s the queen for a rook and k n i ght by 30 N-N6 c h , P x N ; 3 1 R x 0 ch.) A s shown above , B l ack t o move can 't escape compl ete l y by p l ay i n g 30 . . . , K-R 1 ( 3 1 N - N 6 c h , etc . ) . If 30 . . . , N x KP, Wh ite sti l l w i n s the q u een by 3 1 N-N 6 , N x R; 32 B x N , and e v e n bette r i s 3 1 N x N , fo r i f 3 1 . . . , R x N ; 32 N-N6 w i n s the quee n , or if 3 1 . . . , B-O B 3 ; 32 N-N6 , O-K1 ; 33 N x R c h , 0 x N ; 34 R x P demo l i s hes B l ac k . B l ac k can save h i s queen by making an outlet by a move such as 30 . . . , B-O B 3 , but then 3 1 N-N6 w i n s the exchange by the fork , without b l unting White's attack. Now come up with a good move for White to play and for Black to play in this position. Review of Basic Elements / 284 Answer In Chapter 9 you were shown ways to set up com b i nati o n s . One method is the step p i n g-stone, used h e re by F i s c h e r as B l ac k agai nst Larsen i n the fou rth game o f the i r Can d i dates M atch 1 97 1 . F i s c h e r p l ayed 3 2 . . . , N-B6 ch ; 33 K x P , N-07. W i th h i s queen and rook fo rked and . . . , R x P ch coming next, Larsen res i g ned . You may have noti ced 32 . . . , R x P , wh i c h seems b a d because i t a l l ows 33 0 x N . H oweve r , B l a c k continues 33 . . . , . R-B8 c h , and if e i th e r 34 R x R or 34 N x R , 34 . . . , P x R (o r N ) = 0 i s mate . W h i te must a l l ow 3 4 K x P , R x R , leaving B l ac k u p fo r t h e exchange but with much agg ravati on afte r 35 R x O P . Notice that i n this variation White 's king ca n h i de at K R 3 . Now compare what happens in the varia­ tion chosen by F i s c h e r , shou l d W h i te conti nue : 34 0-03 , R x P ch ; 35 K-R 1 , N x R ; 36 0 x N , P-R4 , and B l ac k 's attack ro l l s o n . White t o p l ay h a s 33 0 x N , R x P ; 34 R (6)-N 6 , and t h e extra p i ece wi l l te l l i n the long run . Decide your moves for each side to play in the position below. Review of Basic Elements / 285 Answer H e re we have anoth e r exa m p l e of sett i n g up a co m b i n ation ( C h a pter 9 ) , th i s t i m e through repos ition i n g t h e opponent's p i eces t o m a k e t h e com­ b i n ati on work. B l ack can check with his queen on a square now p rotecte d by the b i s h o p , which is attacked by B l ack's rook and defended by White's rook. The rook, hav i n g different powe rs from the b i s h o p , cannot contro l th e check i n g squa r e , so White b i tes the dust. I n the game S a i dy-F i s c h e r , M etropo l itan L e a g u e 1 969, F i s c h e r p l ayed 33 . . . , R x B ; 34 R x R , O-K8 ch ; 35 K-R 2 , 0 x R , and W h i te res i g n e d . B l ac k a l so has an overworked piece try, which does n 't work (33 . . . , B x P?; 34 R x B , R x B; 35 R x BP) and a mati ng-net atte mpt that does w i n : 33 . . . , O-B6 . W h i te has these choices : (a) 34 0 x P, B-K5 ; 35 K-B 1 , O-R8 ch ; 36 K-K2 , B-B6 ch ! ; 37 K-02 ( i f 37 K-K3 , R-R 1 ; 38 R-R 1 , R-K 1 ch ; 39 K-0 2 , R-K7 ch ; 40 K-B 3 , 0 x R ch) , 0-08 ch ; 38 K-B3 ( not 3 8 K-K3 , O-K7 mate ) , 0 x R a n d wins. ( b) 3 4 R-R 3 , R x B ; 35 R x R , B-K5 ; 36 R x P c h , K-N 3 , and Wh ite can 't escape mate . (c) 34 O-R 3 , 0-08 ch ; 35 K-R 2 , O-K B8 ! ; 36 O-N 2 , B-K5 ; 37 P-B 3 , 0 x B P ; 38 R-R 1 , R x B , w i n n i n g t h e b i s h o p and m ai nta i n i n g t h e attack. (d) 34 O-N 3 , O-K7 ; 35 R-R 1 , R x B , a g a i n winning the b i s h o p . A s y o u c a n s e e , su bstant i a l a n a l y s i s i s needed t o verify the soundness of 33 . . . , O-B6 , which can consum e a great deal of time over the board . Fischer's move wins a p i ece and the g a m e by a c l e a r and s i m p l e two-move . com bi nation-so it's the much bette r c h o i c e . White t o move can stop the c o m b i n ation b y 34 K-R 2 o r b y various queen m oves (34 O-R 2 , 34 0-0 2 , etc .) . Even better-l o o k i n g i s 34 O-N 5 w i th a d o u b l e attack on rook and K R P , but B l ac k rep l ies 34 . . . , O-B6 ; 35 a x R , B-K5 , forc i n g m ate . Consequently, White 's defense must a l s o take t h e s t i n g out o f . . . , O-B6 , etc . For th i s add itional pu rpose , 34 0-02 works wel l : 34 . . . , O-B 6 ; 35 R-R 3 , R x B ; 36 0 x B ch ( n ot 36 R x R , B-K5 ; 3 7 K-B 1 , P-0 6 ! , fo rc i n g mate) O x O ; 3 7 R x O , P-B4 , and White has escaped the m at i n g dangers with mate r i a l equa l ity . The o n l y tro u b l e is that B l ac k sti l l wins t h e e n d g a m e because W h i te can 't defend h i s O B P ( i f 38 R-0 1 , R-R 6 ; 3 9 R-O B 1 , R-B6 ! , s o W h i te m u s t counte r with 39 R-N 1 , R-B6 ; 40 R-N 6 , R x BP; 4 1 R x P , but B l ack's two connected passed pawns are too stro n g ) . · Review of Basic Elements / 286 This next position is not quite as complicated; work it out for each side to move. Review of Basic Elements / 287 Answer B l ack to move can sta rt a series of captures of the sort cove red i n Chapte r 1 0 b y p l ayi ng 1 9 . . . , N x P i nstead o f moving h i s queen . There wou l d fol l ow 20 B x 0 , N x O; 2 1 B x 8 , N x R; 22 B x R, R x 8; 23 R x N , and White ends u p a p i ece ahead . Note that White i s the first p l ayer i n the series ( B l ack esta b l i s hes mate r i a l equa l i ty by h i s n i n eteenth move but then catches u p with each captu re) and fo l l ows i t through to the end to his advantage. I f White d i g resses from the series before the end , he rema i n s a p a w n beh i nd ; f o r examp l e , 2 1 P x N , B x B ; 22 B x P , OR-N 1 ; 23 B-N 2 , R x P . I n the game Ben ko-F i scher, Buenos Ai res 1 960, B l ack c ho s e t o move h i s queen, 1 9 . . . , O-N 3 . Benko conti n ued 20 O-N 3 , N x P; 21 N-05, O-B 2 ; 22 B-R 6 , with a w i n ni n g g a m e . (The rema i n i ng moves were 22 . . . , P-83 ; 23 B x B , 0 x B ; 24 0 x 0 ch , K x O ; 25 N-87, K-B3 ; 26 N x R , R x N ; 27 P-N 3 , and B l ack res i g n e d . ) W i t h W h i te t o move , t h e r e i s no p rob l em : 20 B x 0 w i n s . This position should be even easier ; see what you can find for White to play and for Black to play. Review of Basic Elements / 288 Answer Th i s pos i t i o n occurred in the e i g hth game of the Fischer-Spassky World Champ i o ns h i p M atch 1 972 . Spassky had a l ready l ost the exchange (see the pos ition i n Chapter 8 , page 1 52) and now ove rl ooked a s i m p l e d i s­ cove ry-zwischenzug combi nati on (Ch apter 1 0) . F i scher p l ayed 20 N-0 5, w hi c h d i scovered on B l ack's queen and b i shop and al s o th reate ned N x P ch. Spassky p l ayed 20 . . . , 0 x 0 , but F i scher won a pawn by i nter­ pos i n g 21 N x P ch , K-B 1 ; 22 R x 0. At th i s po i nt the k n i ght is l oose , but so is B l ack's b i shop. The conti nuation was 22 . . , K x N ; 23 R x B , and Fischer won eas i l y . B l ac k has the desperado try 22 . . . , B x RP, w h i c h is met by the counterdesperado 23 N x P ch, R P x N; 24 R x B. B l ack to move can stop the combination by 20 . . . , B-K3 but can do much bette r by 20 . . . , B x N. After 21 0 x B, 0 x O; 22 R x 0, B x R P ; 2 3 R-R 1 , B-K3 ; 2 4 R-B7 ( not 2 4 R x P ? ? , R-N8 ch ; 25 B-B 1 , B-R 6 and mates) . K-B 1 , B l a c k reta i n s two pawns for the exchange. . Now decide what to do for White to move and for Black to move here. Review of Basic !Elements I 289 Answer White has an advanced pawn at 07, which he shou l d try to exp l oit, as covered in Chapter 1 1 . White's rook i s threatened , but i f he takes the t i m e to s ave it (36 R-06) , then 36 . . . , B-B3 , and the big pawn d i e s . I n the game Fischer-Be r l i ne r , U .S . Champions h i p 1 960-1 961 , Fischer p l ayed 36 B--B7. B l ack res igned , for i f 36 . . . , B x R; 37 B x R, and the pawn cannot be stopped from queen i n g . The a l ternatives 36 . . . , R x P; 37 R x R, and 36 . . . , R-R 1 ; 37 P-08 = O ch are , of course , hope l e s s . B l a c k t o move p l ays 36 . . . , B x R and w i n s (37 B-B7 , R x P) . What would you do for White to play and for Black to play in the position below? Review of Basic Elements / 290 Answer In Chapter 1 2 you were s hown various uses . of mating . threats as part of combinations, including the . w:eak back rank, as i l l ustrated here. I n Aaron-Fischer, Stockholm 1 962 , Fischer p l ayed 2 9 . . , R x N , a n d White gave up. If 30 P x R , 0-NB ch and mates as soon as Wh ite g ives away his rook and queen . Note that th e white queen 's i nterpos ition at K B 1 is covered by B l ack's b ishop once the rook moves . White to move can stop the combi nation i n various ways , such as 30 P-KN3, 30 P�R3; 30 O-K3 . . Here is one last position, .a very simple one to end our review with. Pick a move for each side to play. Review of Basic Elements / 291 Answer This position arose in G i baud-Lazard , Paris 1 924 ( after the moves 1 P-04 , N-KB3 ; 2 N-02, P-K4 ; 3 P x P, N-N S ; 4 P-KR 3 ? ? ) , which is perhaps the shortest master game on record . Wh ite threatened 5 P x N and no doubt expected 4 . . . , N x KP. B l ac k p l ayed i nstead 4 . . . , N-K6 , and Wh ite res igned. The o n l y way to save the cornered queen i s 5 P x N, which a l l ows 5 , 0-RS c h ; 6 P-KN3, 0 x N P mate . .. . . Review of Basic Elements / 292 C H APT E R Combined Operations I In most of the positions you have been asked to work out, you have had clues about what ,, to look for-,-from the chapter topic, from the grouping of chapter subtopics, . or from comments given with the positions. This was done intentionally in order to allow you to learn one thing at a time-to develop your ability through mostly successful responses. Naturally, you do not have these clues during an actual game. Instead, any one or a combination of the basic elements may be present. More­ over, although an element on which to base a combination may be present, it may tum out to be unworkable, or it may be met by a co\Jnter­ combination. Having come this far, you should have a fair chance to find out what works and what doesn't. The positions in this chapter give you that chance. The positions are not hard, though some of them are tricky and may fool you if you aren't careful. So think before you act. For each position, decide, as usual, what to do for White to play and for Black to play, starting with the one below. " II t Combined Operations I / 293 Answer This pos ition is from Em. Lasker-Reti , New York 1 924, with White to p l ay. Lasker won by setti ng up a kni ght fork : 30 Q.,...N 7 ch, 0 x 0 (forced) ; 3 1 P x 0 ch, K-N 1 (forced aga i n , but now B l ack's king i s i n position for the fork) ; 32 N-K7 ch, B l ack resigns. There is no hope if B l ack conti nues 32 . . . , K x P ; 33 R x R, R x R; 34 N x R, etc . With B lack to move , it is a different .story, s i nce 30 . . , R x R; 31 R x R , R x R fi n i shes off Wh ite . . Decide for White to play and for Black to play. Combined Operations I / 294 Answer B l ac k to p l ay wins not by 49 . . . , B x R ? ; 50 R x R, but by 49 . . . , B-K5 c h ; 5 0 P-B3 ( i f 50 K-N 1 , R x R mate ) , B x P c h ; 5 1 K-N 1 , R x R ch (or 5 1 . . . , B x R ) . The p i n on the b i s hop negates the d i rect captu re , wh i l e the d i scovery check l ets B l ack e l i m i nate the p i n n i n g rook . I n the g a m e F l o h r-Capa b l anca , N ottingham 1 936, Wh ite t o move had the prob l e m of how best to avo i d the th reat and cash in on his exchange advantage . One way i s 49 R (2)-02 , but this does not win the p i nned b i shop because of 49 . . . , B-K5 ch ; 50 K-N 1 , R-N3 ch. In fact, afte r 51 K-B 1 , B-B 6 ; . 52 R-B 1 , R-N 7 , W h i te must fight to u nta n g l e h i mself ( e . g . , 53 R-08 ch, K-R2 ; 54 K-K1 , R x RP; etc . ) . F l o h r d i d much bette r , a n d you p robably d i d , too , i f y o u real ized that . . . , B x R i s n o t yet a th reat. The s i m p l e , good move fo r W h i te is 49 P-B3 , B x R (otherw i s e , w i t h check taken away, W h i te wi l l w i n t h e b i shop by 5 0 R ( 2 )-02) ; 50 R x R , and F l o h r won eas i ly. Decide for White to play and for Black to play. Combined Operations U I 295 Answer I n the game B o l e s l avs ky-Bonda revsky, U S S R Champ i o n s h i p 1 94 1 , White had re l i ed on B l ack's i n a b i l ity to p l ay 26 . . . , B x 0 (27 R x R ch and mate n ext move ) . I nstead, B l ack p l ayed 26 . . ., R-KN 1 , crus h i n g White . By u n p i n n i n g th e b i s h o p , B l ack th reatens 27 . . ., B x O; in add iti o n , by supporti n g the queen o n the KN fi l e , B l ack th reatens mate o n the back ran k . Wh ite tri ed to escape with 27 0-03 but gave u p afte r 27 . . ., O-N8 ch. It may seem that 28 R-0 1 i s a n adequate defe n s e , u nti l you try 28 . . . , R-B8 ch (forc i n g 29 R x R , 0 x R mate ) . Wh ite t o m ove i s not ready t o w i n the b i s h o p , because 2 7 R x B , R x R ; 28 0 x R l e aves the back rank open to 28 . . . , O-N 8 c h ( o r 28 . . . , O-K8 ch) . The s i m p l e preparati o n 27 P-R3 avo ids the back-ra n k b u s i ness and l eaves B l ac k u n a b l e to save · h i s p i n n ed b i s h o p . I f 27 . . ., R-KN 1 ; 28 R x B , O-N8 c h ; 2 9 0 x 0 , R x 0 ch ; 3 0 K-R2 , R ( 1 )-B8 ? ; 3 1 R-R8 ch a n d mate s . O r i f 27 . . . , O-N 3 ; 28 R ( 2 ) - R 2 , etc . Decide for White to play and for Black to play. Combined Operations I / 296 Answer I n the game Fischer-Sa idy, New J e rsey Open 1 957, Fischer p l ayed 14 N x RP, w i n n i ng a pawn , based on the two-to-one attack and on White 's abil ity to get the kn i g ht back to safety . Fischer was a b l e to get h i s knight back after 1 4 . . . , P-K4 ; 1 5 P x P , P x P ; 1 6 B-K3 (not 1 6 B x KP?, R x N), O-N 1 ; 17 N-NS . You s h o u l d have noticed that Wh ite has a chance to w i n much more by a s i m p l e guard remova l : 14 B x N, B x B; 15 0 x N . The tro u b l e is that B l ack reg a i n s h i s p i ece b y 1 5 . . . , O-N3 ch ; 1 6 K-R 1 , 0 x N . There i s another a l te rnative fo r Wh ite : 1 4 B x R P , and if 1 4 . . . , R x B ; 1 5 N x R , O-N3 ch ; 1 6 O-B2 saves the k n i ght. But aga i n , th i s i s n 't a l l , for B l ack conti nues 1 6 . . . , O-N 2 ; 1 7 P-O R4 (to extri cate the k n i ght) , N-N S ; 1 B 0-04 , B-KB3 , and Black captu res the kn i g ht after a l l . B l ack to move s h o u l d save h i s O R P by 1 4 . . . , P-O R3 and then retreat or protect h i s b i shop at KS ( now, with Wh ite 's knight gone, i n danger of the gua rd-removal sequence ) . Decide for White t o play and for Black t o play. Combined Operations I / · 297 Answer Here, the w i n n i n g move for W h i te i s easy i f you g i ve the pos ition a second look. F i s c h e r a g a i n st Steke l , Santiago 1 959, p l ayed 35 B-K7 , and B l ack res igned . His knight i s i m m ob i l ized by the p i n , so the s kewer p i cks up B l ack's b i s hop (35 . . . , O-R 1 ; 36 B x B J . B l a c k t o move can save h i s b i shop but not the g a m e . One try i s to force the exchange of queens by 35 . . . , O-N 4 , but the resu l t i n g endgame i s hope l e s s . H oweve r , i f B l ack saves his b i s hop by 35 . . . , B-N4 o r 35 . . . , R-K 1 , W h i te deve lops a powe rfu l attack on the KR fi l e ( e . g . , 35 . . . . B-N 4 ; 36 P-R 5 , R-R 1 ; 37 R-KR 1 , B-07 ; 38 K-B 1 , B x P ; 39 B-K7 ! , O-K3 ; 40 O-R 5 and w i n s ) . Decide for White to play and for Black to play. Combined Og:1erations I / 298 Answer Wh ite 's hopes for advantage are not based on mate r i a l (for B l ac k has two pawns for the exchange) but o n his advanced paw n . Without v i g o rous p l ay , White can eas i l y l ose his OP; for exa m p l e , 1 P-07, R-0 1 ; 2 OR-0 1 , B-0 5 ; etc . I n the game Engels-Maroczy, Dresden 1 936, W hi te sacrificed to clear the path for his pawn : 1 R x B , Q x R; 2 Q x R ch ! , N x O; 3 P-07. The pawn queen s , and White ends u p with an extra rook agai nst th ree pawns . B l ac k to p l ay s h o u l d go afte r the pawn by 1 . . . , R-0 1 even though W h i te gets the KRP i n retu rn : 2 O-R4 , R x P; 3 Q x P , N-B 5 ; 4 B-R4, R-K3 ; 5 KR-0 1 , B-05 , with a g o o d game for B l ac k . Decide for White to play and for Black to play. Combined Operations I I 299 Answer In th i s pos i tion , from the twenty-fi rst game of the Wo r l d C h a m p i onsh i p M atch 1 95 1 between Botvi n n i k a n d Bronste i n , B l ack p l ayed 5 6 . . . , K-03 and was a b l e to wi n eventu a l l y . B ronste i n cou l d h ave won q u i ckly by 56 . . . , N-K3 , h itti n g at White 's hard-pressed m i n o r p i eces. White's k n i g ht i s needed to help p rotect the bishop; once it i s e l i m i nated , B l ac k wins a p i ece . Wh ite has no way t o save h i ms e l f . If 57 N x N , R x N ch ; 58 K-N 5 , K x N . If 57 R-K B 3 , N x N ; 58 R x N , N x B. If 57 P-N4 , N x N ; 5 8 K x N , R x B . O r i f 5 7 R-R 7 c h , K-03; 58 N-B7 c h , K-B4, and Wh ite gets mated . Wh ite to p l ay must break th i n g s u p , which he can do by 57 R-KB3 , 57 R-R 2 , or 57 P-N4. He rem a i n s a pawn beh i n d , howeve r . Decide for White t o play and fo r Black t o play. Combined Operations I / 300 Answer Th i s pos ition occurred i n the game G. Thomas-Euwe , Nottingham 1 936 ( d u r i n g Euwe's two-year te n u re as wo rld cham p i o n ) . It seems that White can w i n a p i ece by 23 R x B , R x R ; 24 0 x R . Look a l ittl e further and you ' l l see that Black can fight back by 24 . . . , R-0 1 , s kewe r i n g W h ite's queen and rook. If then 25 0 x 0 , B l ack i nterposes 25 . . . , R x R ch ; 26 K-B 2 , and then 26 . . , N x 0. It now l ooks as though · W h i te wi l l l ose his rook in tu r n , w h i c h is as far as Thomas l ooke d . Conv i n ced that the world champion knew what he was doi n g , Thomas p l ayed 23 P-N3 ? a n d m i ssed h i s chance for v i ctory. For, after 2 3 R x B , R x R ; 2 4 0 x R , R-0 1 , White holds h i s l oot b y 25 N-0 7 . For exa m p l e , after 25 . . . , 0 x O ; 2 6 R x 0 , B l ack can 't p l ay 2 6 . . , N-B 1 i m m ed i ate ly . because o f the d i s­ covery check 27 N-B6 ch. If 26 . . . , K-R 1 , Wh ite . makes use of the one­ move b reather to p rotect h i s rook (2 7 B-R3) so that he can move h i s . kn ight away safe l y . B lack t o move should save h i s b i shop, as by 23 . . . , B-B4 ch ( Euwe's move i n reply to 23 P-N3) . . . Decide for White to play and for Black to play. Combined Operations I / 301 Answer W i th B l ac k to move , the answer is s i m p l e : . . . , B x 0 settles matters . It was Wh i te to move i n a game Capab l anca-Fo n a roff. White cou l d tam e l y move h i s queen away o r cou l d try 20 P-KB4 ? ! S i nce t h e b i shop must stay o n the long diagonal to p revent mate , B l ac k must defend carefu l l y . S i nce 20 . . . , B-B 3 ? l oses to 21 P-KS , the o n l y s afe move is 20 . . . , B x N P . Now 21 P-B3 can be met by 21 . . . , P-KN3 and 21 R-N 1 by 2 1 . . . , O-N 3 ch ; 22 K-R 1 , P-N 3 . I n stead , Capab l a nca rattled off 20 N-R6 c h , K-R 1 (forced) ; 2 1 0 x B ! , 0 x O ; 22 N x P c h , w i n n i n g eas i l y . S i nce t h e d e s i r a b l e answer 22 . . . , R x N a l l ows 2 3 R-08 ch and mate on the back rank , B l ack i s l eft with 22 . . . , K-N 1 ; 23 N x 0 , and W h i te has won a p i ece. Decide for White to play a n d for Black to play. Combined Operations I / 302 Answer This pos ition arose in the game Wex l e r-Fischer, Buenos Ai res 1 960, with White on move . W h i te has a rook and pawn fo r b i shop and knight, but there are seve ral tacti c a l poss i b i l ities i n the air. From B l ack's p o i nt of view, 34 . . . , N x R ; 35 B x 0 , N x O ; 36 B x R trades even l y but l oses because of Wh ite's advanced KP (36 . . . , N-0 6 ; 37 P-K7) . But 34 . . . , O-B3 i s very powe rfu l ; 35 P-B3 is necessary to stop mate , whereupon 35 . . . , N x R; 36 0-02, N x R demo l i shes White . W h i te has some attractive poss i b i l ities , but must reckon with B l ack's potenti al to th reaten mate . If 34 R-07, O-B3 ; 35 P-B3, N x P ch; 36 K-B2 , N x R ; 37 0 x N , O-N 7 c h ; 38 K-K3 , R-K1 . Or if 34 R ( 3 )-K3 , O-B3 ; 3 5 P-B3, N x P c h ; 3 6 R x N , 0 x R ; 37 0-02, R-K1 . There i s a s i mp l e w a y , p l ayed b y Wexl e r : 34 B x N . Usua l ly one doesn 't w a n t t o l iq u i date a p i nned p i ece, but the variations above show that B l ack is not bothered by the p i n . H e re the oapture gets r i d of a key p i ece for B l ack's attack, and more . The obvious reply i s 34 . . . , B x B, which l oses to 35 R-07 ch. Fischer tried 34 . . . , O-B3 , but 35 P-B3 stopped the mate , and Wh ite won . Decide for White to play and for Black to play. Combined Operations I / 303 Answer Th i s position i s from the game F i s c h e r-Wad e , Buenos A i res 1 960, with Wh ite to move . Black threate ns 38 . . . , 0 x B P ch, not to menti o n 38 . . , 0 x R P . White 's kn i g ht is i n between Wh ite 's rook and B l ack's quee n , w h i c h s h o u l d suggest a d i scovery poss i b i l ity t o you . I n additi o n , movi ng the knight exposes p rotection for the KBP from Wh ite's queen and p ro­ tecti on for the K A P from Wh ite 's roo k . The question is where to move the knight to do damage . There are no d i rect captures or checks , but there i s a square where the knight w i l l fork rook and king (at KR6) . F i scher p l ayed 38 N-N4, and Wade chose to g ive up h i s queen by 38 . . . , P x N ; 39 R x 0, P x R but could not save the g a m e . The a lterna­ tive i s 38 . . . , 0-BS, g i v i n g White the c h o i ce of 39 N-R6 ch, K-R 2 ; 4 0 N x R , 0 x N , o r 3 9 N-B6 c h , R x N ; 4 0 0 x R , 0 x 0 ; 4 1 P x 0 . I n either case , Wh ite w i n s without much trou b l e . B l ac k t o p l ay , as a l ready menti oned, h a s 3 8 . . . , 0 x B P c h . Once B l ack b reaks i n with his heavy p i eces , White has l ittl e chance to s u rvive . In fact, Black mates by 39 K-R 1 , O-K8 ch ; 40 K-N 2 , R-B7 c h ; 41 K-N 3 , P-R S ch ; 42 0 x P , O-KN8 ch ; 4 3 N-N 2 , 0 x N m ate . . Decide for White to play and for Black to play . Combined Operations I / 304 Answer Wh ite can p l ay 53 N x P , but has a much better cho i c e . N ote that 53 R-K7 wou l d be m ate except for . . . . B x R, so B l ack's b i s hop is a focal po i nt for attack. Fischer against Sanchez, Santiago 1 959, p l ayed 53 B-02 . B l ack can 't p l ay 53 . . . . B x B because of 54 R-K7 m ate . M ov i n g the b i shop away to m a i ntai n the guard agai nst mate l eaves the k n i g ht u n p rotected (53 . . . . B-B4 ; 54 B x N ) . Another futi l e try is 53 . . . . N-B3 ; 54 B x B, and B l ac k dare not recaptu re. Sanchez chose to res i g n . B l ac k t o move c a n save h i s p i ece b y m ov i n g h i s b i shop o r kn i g ht, but then White gets the KRP (53 . . . . N-B 3 ; 54 N x P) and can soon start h i s own K R P ro l l i n g with dead ly effect. If B l ack tries 53 . . . . B-B 1 ; 54 N x P, B x N ; 55 R x B , R x P, Wh ite has 56 B x P (exp l oiting the p i n ) , R-B2 ; 57 B-R 4 , K-K2 ; 5 8 P-B4, P x P ; 5 9 P-K5 , etc . Decide for White to play and for Black to play. Combined Operations I / 305 Answer W h i te to p l ay wi l l happ i l y win the exchange by 26 N x R, R x N . I n the game Kashdan-Ste i n e r , Pasadena 1 932, B l ac k to move faced the p rob l e m of where to put his rook. H e chose 25 . . , R-N 1 , w h i c h p rotects h i s O N P . The m a i n a l te rnative is 25 . , R x P, and i f 26 0 x N P , R-N 6 , a n d B l ac k 's p i eces a r e m u c h more active than after B l ack's actu a l twenty­ fifth move . But White has a better rep l y , prov i n g 25 . , R x P? to be a m i stake : 26 N-K4 . B l ack has l ittl e choice but to p l ay 26 . . . , R x O ; 2 7 N x 0 c h , P x N ; 2 8 P x R , leaving W h i te the exchange ahead . I n th i s case , W h i te i s t h e second p l ayer i n t h e exchange s e r i e s b u t comes out ahead because his capture i s with check (forc i n g B l ac k to recapture and end the series) and because B l ack's desperado p i ece ( rook) i s more va l u a b l e than Wh ite's ( k n i g ht) . . . . . . Decide for White to play and for Black to play. Combined Operations I / 306 Answer With a l i tt l e v i s u a l ization of a dou b l e-attac k patte r n , you ' l l fi n d the move p l ayed by Fischer as B l ac k agai nst H e a rst, Metropol itan League 1 957 : 35 . . . , R x P . Wh ite can hardly take t h e r o o k (36 R x R ) because of 36 . . . , B x N ch ; 37 K�K2 , B x R . That l e aves 36 R-R 5 , to w h i c h F i scher rep l i ed 36 . . . , B x N ch; 37 R x B, R-KB5 ch ; 38 K-K3 , R x P , and B l ack was two pawns u p . Natura l ly this l i ne i s bette r than w i n n i n g j ust one pawn by 35 . . . , R-KB5 c h ; 36 K-K3 , R x P. Wh ite to p l ay w i n s by 36 N x R . Decide for White to play and for Black to play. Combined Operations I / 307 Answer This i s from the game G l i goric-Fischer, Pa l m a de M a l l orca 1 970 , with B l ac k to m ove . Wh ite i s a p i ece down but th reatens 22 B x R and-even m o re seriously-22 B-B 3 , corne r i n g the queen . If you see o n l y the fi rst th reat and move the rook , you ' l l be sorry. If you see both th reats , the right move is easy to fi n d . Fischer p l ayed 21 . . . , O-K4 , sav i n g the queen w h i l e protecting the rook . Th i s g i ves back the exchange, but afte r 22 B-B3, O-K2 ; 23 B x R, Q x B , B l ac k had two m i n or p i eces fo r a rook and pawn , with a. good game .. Fischer went on to w i n i n 35 move s . Decide for White to play and for Black to play. Combined Operations I I 308 Answer This positi o n , from Reshevs ky-N aj d o rf, Dal l as 1 957, i l l ustrates d rawaway. Reshevsky p u t t h e g a m e o n i c e b y 2 7 R - K B c h ; O R x N . S i n c e B l ac k ' s KR p rotects the q u ee n , 2 7 . . . , R W h i t e g ets t h e q u een f o r o n l y a roo k ( 2 8 0 N aj d o rf at least g ets rook and k n i g h t fo r x the x x a simple R ; 28 N x 0, R ? i s worse, f o r 0 ) . T h e m ove c h o s e n by queen. Al ways m ake t h e best of a bad b a rg ai n ! B l a c k t o move can stop t h e tt:J reat best b y 2 7 . . . , 0 tri c ky 28 P x 0 , N - B 6 c h ; 29 K-B 1 , N x x 0 , and g o i nto t h e R ; 30 N - B 7 c h , K-N 1 ; 3 1 N x R , N-0 6 ! 32 N-B6, R-N2 ; 33 R-0 1 , N -B 5 . Decide for White to play and for Black to play. Combined Operations I / 309 Answer The magic move for Wh ite i s 32 O-N 5 , w h i c h attacks the rook and th reatens N-B6 ch (exp l oiting the p i n ) . This i s from the game G rau-F i n e , Warsaw 1 935, i n w h i c h F i n e tried 32 . . . , N-02 i n reply t o 32 O-N 5 . G rau conti nued 3 3 R x N , w i n n i n g B l ack's queen . Whi chever way B l ack recaptu res, 34 N-B6 ch does the trick, so F i n e res i g n e d . White cou l d a l s o conti nue 3 3 N-B6 c h , N x N ; 3 4 P x N , w i n n i ng i n a d i fferent way. The idea i s that B l ack's queen cannot successfu l l y guard agai nst the th reatened mate and p rotect the roo k . I f 34 . . . , P-N 3 ; 35 O-R 6 , O-B 1 ; 36 R x R and mate next move . Black to move sti l l has a d ifficult t i m e . If 32 . . . , O-K2 ; 33 P-B6 w i n s (33 . . , P x P ; 34 P x P , O-K 1 ; 35 O-R 6 , N-K3 ; 36 N-N5 and mates ; o r 33 . . . , O-B2 ; 3 4 P x P , K x P ; 35 O-B6 c h , K-N 1 ; 36 R x R). Th i s leaves the choice of mov i n g the rook away (32 . . . , R-B 1 ) , which a l l ows White a stron g l y posted roo k , or trad i n g rooks (32 . . . , R x R ; 33 P x R ) , wh ich g i ves Wh ite a very strong pawn cente r . . Decide for White t o play and for Black to play. Combined Operations I / 310 Answer Th i s position i s from Fischer-Feuerste i n , U .S . Champion s h i p 1 957-1 958, with White to m ove . B lack th reatens . . . , N-K7 ch, and White has mati ng poss i b i l it i es i f he can get his queen i nto KB6 and KN7. The issue from White 's po i nt of v i ew i s whether he can exp l o i t the l atter without suffe r­ i n g the fo rmer. Cautious p l ay by 36 K-N2 , avo i d i n g the k n i ght fo rk, l ets B l ac k p l ay 36 . ., 0-0 1 , preventi ng entry by Wh ite's queen . Fi scher p l ayed 36 N x N, s i m u ltaneou s l y c l earing his KB6 square and getting rid of the defen d i n g k n i ght. B l ack made the · forced rep ly 36 . . ., 0-0 1 (36 . . ., R x N ; 37 O-B6 c h , K-N 1 ; 38 O-N 7 mate ) ; 37 0 x 0, R x 0 . At th i s p o i nt, Fischer had won a k n i ght by u s i n g h i s threat of mate , but B l ack threatened both 37 . . . , N-K7 ch an& 37 . . . , R x N. White could then w i n by 3 7 R x P , R x N; 38 R-B 7 , winning the O R P as we l l . Fischer p l ayed the even better 37 N-06 and soon won . B l ac k could then w i n a rook by a kn ight fork, to w h i ch W h i te rep l i es i n k i n d : 37 . . . , N-K7 ch ; 38 K-B 1 , N x R ; 39 N x P c h , K-N 1 ; 40 N x R , remai n i n g a p i ece ahead . B lack cou l d p l ay 37 . . ., R x N ; 38 P x R , N-K7 ch ; 39 K-B 1 , N x R with mate r i a l equa l ity-u nti l Wh ite's pawn at 06 promotes i n two more moves. With B l ack to p l ay, the k n i g ht fork h its first: 3 7 . . . , N-K7 ch ; 38 K-N2, N x R, and B l ack comes out the exchange ahead after either 39 0 x N or 39 N x N , 0-0 1 ; 40 O x N , O x N . . In this chapter, you have been solving over-the-board combinations with­ out any clues other than your own awareness and recognition of com­ binational elements. Now it is important to see what you can do against real opponents. In playing an actual game, you will be selecting moves in a series of positions. Unlike the positions in this book, which, of course, have been carefully selected, many game positions contain no particular combinations. But some do, and your alertness will pay off hand�;omely. Combined Operations I I 31 1 CHAPTER Com bin ed Operation s II This chapter is much like the last-a series of positions in which your task is to choose what to do with White to move and with Black to move, without any clues. The difference is that most-but not all-of the positions in this chapter are a bit more complex. Consequently, you may not be able to solve many of the positions unless ( a ) you have absorbed the preceding material well and ( b ) you strive to think care­ fully and do not jump to hasty conclusions . I have selected these posi­ tions to challenge you . Most of the time, you will have to look beyond what should now be the obvious. On the other hand, don't ignore the obvious either. If you're ready, here is your first position. Combined Operations I I / 3 1 2 Answer Th i s position is from the game G runfe l d-A l e kh i n , Karl sbad 1 923 , with B l ac k to m ove . A l e kh i n p l ayed 32 . . . , 0-85, c reat i n g a s i tuation in w h i c h a l l t h r e e o f Wh ite 's p i eces are under attac k . I f 33 R x R , 0 x O ; o r if 33 0-8 3 , 0 x N. G runfe l d tried 33 0 x 0 , met by a zwischenzug (33 . . , R x R c h ) and a d r i veaway (34 0-8 1 , B-05 c h ) . G ru nfe l d res i g ned here, s i nce his o n l y choice was 35 K-R 1 , R x 0 mate . Natura l l y A l e kh i n 's 34 . . . , B-05 ch was much better than 34 . . , R x 0 c h ; 35 K x R , 8 x P. W ith t he move , White can p revent the comb i n ation by 33 P-K5 . Less successfu l are 33 R x R, 8 x R c h ; 34 K-B 1 , 8-N3 fo l l owed by 35 . . . , 0-84 , and 33 N-83 , R x R ch ; 34 0 x R , 8 x N ; 35 P x 8 , 0 x P . . . Decide for White to play and for Black to play. Combined Operations II I 31 3 Answer I n th i s pos ition , from B i s g u i e r-F ischer, U .S . Cham p i onsh i p 1 960-1 961 , W h i te has a b i s hop and two pawns tor a rook and wou l d have a fi ne game i f he c o u l d get h i s p i eces organ i zed to support hi s two passed pawn s . With the m ove , Wh ite ends the game by 30 R x 0 . B l ack's problems are t o save h i s queen w i thout abandon i n g h i s k n i g h t , a n d t o t r y t o take advantage o f h i s bette r p i ece p l acement wh i l e he can . Four p i ece captures a re poss i b l e : (a) (b) (c) (d) 29 . . 29 29 . 29 . . . . . ., , ., ., . Nx 0x Rx 0x R ; 30 0 x 0-no good . R ; 30 N x 0 , N x N-not quite e n o u g h tor the quee n . N ; 30 R x 0-too bad . N-pay d i rt ! T h e fou rth captu re, p l ayed b y F i s c h e r , l ooks as b a d as t h e others unti l you rea l ize the effect of B l ac k 's next move . The game continued 30 B x 0 , N x R ; 3 1 0-04 , N x B : B l ac k emerges with R + R + N a g a i n st 0 + P + P , a wi n n i n g advantage. T h e c o m b i nation itse lf i nvolves g i v i n g u p B l ack's queen tor a roo k , b i s h o p , and knight ( n i n e to e l even i n p o i n t va l u e ) . Decide for White t o play and for Black t o play. Combined Operations II / 314 Answer Th i s pos i t i o n , from Sai dy-F i s c h e r , U .S . C h a m p i o n s h i p 1 960-1 961 , g ives you a chance to work w i th d i scovered check. B l ac k has th i s poss i b i l ity by movi n g h i s b i s h o p . The most destructive b i s h o p m ove h e re is 33 , B x P ch ; 34 K-K2 , B x N , w i n n i n g a p i e c e . I n t h e g a m e i t w a s White 's m ove , and S a i dy natu ra l l y avo ided the d i s cove ry by 33 K-K2. Th i s takes precedence over 33 R x BP, w h i c h a l l ows 33 . . , B-0 1 ch ; 34 K-K2 , B x R . . . . . Decide for White to play and for Black to play. Combined Operations II I 315 Answer Obvi ously, White has a strong g a m e , but it's hard to see how to break throug h . The w i n n i n g idea, p l ayed by A l e kh i n agai nst Yate s , London 1 92 2 , u s e s a corne r i n g maneuver b a s e d on mat i n g th reats . Wh ite started by 36 N-B6 , threate n i n g the rook . S i nce 36 . . . , P x N a l l ows 37 R-KR 7 mate, B l ack p l ayed 36 . . . , KR-KB 1 . Wh i l e th i s m ove abandons the KNP to save the rook , i t aims at the k n i ght. N everthe l e s s , A l e kh i n conti nued 37 R x P, a l l ow i n g 37 R x N i n rep l y . But now Alekhin p l ayed 38 K-K5 , caus i n g Yates t o res i g n . I f B l ac k saves t h e rook by e ither 38 . . . , R (3 )-B 1 o r 38 . . . , R ( 1 )-KB 1 . White mates by 39 R-KR 7 c h , K-N 1 ; 40 R ( B 7)-KN 7 mate . Once the rook is captu red , the wh ite k i n g h e l ps generate further mati ng threats . B l a ck to move can take care of the i m m e d i ate threat by trad i n g one pair of rooks by 36 . . . , KR-O B 1 (or 36 . . . , O R-OB 1 ; 37 R-R7 , R-R 1 ) . But the white k i n g can sti l l penetrate a t KS , i n th i s case to gobble pawn s , and B lack c a n hard l y hope t o hold t h e g a m e . . . .• Decide for White t o play and for Black t o play. Combined Operations II / 316 Answer Although mate r i a l i s eve n , B l ack has the bette r game because he has a pawn-protected passed pawn . I n the game R eti-Las ker, M a h r . Ostrau 1 923 , White p l ayed 31 N-N 6 , fo r k i n g the rooks . Th i s much i s obvi o u s , but i f y o u l o o ked as d e e p l y as Las ke r , y o u d i scovered that B l ack comes out a l l r i g ht. The s o l ution i s to counte rattack with the k n i ght, u s i n g a step p i n g-stone chec k : 3 1 . . . , N-07 c h ; 32 K-N 1 ( i f 32 R x N , Q x 0 ) , N-B5, fo rking queen a n d rook i n retu rn . R e t i chose t o trade k n i g hts , 33 N x N , 0 x N , and Las ker won i n anoth e r ten move s . Another choice i s 33 N x O R , 0 x R ; 3 4 0 x 0 , N x Q , w h i c h trades m o re p i eces but a l s o g i ves B l a c k a c h a n c e t o go w r o n g by t h e a m b itious 33 . . . , R x N . H ere, B l ack h o p e s t o w i n a whole r o o k .and c o m e out a kn i g ht ahead , b u t 34 0-05 punctures t h a t b a l l o o n . F r o m t h e o r i g i n a l pos i ti o n , 3 1 N-K3 i s a reasonable a l ternative, though B l ack ca n reach · the same position as i n the game b y 3 1 . . . , N-K7 c h ; 32 K-N 1 , N-B 5 ; 3 3 N x N , Q x N . B l ack to move w i n s b y 3 1 . , Q x N c h . . . Decide for White to play and for Black to play. Combined Operations II / 317 Answer H e re agai n White has an obvious move that doesn 't wo rk. In the game Reshevsky-Lengye l , N i neteenth O l y m p i ad 1 970 , Wh ite was wron g l y attracted b y 1 6 B-KN 5 . Th is appears t o trap t h e queen , b u t B l ac k got out by 1 6 . . . , N-B 5 ; 1 7 O-K3 ( 1 7 B x N , Q x B solves B l ack's prob l e m ) , N-R 6 ch ! ; 1 8 P x N (oth e rwise 1 8 . . , N x B ) . O x N ; 1 9 O x O , B x O , and B l ac k has a good game . I nstea d , 1 6 N-K5 is q u ite strong fo r White. B lack can choose be.tween 1 6 . . . , O-K2 o r 1 6 . . . , N x N; 17 P x N, O-K2 ; i n e ithe r case , 1 6/ 1 7 O-R5 g i ves White dangerous p ressure. B l ac k to move s h o u l d p l ay 16 . . . , N-B5 wh i l e he sti l l has a chance to exchange off one of W h i te's b i shops . . Decide for White to play and for Black to play. Combined Operations I I / 3 1 8 Answer Th i s position i s from Fi ne-S i monson , M i lwau kee 1 93 5 . Fine had just g iven u p his queen and compl eted the transacti o n by 27 N-K5 ch, K-K2 ; 28 R x N , with R + B + N + P + P + P for the quee n . B l ac k can not con­ t i n u e 28 . . . , R x P ? because 29 N-B6 ch wins the quee n . The key move , ' 27 N-K5 c h , b l oc ks the l i ne of p rotect i o n from the queen to th e k n i g ht. I f B l ack p l ays 2 7 . . . , K-K3 t o p rotect the k n i g ht, 28 N-B4 ch w i n s , f o r i f 28 . . . , K-B2 ; 29 N-06 c h , wh i l e i f 28 . . . , K-B3 ; 29 R-KB8 c h , R-KB2 ; 30 R x R c h , K x R ; 3 1 N-06 c h . I n the o r i g i n a l position , 27 R-K5 l ooks attractive but a l l ows B l ack to escape by 27 . . . , O-N8 ch, etc . B l a c k to p l ay can save h i s k n i g ht by 27 . . . , N-B5 (oth e r moves such as 2 7 . . . , R-02, 27 . . . , K-N3 , o r 27 . . . , N-N5 l ose m ate r i a l d i rectly) , but Wh ite sti l l gets good play, and his seve ral extra pawn s , added to h i s rook a n d b i s h o p , m o re than compensate f o r t h e quee n . F o r exa m p l e , after 2 7 . . . , N-B 5 , White c a n p l ay 28 N-K5 c h , K-K2 ; 29 R-O R 8 , making th i ngs very d iffic u l t for B l a c k . Decide for White to play and for Black to play. Combined Operations II I 319 Answer B l ack to p l ay has potenti a l knight forks at 06 and K7 and s ho u l d look for ways to make one o r the oth e r effective . At present, B l ack's 06 is cove red by a k n i g ht and queen , and K7 by a rook . The queen can be exchanged if B l ack chooses , wh i l e the rook and k n i ght in question both defend Wh ite 's other k n i g ht . H e re i s a good starti ng point. In the e l eventh game of Reshevs ky-Fischer, M atch 1 96 1 , B l ack started underm i n i ng Wh ite 's defenders w i th 27 . . , B x N . If 28 N x B , 0 x O ; 29 N x 0 , N-0 6 , fork i n g t h e rooks and w i n n i n g the excha nge ; o r i f 28 0 x O ?, B x 0 , an d B l a c k reta i n s an extra p i ece . Reshevsky p l ayed 28 R x B , but Fischer sti l l won the exchange by a d i fferent fork : 28 . . , 0 x R; 29 N x 0 , N-K7 ch ; 30 K-R 1 , N x 0 c h ; 3 1 P x N . Subsequently , Fischer squandered his w i n n i n g advantage and only d rew this game. Wh ite to p l ay has to contend with . . . , N x OP as we l l as with the combi nation p l ayed by Fischer. The atte m pt to win a pawn by 28 B x N , P x B ; 2 9 0 x P ? backfi res afte r 2 9 . . . , B-05. Wh ite can p l ay 2 8 0 x 0 , B x O ; 2 9 P-N3 , N x P ; 3 0 P x P , P x P ; 3 1 N x P with even materi a l , except that B l ack's two b i shops g ive h i m bette r prospects . As long as White i s g o i n g t o contend w i t h t h e two b i s hops i n a n o p e n endgame , he m i g ht as we l l take the plunge with 28 B x N , P x B ; 29 0 x 0 , B x O ; 30 P x P , P x P ; 3 1 N x P and try t o hold t h e extra pawn ( 3 1 . . . , KR-0 1 ; 32 R-86 ) . . . Decide for White to play and for Black to play. Combined Operations I I / 320 Answer As ide from the obvious weakness of B l ack's k n i g ht, p i n ned to his quee n , t h e r e a l key t o th i s tricky position i s the th reat o f B lack's u s i n g h i s rook a n d k n i g ht t o mate W h i te . T h e obvious move for Wh ite i s 28 P-R 4 , h itti ng t h e p i n n ed kn i ght. H oweve r , B l ack turns t h e tab les w i t h 28 . . . . N-05! (28 . . . . N-B6 has the same effect) . W h i te can not p l ay 29 0 x 0 because 29 . . . . N-K7 ch ; 30 K-R 2 , R-R3 is mate . M o reover , White has no good aJte rnatives . If 29 O-N4 , N-K7 ch ; 30 K-R 2 , R-R3 c h , and W h i te m ust g ive up queen for roo k to stop m ate . Or if 29 O-R4 , N-K7 ch ; 30 K-R 2 , R-B 1 , and White is h e l p less ( 3 1 P-N4 , R ( 1,) x P ; 32 P-N 5 , 0 x N P ! ! ; etc . ) . Another t r y i s 29 P-B4, N-K7 c h ; 30 K-B 2 , b u t 30 . . . . O-K7 dooms W h i te ( 3 1 K-B 3 , N-05 ch ; 32 K-N4 , R-N3) . Wh ite can a l s o p l ay ( afte r 29 P-B4, N-K7 c h ) 30 K-R 2 , R-B 1 ; 3 1 P-B 5, R ( 1 ) x P , but i s sti l l doomed . I n the game G i l g-Engert, Zw i ckau 1 93 0 , White was s uffi c i ently a l e rt and p l ayed 28 KR-N 1 , w i n n ing i n stead of l os i n g . W i th the KR g o n e, the mati ng net has a hole (28 . . . . N-0 5 ? ; 29 0 x 0 , N-K7 ch ; 30 K-B 1 ! ) . Meanwh i l e , the p i nned knight i s threatened and cannot b e saved . I f 28 . . . . P-OR3 ; 29 P-R4 co l l ects t h e k n i g ht. B l ac k to move can uti l ize the same mati ng poss i b i l ities and win by 28 . . . . N-05, as demonstrated above . Decide for White to play and for Black to play. Combined Operations II / 321 A nswer In th i s pos ition , from Game 2 of Janosev i c-F i scher, Match 1 958 , we aga i n have an obvious move that backfi res . With R + B + P + P tor a queen, B l ack has reason to p l ay to wi n-espec i a l ly when the b l ack p i eces a re in the hands of F i scher. It l ooks as it B l ack can wrap u p the game by 27 . . . , R x B; 28 Q x R , B-B3, w i n n i n g the queen and emerg i n g a p i ece ahead . The flaw i s that White can p l ay 28 O-N6 ch i nstead , creati ng a d raw by perpetu a l check (28 . , K-R 1 ; 29 O-R 6 c h , K-'-N 1 ; 30 O-N 6 c h , etc . ) . So F i s c h e r chose 2 7 . . . . R-B4, m a k i n g the th reat o f 28 . . . . R x B va l i d by b l o c k i n g the quee n 's entry. White defended by 29 P-B3 and was able to squeak through with a d raw l ater on (although Fischer m i ssed w i n n i n g chances ) . W hi te t o m ove h a s n o particu l a r l y constructive conti nuati on . H e cou l d p l ay 28 P-B3 o r 28 R-K B 1 a n d awa it deve lopments . N atu ra l ly , i f 28 Q x Q N P ? ? , R x B w i n s . . . Decide for White to play and for Black to play. Combined Operations II / 322 Answer Th i s time the sol ution rea l l y i s s i m p l e-with no boomerang-provided you apprec i ate White 's second move . The pos ition i s from Fischer­ B i s g u i e r , U .S . Championsh i p 1 963-1 964 . Fischer pl ayed 34 R x P, Q x R ; 35 Q x R , and B i s g u i e r res igned . I nstead of getting two rooks for h i s queen ( 3 5 R x Q ? , R x R ) . B l ack i s faced with a hopel ess endgame afte r 35 . . . , Q x Q ; 36 R x Q. B l a c k is a pawn down , h i s k i n g i s tied down , and Wh ite 's king can eas i ly penetrate through KN4 .and KB5 . With the move , B l a c k cannot p rotect h i s OP, because if 34 . . . , R ( 1 )-0 1 ; 35 R x P, Q x R ; 36 R x Q , R x R ; 37 B-N6 , with a double attack on the rook and k n i ght. If 34 . . . , R ( 1 )-K2 , White has 35 R x P , Q x R ; 36 R x Q , R x R ; 37 O-B8 c h , K-N2 ; 3 8 P-R 6 c h , K x P ; 3 9 Q x P , w i n n i ng the k n i g ht by the th reat of 40 Q x B P ch. I f 34 . . . , R (2 )-0 1 , W h i te can strengthen his pos ition by 35 Q-B5 and wait for B l ack to rel ease the OP (e.g . , 35 . . . , P-R 3 ; 36 O-N 6 , O-B 1 ; 37 B-N 6 ; or 35 . . . , R-KB 1 ; 36 R x P , Q x R ; 37 R x Q , R x R ; 38 B x P ! , etc . ) . T h e m a i n d ifference w i th B l a c k to move i nstead of W h i te is that B l a c k can get i nto an endgame that i s n o t q u i te so bad . Decide for White to play and for Black to play. Combined Operations II / 323 Answer Th i s position i s from Em . Lasker-A l exander, N otti ngham 1 936, with White to m ove . Both of Wh ite's b i shops are th reatened , but Lasker stayed i n contro l b y 2 4 B-K7. S i nce 2 4 . . . , B x B ? ? i s answered b y 2 5 Q x R mate (much better than 25 B x R ? ? ) , B l ac k p l ayed 24 . . . , N-N 2 . Lasker con­ tinued 25 B x R , R x B (not 25 . . . , B x B ? ? ; 26 Q x N mate) ; 26 B-B3 and soon won with his exchange u p . B l ac k t o m ove d o e s best with 2 4 . . . , B x B , safe l y w i n n i n g a p i ece and demo l i s h i n g White ' s position fu rthe r afte r 25 B-N 5 , B x P; 26 KR-K1 , B x P ; etc . The a l te rnative 24 . . . , N x B i s good enough to w i n eas i l y , too-even though it w i n s o n l y a p i e c e . Decide for White to play and for Black to play. Combined Operations II / 324 A nswer Th i s i s from the game Fischer-M i n i c , V i n kovc i 1 968 . Havi ng sacrificed the exchange , W hi te ought to have some k i n d of combi n ati o n . Sure enoug h , F i scher p l ayed 23 N x KBP, R x N ; 24 O-K7 , and B l ac k res i g n e d . B l ack's o n l y reasonab l e t r y i s 2 4 . . . , O R-KB 1 , whereupon 25 B x R c h l eads t o m ate i n one or two moves . N atu ra l ly , if 24 . . . , R-R 1 ; 25 0 x R ch , K-R 1 ; 26 0-BB c h , R x O ; 27 R x R m ate . A l s o , F i scher's move is much better than 23 N-N 4 , an attem pt to d i s l odge the b i shop's protect i o n . But B l a c k can p l ay 23 . . . , O-N 4 , and i f 24 P-KR4, 0 x N ; 25 0 x B ? , 0 x R . B l ac k to m ove needs t o protect h i s KB2 adequate l y . If 2 3 . . . , R x P ? ; 2 4 N x K B P sti l l w i n s . The sol ution i s to g ive back the exchange by 23 . . . , R-04 , b l oc k i n g the b i shop . When you 're ahead i n material , it's n i ce to keep th i ngs that way . But don 't be afra i d to g ive some back to keep you r position safe , which i s a l ot better than hang i n g o n to a l l your extra material unti l . you r who l e position col l apses. Decide for White to play and for. Black to play. Combined Operations II / 325 Answer In the game Euwe-M u h r i n g , H i lversu m 1 947 , B l ac k , a rel ative un known , p l ayed 1 3 . . . , B-N 5 . White, an ex-wor l d champ i o n , res i g n e d . W h i te 's k n i ght is attac ked twi ce to one defender, and e i ther 1 4 0-0 1 , N-05 or 1 4 N-N 1 , P-B 6 w i n s a p i ece fo r B l ac k . Such th i ngs happen eve n to wor l d ch am p i o n s . W h i te t o m ove c a n w i n a pawn b y 1 4 P x P , P x P ; 1 5 0 x P b u t gets i nto a l ot of tro u b l e afte r 1 5 . . . , N-04 ; 1 6 O-N 3 , N-B5. H oweve r , th i s wou l d b e prefe rab l e t o t i m i d l i nes s u c h as 1 4 O-B 1 ? , B-N 5 ; 1 5 N-0 2 , P-B6 ! o r 1 4 N-N 1 , B-N 5 ; 1 5 P-B 3 ? , P x P ! Decide for White t o play and for Black to play . Combined Operations II I 326 Answer Th i s p o s i t i o n i s from a wel l-known game, 8ern ste i n-Capa b l anca, M oscow 1 9 1 4 . Wh ite had just captu red a paw n , fi g u r i n g i t cou l d be done safe l y . Capa b l anca showed otherwise b y 29 . , R x R ; 3 0 R x R , O-N 7 ! , w i n n i n g o n t h e s p o t . The q u e e n i s i m m u n e , s i nce 3 1 0 x 0 l eaves t h e b a c k rank vu l ne ra b l e to 3 1 . , R-08 mate . I t h a rd l y h e l ps to p l ay 3 1 O-K1 , 0 x R ; etc . B l a c k shou l d avo id 29 , R x R ; 30 R x R , O-N8 ch ? ; 3 1 0-8 1 , R-08 ? ? because h i s own back rank i s vul nerab l e to 32 R-88 ch ! W i th W h i te to move , 30 R x R w i pes out B l ac k . . . . . . . . Decide for White to play and for Black to play. Combined Operations I I I 327 Answer This pos ition arose i n the first game of the World Championsh i p M atch 1 960 between Ta i and Botvi n n i k . White has an extra pawn , but the n ature of the position i n d i cates that the issue wi l l be settled i n the m i d d l e g a m e . B l ack's queen a n d rook a r e on t h e s a m e d i agona l , a n d T a i too k advantage of th i s by 29 P-B4 , a very stro ng move . Botvi n n i k t r i ed to g ive up the exchange with 29 . . . , P x P ; 30 B x P, O-N 2 ; 31 B x R , Q x B but g ave up when Ta i p l ayed 32 P-R S . If B l ac k tries to defend h i s OP by 29 . . . , N-K2 , White p l ays 30 P x P, g i v i n g B l ac k h i s choice of l os i n g a p i ece by 30 . . . , N x P ; 3 1 B-OB4, etc . , or by 30 . . . , B x P; 3 1 B x N , Q x B ; 3 2 O-B 1 c h ! (32 R x B w i n s the p i ece at once but a l l ows B l ack to resist for a wh i l e ) and i f . . . , B-B 3 ; 33 B-N S , R-N 3 ; 34 R-B4, 0-02 ; 35 R x B c h , R x R ; 36 Q x R c h , Q x O ; 37 B x 0 , K x B ; 38 P-R S , and t h e pawn quee n s . B l ac k t o move c a n p revent t h e debac l e b y 29 . . . , N-K4 , so that i f 30 P-B4 ? , N x P ; 3 1 B x N , P x B . Combined Operations II / 328 A Final Word Now that you have finished this book, I'm sure you will be greatly helped in future chess play. The combinations are there, waiting for the player who can see them. Look for the patterns you have learned here, and apply them on your opponents. Play chess-and continue to study it, too ! There are many chess books, some good, some not so good. There are also many types of chess books-on openings, on the middle game, on endings, on collections of games from tournaments or games played by a particular player. I could make general recommendations, but whatever else you read depends on your time, interest, and level of play. You may, however, find it interesting and instructive to see how the combinations in this book arose. (A jealous rival of Alexander Alekhin once lamented that he could see the combinations as well as Alekhin but couldn't get the right positions nearly as often. ) You can observe the development of combinations by playing over the games cited in this book. The majority of the games used here can be found in the following : Robert G. Wade and Kevin J. O'Connell, Bobby Fischer's Chess Games (Garden City, N.Y. : Doubleday, 1 9 72 ) , which contains all of Fischer's games until the 1 972 match with Spassky-there are several books available on the match itself; Robert G. Wade and S. Gligoric, The World Chess Championship (New York : Harper & Row, 1 972 ) , which contains all world championship games , 1 948-1 969; and A. Alekhin ( e ) , Nottingham Chess T01Jtrnament ( New York : Dover, 1 962 ) . Several other games can be found in Ludek Pachman, Modern Chess Strategy (New York : Dover, 1 97 1 ) ; Chernev, The Most Instructive Games of Chess Ever Played (New York : Simon and Schuster, 1 9 6 5 ) ; and Mik­ hail Botvinnik, J OO Selected Games (New York : Dover, 1 9 60 ) . A Final Word / 329